Home

CubeSuite+ V1.01.00 Integrated Development Environment User`s

1. R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 191 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Allocate automatic vari ables to saddr area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the automatic variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rk option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Size of char rk1 Allocates char and unsigned char types auto matic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int rk2 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long rk4 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Structure union array rkm Yes Size of char and structure union array rk1m Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rk2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rk Allocates structure union and array types auto matic variables to the saddr area Allocat
2. Interpret long as int Select whether to compile by interpreting long descriptions as int This corresponds to the zl option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zl Interprets long as int No Does not interpret long as int R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 186 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Disable an int extension Select whether to disable the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the for function return values of functions This corresponds to the zb option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zb Disables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions No Enables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions 9 Memory Model The detailed information on the memory model are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 187 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Use static model R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the number of bytes in the common area when the static model is used This corresponds to the sm option of the compiler Default No How to change Select
3. Displays category nodes and files in the specified order by the user default You can change the display order of the category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 22 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 7 Update file dependencies When you perform a change changing include file paths adding an include statement of the header file to the C source file and assembler source file etc that effects the file dependencies in the compile option settings or assemble option settings you must update the dependencies of the relevant files Updating file dependencies is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project 1 For the entire project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies 2 For the active project Figure 2 15 Update Dependencies Item Build fi Build Project F7 GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 ae Clean Project Build sample Rebuild sample H p Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample T Build Mode Settings El Batch Build TP Build Option List From the Build menu select Update Dependencies of active projecil Figure 2 16 Update Dependencies of active project Item Build fi Build Project F7 EF Rebuild Project Shift F7 ga Clean Project Rapid Build ay Update Dependencies Bl Build sample Rebuild sample
4. How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 60 single byte characters 30 double byte characters Other detailed information on assembly are displayed and the configuration can be changed Kanji character code of source Select the Kanji character code of the source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn options of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Shift_JIS zs Interprets the kanji code of the source as Shift_JIS EUC JP ze Interprets the kanji code of the source as EUC JP Unspecified zn Interprets the source as not containing kanji codes Use Self programming Select whether to use self programming This corresponds to the self option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes self Even if the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address no error is output for the CALL 8100H descrip tion If the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address an error is output for the CALL 8100H description R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 265 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed before assemble pro cessing Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing The foll
5. No ng nga Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated 2 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the assembler is searched The refer ence point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use
6. The file with individual build option I Highlight the file with read only attribute The read only file added to the project is displayed in italic The file without read only attribute The file with read only attribute R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 149 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE m Highlight the file that does not exist The file that is added to the project but does not exist is grayed out and its icon is dimmed The file that exists The file that does not exist 2 main c n Highlight the build target file lt 1 gt The file which the error occurred during building rapid building rebuilding compiling or assem bling is highlighted as the example below The file without errors or warnings c_ main c The file with error c main c The file with warning G main c Remarks 1 The file with both the error and the warning is highlighted in red 2 The highlight is canceled when the build option general option or individual option or the build mode is changed lt 2 gt The names of the following files are displayed in boldface The source files that have not been compiled after edited The source files after cleaning has been executed The source files after build tool options have been changed The source files after any build mode has been changed Remark The file names are all displayed in boldface right after the project is open
7. Code size information start Output the total code size per allocation destination 3 8 2 Replacement information file The replacement information file is an auxiliary information file with details about allocation at the area level To configure the replacement information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for replacement information file property and the Replacement information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node Current Information xx k Replacement Information Table EMORY 2 ROM DRESS 3 0x00000 EMORY 2 BANKOO DRESS 3 0x08000 EMORY 2 BANKO1 DRESS 3 0x18000 EMORY 2 BANKO2 DRESS 3 0x28000 EMORY 2 BANKO3 DRESS 3 0x38000 EMORY 2 BANKO4 DRESS 3 0x48000 MEMORY 2 BANKO5 DRESS 3 0x58000 5 COMMON 6 callt ic 1 6 asm3 asm 1 6 asml asm 1 6 filel c 1 6 file2 c 2 6 file1l0_4 c 10 6 file10_3 c 10 6 file10_2 c 10 6 filel0 c 10 6 ile1000_3 c 1000 6 ile100 c 100 6 ile1000_2 c 1000 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 121 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 0
8. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Enables the file to write No Does not enable the file to write The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Memo R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Add memos to the file Add one item in The added mem one line os are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 memos can be specified 2tENESAS Page 269 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on the category that the user added File node Build tool generated files node and Startup node categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Category Information 2 Notes Figure A 22 Property Panel Category Information Tab Property New category Property Category Information Category name New category Notes Category name This is the name of this category The category name can be between 1 and 200 characters Also the category name colored in gray is fixed Description of each category 1 Category Information The detailed infor
9. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file No Does not set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file Set individual assemble option Select whether to set an assemble option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file This property is displayed only when an assembler source file is selected on the Project Tree panel and Yes is selected in the Set as build target property Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file No Does not set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file File type 2 Memory Bank Display the type of the selected file Default C source when C source file is selected Assembly source when assembler source file is selected Link directive when link directive file is selected Variable information when variables information file is selected Function information when function information file is selected Object when object file is selected Library when library file is selected How to change Changes not allowed The detailed information on the me
10. R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 315 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Import File dialog box This dialog box is used to select a link order specification file to import to the Link Order dialog box Figure A 46 Select Import File Dialog Box Select Import File 4 sample DefaultBuild El LinkOrder mtls My Recent Documents i mynai Fies of pe Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Order dialog box click the Import button Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the link order specification file exists The project folder is selected when the file is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 316 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the name of a link order specification file 4 Files of type area Select the type of the link order specification file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Function buttons Open Imports the specified file to
11. Start build sample DefaultBuild gt srco main c gt DefaultBuild sample 1mf gt DefaultBuild sample hex Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 al EOF OAR Il Fe The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows start gt gt All programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite DISCONNECT R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 141 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar Displays the menu relates to build a Project The Project menu shows menu items to operate the project and others Add New Subproject Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Favorite Projects Displays a cascading menu to use to open or save your favorite project Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt
12. x output file name Interpretation when omitted No cross reference list file is output Function The x option specifies the output of a cross reference list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The cross reference list file is valuable for checking the referencing frequency definition and referenced point of a symbol Application Use the x option to output the cross reference list file and specify the location to which a cross reference list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the x option is specified the output file name will be input file name xrt If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the x option is specified the output file name will be output file name xrt Even if an internal error other than C0101 or a compilation error with the number F0024 or a number starting from E occurs a cross reference list file is created However the contents of the file are not guaranteed Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the cross reference list file prime xrf describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c x Output example is shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 373 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO C Compiler Vx xx Cross refere
13. 1 Message area Show messages related to folders selected in this dialog box 2 Folder location area Select a folder to set in the caller of the dialog box By default the folder set in the caller is selected Remark When the area is blank or the path which does not exist is entered C Documents and Settings user name My Documents is selected instead Function buttons Button Function Make New Folder Creates a new folder in the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New Folder OK The designated folder path is set to the area that this dialog box is called from Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 305 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Import Build Options dialog box This dialog box is used to select the target project file for import the build options Figure A 41 Import Build Options Dialog Box Import Build Options 1 4 Look in sample E DefaultBuild E sample mtpj My Recent Documents Desktop A My Documents 39 My Computer 4 ty Netevork PFFi Project Filef mtpi Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu
14. Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 2046 decimal number Number of lines on 1 page R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Specifies the number of lines on 1 page of the list file If 0 is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number 2tENESAS Page 264 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Tab width Specify the tab width of the list file This corresponds to the It option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to 8 decimal number Header title 5 Others Specify the header of the assemble list file A string containing double byte characters and single byte spaces can be specified This corresponds to the Ih option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option
15. These options specify the format of a hex file to be output Application Use these options to specify the format of a hex file to be output from among Intel standard Intel extended Extended tektronix Motorola S type standard address and Motorola S type 32 bit address Description This section describes each option Hex Format Intel standard OH to FFFFH up to 64 KB Intel expanded OH to FFFFFH up to 1 MB Extended tektronix OH to FFFFFFFFH up to 4 GB Motorola S type standard address OH to FFFFFFH up to 16 MB Motorola S type 32 bit address OH to FFFFFFFFH up to 4 GB Example of use To specify a hex file to be output as the Motorola S format standard address describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 lmf km R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 522 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows es J y Description format ypath name Interpretation when omitted The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 Path registered in the device file installer 2 Path by which the oc78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option reads a device file from the specified path Application Use the y
16. Undefined symbol Symbol value Displays the local symbol values Local symbol name Displays the local symbol names 3 3 5 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the linker is started up LK78KO l error 2 E3405 3 Undefined symbol CONVAH in file kOmain rel Description Format Type of error Outputs the type of error Error number Outputs error numbers in the nnnn format F is output if is an abort error E if it is a fatal error C if is an Internal error and W if it is a warning nnnn the error number is displayed as a 4 digit decimal number no zero suppression Error message Outputs error messages R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 113 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 Object Converter The object converter outputs the following list Output List File Name Output List Name To configure the error list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Object Convert Options tab Select Yes e on the Output error list file property in the Error List category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated
17. If starting address is specified by the object convert option u filling is started from the start address or the address where the code is located whichever is lower Filling is not performed for the SFR area FFOOH to FFFFH Description format is described below ufilling value start address size Remark may be omitted R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 133 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 11 Using the variables information file generator a If a pragma section directive is specified with an AT start address In a section defined by a pragma section directive specified with an AT start address allocating variables to the saddr area may cause incorrect behavior C source pragma section DATA CDATA AT OCFOOH define dnil int O0xcf00 int nil sreg in vfi __sreg int xl x2 void func void main Variables information file variable information sreg 7x2 1 2 0 7x1 1 2 0 In the C source above the values of variables x1 and x2 are both expected to be 0x10 But if variable ni1 is allocated to the saddr area from Oxfe20 in the variables information file then the program will not behave as intended variable x1 will have the value of ni1 which is 0x10 and variable x2 will have the value of address Oxcf00 The variables information file generator does not specify sreg for variables in sections defined by
18. Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Apply all setting and closes this dialog box Ignore the setting and closes this dialog box Apply all setting does not close this dialog box Display the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 301 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to projects Figure A 39 Add Existing File Dialog Box Add Existing File 1 Look in sample E BuildModez Lf DefaultBuild My Recent sample_lib Documents main c My Documents My cares ji iename E C source file c Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or file and then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the file to add to projects exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list
19. Property e main c Property E Debuginformation Add debug information Yesf dd to both assembly and object file g2 E Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qx2 El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 Message Extension Memory Model Output File Assembly File Data Control List File Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option Build Settings A Individual Assemble Opti File Information You can set compile options for the C source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab by default 2 When setting assemble options for an assembler source file Select an assembler source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual assemble option property the message dialog box Figure 2 72 Message Dialog Box is displayed Figure 2 71 Set individual assemble option Property Are you sure you want to set the current assemble options to the individual assemble options If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Assemble Options tab
20. Temporary file List file The I O files of the librarian are shown below See 3 5 Librarian for details about output lists Input files File Name Subcommand file Table B 25 I O Files of Librarian Explanation File containing the subcommands and parame ters for the executed commands user created file Default File Type Output files List file File containing the result of library file information output Ast I O files Object module file Object module file output by the compiler or assembler rel Library file File used to input the library files output by the librarian and update the contents lib Temporary file File created automatically by the librarian when forming a library Temporary files are deleted when execution of the librarian ends Lbxxxxxx y y 1 to 6 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 528 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 2 1 2 3 Functions Formation of a library of modules The assembler and linker create one file for every module they output This means that if a large number of modules are created the number of files also grows The assembler there fore includes a function for collecting a number of object modules in a single file This function is called module library formation and a file which is organized as a library is called a libra
21. The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Replacement information Specify the replacement information file name file name Use the extension txt If the extension is omitted txt is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replace
22. To output a help message on the display describe as C gt 1k78k0 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 480 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Linker Vx xx xx Xxx xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation usage 1k78k0 option input file option The option is as follows means omissible ffile Input option or input file name from specified file dfile Read directive file from specified file bfile Read library file from specified file idirectory directory Set library file search path o file no Create load module file with specified name Not p file np Create link map file with specified name Not e file ne Create error list file with specified name Not tdirectory Set temporary directory km nkm Output map list to link map file Not kd nkd Output directive file image to link map file Not kp nkp Output public symbol list to link map file Not k1 nk1 Output local symbol list to link map file Not ll page length Specify link map file lines per page I f nif Add Form Feed at end of the link map file Not s memory area ns Create stack symbol in specified memory area Not g ng Output symbol information to load module file Not ydirectory Set device file search path j nj Create load module file if fatal error occurred Not w n Change warning
23. button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 5 Frequently Used Options for Link The detailed information on frequently used options for linking are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for library projects Using libraries Specify the library file name lib to be used other than the standard libraries Add one file in one line The library files are searched from the library path This corresponds to the b option of the linker The specified library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Additional library paths Specify the search folder to be used other than the standard libraries The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with th
24. 0601000013F3019A0080D8 020000020000FC 10010600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9 10011600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE9 10012600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFD9 10BFFOOOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF51 020000021000EC 04800000000000AFCD 020000021000EC 10800400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF7C 10801400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF6C In the case of the bank number CPU address the code 00 00 00 AF visible to address 18000H are written as is to address 18000H 13 Variable information file specification option ma If a comma is included in the folder name or file name of the file specified by the ma option the compiler cannot recognize the file appropriately because it regards a comma as a delimiter Do not include a comma in the folder name and file name 14 Size of void type pointers When the mf option is specified function pointers are 4 bytes and void type pointers are 2 bytes For this reason handling function pointers as void type pointers could result in data loss 15 Generating function information files When the mf option is specified do the following if warning W0060 is output a Rebuild the project again If warning W0060 is not output and linking is successful the build has completed successfully b If warning W0060 is still output after the rebuild check the following Make sure that global functions with the same name are not defined in multiple source fil
25. 300 gi LK78KO 476 go LK78KO 475 H help 549 l i CC78K0 363 i LK78K0 466 i RA78K0 407 Import Build Options dialog box 306 INC78KO 363 Include file 132 J j LK78KO 447 j RA78KO 403 K k CC78K0 359 ka RA78KO 410 kd LK78K0 455 ki OC78KO 522 kie OC78KO 522 kl LK78KO 459 km LK78K0 453 km OC78K0 522 kme OC78KO0 522 kp LK78KO 457 ks RA78KO 412 kt OC78KO0 522 kx RA78KO 413 L I LCNV78K0 559 If CC78K0 378 If LB78K0 536 If LK78K0 463 If RA78KO 424 Ih RA78KO 419 li CC78KO 379 Librarian 528 Link Order dialog box 291 Linker 438 list 547 List converter 551 Il CC78KO 376 Il LB78KO 535 Il LK78KO 461 Ii RA78K0 417 Load module file 439 495 552 Local symbol list 112 It CC78K0 377 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 578 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX It RA78KO Iw CC78K0 w LB78KO w RA78KO ma CC78K0O Main window Map list 110 mf CC78K0 N 422 375 534 415 391 141 392 ne LCNV78KO 561 ne LK78KO ne OC78K0 ne RA78KO0 ng CC78KO ng LK78KO ng RA78KO 464 520 425 357 448 40
26. A function is called as shown below when the relink function is used a To call function in the boot area from the boot area The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved before they are programmed to the boot area Figure B 7 In Boot Area void func_roml1 void void func_rom2 void func_roml 7 The function can be called without problem b To call function in the flash area from the flash area The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved in the flash area Figure B 8 In Flash Area void func_flash1 void void func_flash2 void func_flashl 7 The function can be called without problem R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 483 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE c d To call function in the flash area from the boot area When a function in the flash area is called from the boot area the address of the function cannot be known from the boot area because the function size etc have been changed in the flash area In other words a function in the flash area cannot be directly called To solve this execution jumps to the branch table in the flash area Execute the jump instruction to the relevant function from that table and jump to the intended function Figure B 9 From Boot Ar
27. CC78KO warning No return value R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 128 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS 4 2 Assembler This section introduces the lists of sample programs attached to the assembler 4 2 1 kOmain asm NAME SAMPM KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine KREKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKEKKEK PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH EXTRN _ STBEG chip initialize MOVW SP _ STBEG HDTSA 1AH HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table A B R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 129 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS 4 2 2 kOsub asm NAME SAMPS KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program sub routine input condition 2 HL lt hex 2 code output condition BC register lt ASCII 2 code KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK PUBLIC CONVAH CONVAH hex lower code load store result hex lower code load store result KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKKK subroutine convert ASCII code input Acc lower 4bits lt hex code output Acc lt ASCII
28. Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Automatic variables and norec argumeni qrt Assigns auto variables and norec arguments to registers and assigns them also to the saddr area Yes Automatic and regis ter variables and norec argument qr2 Assigns auto variables register variables and norec arguments to registers and assigns them also to the saddr area No Does not specify assigning register variables to the saddr area Not use sign extended calculation for char Select whether to perform char related calculations without pan integral extension This corresponds to the qc option of the compiler Default Yes qc How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qc Performs char related calculations without pan integral extension Note No Performs char related calculations with pan integral exten sion R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 177 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Interpret char to unsigned char Select whether to interpret the char without qualifier as a unsigned char This corresponds to the qu option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qu Interprets the char without qualifier as a unsigned char No Does not specify interpreting the char without qualifier a
29. Expands define Performs conditional compilations of if ifdef and ifndef Expands include Performs line processing Performs line number and paging processing Remark Two or more process types can be specified If the p option is not specified the k option is invalid If two or more k options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To delete comments and perform line number and paging processing when the preprocess list file prime ppl is output C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c p kcen Output example is shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 359 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO C Compiler Vx xx Preprocess List Date xx XXX XXXX Page Command cF051144 prime c p kcen In file prime c PPL file prime ppl Para file xf define TRUE T define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file Vx xx R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 360 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocess specification The preprocess specification options are as follows Description format dmacro name definition name macro name definition name two or more types can be specified Interpretation when omitted Only the macro definiti
30. Expected function prototype prime warning No return value rime H warnin No return value p rime warnin No return value p Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file Vx xx Compilation complete 0 error s and 5 warning s found R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 370 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format se output file name Interpretation when omitted No error list file is output Function The se option adds the C source file to the error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the se option to output a error list file and a C source file together Description If the output file name is omitted when the se option is specified the output file name will be input file name cer If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the se option is specified the output file name will be output file name cer If the drive name is omitted when the se option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive The folder and file name cannot be specified for include files If the file type of the include file is H the error list file with the file type of her is output to the current drive It the file type of the include file is C the error list file with the file type of cer is output In all other cases the e
31. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Size of char rd1 Allocates char and unsigned char types external variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int rd2 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types external variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long rd4 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers types external variables to the saddr area Yes Structure union array rdm Yes Size of char and structure union array rdim Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rd2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rd Allocates structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types external variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers structure union and array types external variables to the saddr a
32. If the no option is specified the j option is invalid Example of use To output an object module file kOmain rel even if a fatal error occurs describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm j R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 403 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information output specification The debug information output specification options are as follows g ng ga nga g ng Description format ng Interpretation when omitted 9 Function The g option specifies that debug information local symbol information is to be added to an object module file The ng option disables the g option Application Use the g option when performing symbolic debugging of data that includes local symbol Use the ng option in the following three cases 1 Symbolic debugging of global symbols only 2 Debugging without symbols 3 When only the object is required evaluation using PROM etc Description If both the g and ng options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the g ng and ga nga options are specified at the same time the ga nga option is valid regardless of the position in which it is specified If the no option is specified the g option is invalid Cautions Acontrol instruction DEBUG NODEBUG or DG NODG with the same function as the g and ng options can be
33. Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file exten sion Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 142 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Sets selected project or sub project as Active Project APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set the selected project or subproject as an active project Close Project Closes the current project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Save Project Saves the configuration information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the configuration information of the current project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file system Save Project and Development Tools as Packag
34. Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of the compiler is searched The refer ence point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subprop erties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools 2tENESAS Page 163 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPEND
35. Tag jump 273 Text Edit dialog box U u CC78K0 362 u OC78KO 518 v v CC78K0 381 vo VF78K0 573 vs VF78K0 574 vx VF78K0 575 w w CC78K0 380 w LK78K0 473 X x CC78K0 373 y y CC78K0 387 y LK78K0 471 y OC78K0 523 y RA78K0 431 Z z CC78K0 384 zb LK78K0 474 ze RA78K0 430 281 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 310 zf OC78K0 525 tENESAS Page 580 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX zn RA78KO 430 zs RA78K0 430 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 581 of 585 Oct 01 2011 Revision Record Description Summary Oct 01 2011 First Edition issued CubeSuite V1 01 00 User s Manual 78KO Build Publication Date Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation 2 CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 903 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628
36. c Determining priority The value calculated via the expression below determines the priority higher values mean higher priority Not number of references reference type R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 567 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Note Reference Type normal 1 changing from the normal area to the callt area reduces code by 2 byte callt 0 functions already allocated to the callt area are not targets for allocation Example func1 10 times normal 10 2 20 func3 10 times callt 10 0 0 Function func is not eligible for allocation since it has already been allocated to the callt area Remark The following functions are excluded from prioritization Function in the flash area Functions in the flash area are not eligible for allocation because they cannot be registered in the callt area However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments Allocation is also not possible if one is in the boot area and referenced from the flash area these will be output to the file as comments callt function These are not eligible for allocation because they have already been registered in the callt table However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments static function static functions are not eligible for allocation whether they are inside a file or a function However that references to th
37. of bytes in the common area Yes 11 bytes common area sm11 Specifies 11 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 12 bytes common area sm12 Specifies 12 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 13 bytes common area sm13 Specifies 13 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 14 bytes common area sm14 Specifies 14 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 15 bytes common area sm15 Specifies 15 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 16 bytes common area sm16 stENESAS Specifies 16 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Page 250 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Use static model exten sion APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the extension method when the static model is used extended This corresponds to the zm option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Only use common area for args and auto vars zm1 Uses only the common area for arguments and auto variables Yes Only use saddr area for args Uses only the saddr area for argu and auto vars zm2 ments and auto variables No Does not use t
38. s Startup Drop the file here Caution To adda startup routine drop a file onto the Startup node See 2 3 1 Set a startup routine for details about using a startup routine b Add a folder Drag a folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box opens Remark You can also add multiple folders to the project at the same time by dragging multiple folders at same time and dropping them onto the project tree Caution When a folder with the name that is more than 200 characters is dropped the folder is added to the project tree as a category with the name that 201st character and after are deleted R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 16 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 6 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Library file lib Object file rel Text file txt Subfolder level to search In the dialog select the file types to add to the project specify the number of subfolder levels to add and then click the OK button Remark You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected
39. statin 4s a result build is executed in parallel with edit When rapid build is made a Text Editor effective we recommend diligently saving a file by Ctrl S after the file is edited ig Update 2 gt C Observe registered files changing 3 gt Enable Break Sound 4 C Observe downloaded load module files changing 5 i Initialize Settings Function buttons tnitiaize All Settings The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enable the rapid build N feature default Do not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 300 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like Do not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved
40. 0 Failed 0 Projects Tuesday April 27 Z010 7 48 56 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 47 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Set Memory Bank Relocation Options To set options for the memory bank relocation support tool select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various memory bank relocation options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 59 Property Panel Memory Bank Relocation Options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property E Output File Use memory bank relocation support tool No Use memory bank relocation support tool Selects whether to execute the memory bank relocation support tool afrer build processing If Yes is selected in this field the following properties changes automatically 1 Compiler Options tab gt Assembly File category gt Output assemble file property value changes to YesfWith no C source info f a 2 Compiler Options tab gt Debug Information category gt Add debug information property value changes Yesl dd to both assembly and object file g2 3 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output assemble list file property value changes to Yes 4 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output with cross reference list property value changes to Yes Link Opti O
41. 1 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 2 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 3 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 4 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Project is displayed 1 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 1 path in Favorite Projects 2 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 2 path in Favorite Projects 3 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 3 path in Favorite Projects 4 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 4 path in Favorite Projects Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File
42. 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format createAlibrary file name Atransaction cAlibrary file name Atransaction abbreviated form Function The create subcommand creates a new library file Description The size of the created library file is 0 When a transaction is specified a module is registered while the library file is created library file name If a specified file already exists it will be overwritten transaction An object module file carrying the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file cannot be registered A module with the same name as a module in the library file cannot be registered If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the library file cannot be created Example of use To register modules m1 and m2 while the library file kO lib is created describe as create kO lib ml rel m2 rel lt Before file creation gt m1 m2 I I lt After file creation gt kO lib m1 m2 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 542 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format addAlibrary file nameAtransaction aAlibrary file nameAtransaction Abbreviated form Function The add subcommand adds a module to a library file Description A module can be added to a library file even if no modu
43. C source Outputs the parameter file contents Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed This is the input C source Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 9 on the next line Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Device file version 3 1 4 Cross reference list file Displays the version number of the input device file Cross reference list files contain lists of identifiers such as declarations definitions referenced functions and variables They also include other information such as attributes and line numbers These are output in the order they are found To configure the cross reference list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab Select Yes x on the Output cross reference list file property in the List File category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property If PAGEWIDTH is 80 the result is as follows R20UT0783E
44. Caution The CA78KO provides various kinds of startup routines and libraries See CubeSuite 78KO Coding about startup routines and libraries B 1 3 Method for manipulating 1 C compiler startup The following two methods can be used to start up the C compiler a Startup from the command line X Current drive name Path name Current folder name cc78k0 Command name of the C compiler R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 337 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the C compiler When specifying two or more compile options separate the options with a blank space Specify the suboption or file name after a compile option without inserting a blank such as aspace Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the compile options See B 1 4 Option for details about compile options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks C source file name File name of source to be compiled Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Example To output the assembler source file prime asm and perform optimization based on the precedence of code size describe as cc78k0 cF051144 prime c aprime asm qx3 b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the C compiler will not fi
45. CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE replace Description format replaceAlibrary file nameAtransaction rAlibrary file nameAtransaction Abbreviated form Function The replace subcommand replaces an existing module in a library file with the module in other object module files Description An abort error occurs if no module with the same name as the module to be replaced exists in the library file An abort error occurs if the module to be replaced carries the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file The file name of the object module to be replaced must be the same as the file name under which it was registered in the library file If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the condition of the library file will not be changed Example of use To replace module m2 in the library file kO lib describe as replace k0 lib m2 rel lt Before module replacement gt kO lib m1 m2 m2 m3 lt After module replacement gt kO lib m1 m3 m2 Because the new module m2 is registered after the module m2 in the library file is deleted m2 is last in order in the library file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 545 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format pickAlibrary file nameA Am
46. Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the target project file for import the build options exists The current project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 306 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the name of the project file 4 Files of type area Select the type of the project file Project file mtpj Project file Subproject file mtsp Subproject file Function buttons Open Imports the build options of the specified project file to the current project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 307 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog box This dialog box is used to select the variables information file for boot area to set in the caller of the dialog box Figure A 42 Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area Dialog Box Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area 1 4 Look in sample D DefaultBuild My Recent Documents Lg Desktop My Documents 39 My Computer ye PFlename a Cn 4 vio ttetwork i Variables information file for boot area fi
47. Interpretation when omitted The object file for the specified device is output Function The common option specifies the output of an object module file common to the 78K0 Application Use the common option to generates an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO regardless of the device type specification option c The output object module file can be linked with an object file for which a different device in the 78KO is specified Description Specify this option to generate an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO Cautions Even when the common option is specified the device type specification option c or control instruction of the same function must not be omitted An abort error occurs if the common object specification option common is specified for all the input object module files to be linked Example of use To generate an object code that can be used commonly in the 78KO describe as C gt ra78k0 kOsub c cF051144 common R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 434 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Self programming specification The self programming specification option is as follows self self Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The self option does not output an error when CALL 8100H is described even if address 8100H is outside the access range i e
48. R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 157 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node file or category node and then select Property from the View menu or Property from the context menu Remark When either one of the Build tool node file or category node on the Project Tree panel while the Property panel is opened the detailed information of the selected node is displayed Description of each area 1 2 3 4 Selected node area Display the name of the selected node on the Project Tree panel When multiple nodes are selected this area is blank Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel is displayed by every category in the list And the settings of the information can be changed directly Mark E indicates that all the items in the category are expanded Mark H indicates that all the items are col lapsed You can expand collapse the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name Mark HEX indicates that only the hex number is allowed to input in the text box See the section on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents Property description area Display the brief description of the categories and their contents sele
49. Remark Up to 500000 lines of messages can be displayed If 500001 lines or more of messages are output then the excess lines are deleted oldest first The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Message Type Example Default Description Normal message Character color Black Information on something Background color White Warning Character color Blue Warning for the operation Background color Normal color Error message Character color Red Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background color Light gray R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 272 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message the Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when build ing b Display help help with regard to the message in the line is shown by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing the F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error message is dis played c Sav
50. The folder is added below the File node Note that on the project tree the folder is the category Remark When the category node created by the user exists you can add a file below the node by dropping the file onto the node see 2 3 5 Classify a file into a category for a category node 2 Creating and adding an empty file On the project tree select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box opens R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 17 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 7 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Function information file fir Text file txt Empty C source file File name main c File location D work sample i In the dialog box specify the file to be created and then click the OK button The file is added below the File node The project tree after adding the file will look like the one below Figure 2 8 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree 2 O8 L sample Proiect uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool m P Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool SS 78K0 Simulator Debug T
51. This option corresponds to the g and ga options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab 2 6 1 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 38 Additional include paths Property Additional include paths 0 ystem include paths ystem include paths U E Macro definition Macro definition 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 34 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 39 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line F Aine ProjectDir Browse C Subfolders are automatically included Placeholder Placeholder Value Description cad ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite ProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the project folder v lt Enter an include path per line in Path One path per
52. an interrupt function as VECT Symbol type Displays the symbol type Types include char int short long and field u is added at the start for unsigned type Additional types include void float double Idouble long double func array pointer struct union enum bit inter and define Symbol name If the symbol name exceeds 15 characters and fit into a line that name is output as itis If it exceeds 15 characters and one line the excess is output from column 23 on the next line and items 13 and 14 are output from column 39 on the next line Symbol definition line number This outputs the line number and file name defined for the symbol and is displayed as line number 5 digit include file number 2 digit Symbol reference line number This outputs the line number and file name that reference the symbol and is displayed as line number 5 digit include file number 2 digit If the line contents exceed the line length the remaining contents are output beginning at column 47 of the next line Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Device file version Displays the version number of the input device file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 101 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 Assembler The assembler outputs the following list Output List File Name O
53. described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASADEBUG ASADG Abbreviated form ASANODEBUG ASANODG Abbreviated form R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 404 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To add debug information local symbol information to an object module file kOmain rel describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm g R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 405 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ga nga Description format nga Interpretation when omitted ga Function The ga option specifies that assembler source debug information is to be added to an object module file The nga option disables the g and ga option Application Use the ga option when performing debugging at the source level of the assembler To perform debugging at the source level you will need the separately available integrated debugger Use the nga option in the following three cases 1 Debugging without an assembler source 2 When only the object is required evaluation using PROM etc 3 Debugging at the source level of the C compiler Description If both the ga and nga options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the g ng and ga nga options are specified at the same time the ga nga option is valid
54. folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Reference information Specify the reference information file name file name Use the extension txt If the extension is omitted txt is automatically added The following placeholders are sup
55. function name total stack size frame size Remarks 1 If the unknown function is written in assembly language then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe unknown function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 327 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE If the unknown function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name If the unknown function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 2 Adjusted Functions Display a list of functions for which information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified intentionally via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file This area generally dis plays modified adjusted functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the adjusted function is written in assembly language then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name If the adjusted function is a recursive function then a
56. int i func_rec2 i void func_rec2 int i if i func_recl i 1 void funcl void func_recl 2 void func2 void func_rec2 2 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 326 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box This dialog box is used to display a list of functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack information functions for which information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions was changed intentionally and functions for which the stack usage tracer forcibly set an additional margin Figure A 49 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions sub11 4 4 sub1 28 amp 8 4 1 Function buttons 2 gt System Library Functions 3 gt The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Stack Usage Tracer window select the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists from the Option menu Description of each area 1 Unknown Functions Display a list of unknown functions functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack informa tion This area generally displays unknown functions in the following format
57. kOmain asm 29 RA78KO error E2407 Undefined symbol reference CONVAH kOmain asm 29 RA78KO error E2303 Illegal expression Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found If the assembler detects a fatal error during assembly which makes it unable to continue assembly processing the assembler outputs a message to the display cancels assembly and returns control to the host operating system Examples 1 A non existent source file is specified C gt ra78k0 sample asm 78K0 Assembler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F2006 File not found sample asm Program aborted In the above example a non existent source file is specified An error occurs and the assembler aborts assembly 2 A non existent assemble option is specified C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm z 78K0 Assembler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F2012 Missing parameter z Please enter RA78K0 if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example a non existent assemble option is specified An error occurs and the assembler aborts assembly R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 397 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set assemble options from C
58. kl and nkl options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the kl option is invalid Example of use To output a local symbol list into a link list file kO map describe as The contents of kO map is as follows 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxXx Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel s pkO map k1 Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file k0O map Direc file Directive Link information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 459 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date xx XXX XXXX Local symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 460 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link list file format specification The link list file format specification options are as follows ll lf nlf Description format 11l number of lines Interpretation when omitted ll66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in a link list file Application Use the ll option to change the number of lines per page in a link list file Description The ra
59. p Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample T Build Mode Settings E Batch Build TP Build Option List R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 23 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when updating file dependencies then all these files are saved Cautions 1 During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite condition state ments such as if and comments are ignored Therefore include files not required for build are mistaken as required files In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build if 0 include headerl Dependence relationship judged to exist else zero include header2 Dependence relationship to exist endif define AAA ifdef AAA include header3 Dependence relationship to exist else include header4 Dependence relationship to exist endif include header5 Dependence relationship judged to exist xy During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite include state ments described after comments are ignored Therefore include files required for build are mistaken as no required files In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header6 h D
60. pragma section directives with AT start addresses specified If you edit the variables information file do not specify allocation to the saddr area for the above variables b Output of local symbols generated by the compiler The local symbols generated by the compiler are also output to the variables information file but you should leave these commented out Variables information file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 134 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS sreg L0003 2 1 2 t08 c const function information callt c Changing the extension of a library file or load module file If you use the variables information file generator do not change the extension of library files lib or load module files Imf If you change these variables that are not eligible for processing may be output 12 Hex output method of bank supported products In the bank supported products addresses are seen in two types of view bank number CPU address and the flash memory real address Hex Format Bank 5BFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 58000H 4BFFFH BANK4 16K bytes 48000H 3BFFFH BANKS 16K bytes 38000H TFEFF BANKS 16K bytes 2BFFFH 1BFFFH BANK2 16K bytes BANK4 16K bytes 28000H 180007 ee BANKS 16K bytes 1BFFFH 13FFFH BANK1 16K bytes BANK2 16K bytes 18000H 10000f1 OFFFFH f BANKI 16K bytes OBFFFH OBFFFH BANKO 16K bytes BANKO 16K bytes 08000H 0
61. select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property and then select Yes on the Output function information file property Specify the output destination in the Output folder for function information file property and the Function information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the File node 1 Oxxxx 78K0 Series C Compiler 1 Vx xx Function Information File 2 filel000_3 c 3 5 file1000_3 1 asm2 asm 1 asm3 asm 1 asm2 asml1 1 asm3 asm2 6 Code Size Information COMMON 25707 bytes R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 120 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS BANKOO BANKO1 BANKO2 BANKO3 BANKO4 BANKO5 Item Description Format Number Version number Displayed in Oxxyz and x yz format File name Outputs the file name Outputs information in file units Although it also outputs information about assembler source files these are not included as relocation because they contain instructions e g CSEG quasi instructions specifying the allocation destinations Relocation destination Outputs the relocation destination of the file C Relocated to the common area Numeric value Relocated to the bank XX area XX 00 to 15 Code size Outputs the code size Global function name Outputs the name of the global function defined in the file
62. the list of the file names will be displayed in the Output panel 2 The file that is added to the project and is not described in the link order specification file is displayed in the end of File 3 Ifa file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display it will appear when you hover the mouse cursor over the file name To change the link order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names 3 Set the file link order Click the OK button in the Link Order dialog box to set the input order of the files to the linker 2 15 3 Change the file build order of subprojects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the project tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 72 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 4 Display a list of build options You can display the list of build options set currently on the Property panel for the project main project and subproject If you select Build Options List from the Build menu the current settings of the options for the project are displayed on the Build Tool tab from the Output panel in the build order Remark You can change the display format of the b
63. there is no internal ROM Application Use the self option to use self programming Description Specify the self option if an error occurs when CALL 8100H is described during self programming Example of use If an error occurs when CALL 8100H is described during self programming describe as C gt ra78k0 kOsub asm cF051144 self R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 435 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format ed Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the assemble options See these when executing the assembler Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid To read the next part of the help message press the return key To quit the help display press any key other than the return key and then press the return key Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt ra78k0 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 436 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 78K0 Assembler Vx xx Copyright C usage The option is as follows Cx o file no e file ne p file np ka nka ks nks kx
64. various devices The detailed information on assembly files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble file Select whether to output the assembly file This corresponds to the a sa and li options of the compiler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes With no C source info a Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes With no C source info a Outputs the assembly file without C source information Yes With C source info unex panded include file con tents sa Outputs the assembly file with C source information include file contents are not expanded Yes With C source info expanded include file contents sa li Outputs the assembly file with C source information include file contents are expanded No Does not output the assembly file 12 Variables Information File The detailed information on the variables information file are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for library projects Using variables informa tion file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 This is the variables information file to be used for allocating to the saddr area for variables The valid variables information file
65. which provide support when the user edits the generated function information file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 50 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The auxiliary information files are as follows Replacement information file Object information file Reference information file Remark See 3 8 Memory Bank Relocation Support Tool for details about each file The setting to output auxiliary files is made with the Output File category Figure 2 63 Output File Category E Output File Use memory bank relocation support tool Yes Output function information file Yes v Output folder for function information file BuildModeName YD 2 Output folder for replacement information file BuildModeName Replacement information file name ProjectName _replace txt Output folder for object information file BuildModeN ame Object information file name ProjectName _objinfo tst Output folder for reference information file BuildModeName Reference information file name ProjectName_tetinfo txt Set the output folder and output file name for each file on the Output folder for replacement information file Replacement information file name Output folder for object information file Object information file name Output folder for reference information file and Reference information file name properties Remark Select No on the Output function information file property to output t
66. zf on the Split hex file property is selected the hex file is split into separate files hxb and hxf If a code is output to a segment allocated in extended space a separate hex file H1 to H15 is output into each space See B 4 2 Functions for details Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Hex file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category on the Common Options tab 3 When changing the library file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 20 Output file name Property For Library File E Output File This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 26 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 2 Output an assemble list The results of the assembly are output to the assembler list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list select Yes p default on the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Figure 2 21
67. 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 37 Option Dialog Box aT 3 Startup and Exit G Display G Extemal Text Editor G Font and Color G Extemal Tools G Build Debug G Text Editor N Update Others G User Information General Function buttons Initialize All Settings The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories Category Description General Startup and Exit category Configure startup and shutdown General Display category Configure messages from the application General External Text Editor category Configure the external text editor General Font and Color category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Configure building and debugging 2tENESAS Page 298 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Descri
68. 01 00 9 BANKO1 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size Available Space 12 9 BANK02 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size Available Space Source file list that was TI Example 1 11 1 12 16383 indicates that the source file includes function s example is as follows Example 2 Total Code Size Item Number filel c 10 Description Information before relocation start file2 c 20 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 10 ile10000 c 10000 11 10001 Byte s 6383 Byte s not able to arranged which must be in the common area When the space in both the common area and the bank area is not enough the output file3 c 30 When the space in the common area is not enough the output example is as follows file4 c 10 file5 c 20 file c 30 0 Byte s Outputs the information before relocation Outputs information at the area level Area name Outputs the area name Start address Outputs the start address of the area Area size Outputs the size of the area Common area information start Outputs the relocation information of the common area File name code size Outputs the file name and code size allocated to the common area A file to which is appended the end of the file name is one which can be relocated to the common area only A file to which is appended the end of the file name is one for w
69. 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example A non existent list convert option is specified List Conversion Program for RA78KO Vx xx xx xxx xXxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F6018 Option is not recognized a Program aborted 3 Set options in CubeSuite CubeSuite includes list convert options in the assemble options See the Assemble Options tab in the Property panel for details about setting the assemble options B 6 4 Option 1 Types The list convert options are detailed instructions for the operation of the list converter The types and explanations for list convert options are shown below Table B 29 List Convert Options Classification Description Object module file input specifi Inputs an object module file cation Load module file input specifica Inputs a load module file tion Absolute assemble list file output Outputs an absolute assemble list file specification Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Help specification Outputs a help message on the display R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 557 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object module file input specification The object module file input specification option is as follows r Descri
70. 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 4 Remove a file from the build target You can remove a specific file from the build target out of all the files added to the project Select the file to be removed from the build target on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select No on the Set as build target property in the Build category Figure 2 11 Set as build target Property I Set as build target No v Remark The files that can be applied this function are C source files assembler source files link directive files vari ables information files function information file object files and library files 2 3 5 Classify a file into a category You can create a category under the File node and classify files by the category This makes it easier to view files added to the project on the project tree and makes it easier to manage files according to function To create a category node select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New Category from the context menu Figure 2 12 Add New Category Item For File Node gt I eJ Gall Rem shift De w Add New File al _ Add New Category Property Figure 2 13 Project Tree Panel After Adding Category Node Project Tree O28 L sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool E eij Code Generator
71. 105 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to Al Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 Duplicate If you select the build mode to be changed from the build mode list the selected build mode is displayed in Selected build mode If you click the Apply to All button the build mode for the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog box Caution For projects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode is duplicated from DefaultBuild with the selected build mode name and the build mode is changed to the duplicated build mode Remarks 1 The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild See 2 15 6 Add a build mode for the method of adding a build mode 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 77 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 8 Delete a build mode Deleting a build mode is performed with the Build Mode Settings dialog box Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The dialog box opens Figure 2 106 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All
72. 11 19 224 STASC FE21H ADDR DATA 16 al Item Description Format Number Defined symbol name Displays the defined symbol name left aligned If the symbol name exceeds 16 characters that name is output as itis Items 2 4 5 6 7 and 8 are output from the next line Symbol value Displays a value with a symbol Outputs a right aligned hexadecimal number with zeros suppressed Relocation attributes Displays the relocation attributes R Relocatable symbol E External symbol Blank Absolute symbol Undefined symbol R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 106 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Number Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes left aligned CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol reference format Display the symbol reference format left aligned EXT Exte
73. 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE In the above example a non existent compile option is specified An error occurs and the C compiler aborts the compilation 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set compile options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Compile Options tab You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 2 Property Panel Compile Option Tab Property aq CA 78KO Property E Debug Informaton Add debug information YYes Add to both assembly and object file g2 E Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qx2 El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 E Startup Use standard startup routine Yes Normal Use fixed area used by standard library Yes Using standard startup routine Il rel E Library Use standard library Yes Not use multiply and divide instruction No Use standard 1 0 library supported floating point data No Use multiplier and divider Yes Using standard libraries Using standard libraries 3 Message Extension Memory Model OutputFie Assembly File Function Information File Variables Information File Data Control List File Oth
74. 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the file you want to remove from the project Then select Remove from Project from the context menu c Move files You can move files by the following procedure The file are moved under the File node Drag the file you want to move and then drop it in the destination Remarks 1 Individual option is retained when the file is dropped in the main project or subproject 2 The file is copied not moved when the file is dropped between the different project or in the main project or subproject in same project Note that this operation does not retain the individ ual option set in each file d Add categories You can add the category node by one of the following procedure The category node are added under the File node Select Add New Category from the Project menu Select Add New Category from the context menu of either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node Remarks 1 The default category name is New category 2 The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node e Move categories You can move the category node by the following procedure The category node are moved under the File node Drag the category node you want to move and then drop it in the destination Remarks 1 Individual option set in the file in the category node is retained when the category node is dropped in the main p
75. A control instruction FORMFEED NOFORMFEED with the same function as the lf and nlf options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below AS AFORMFEED ASANOFORMFEED Example of use To insert a form feed code at the end of an assemble list file KOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm p 1f R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 424 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format e output file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to save an error message into a file Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be input file name era If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of
76. APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 File name Item Number Check sum Description Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 plus the number of bytes in 5 Load address This is the 24 bit load address of the data in 4 within the range OH to FFFFFFH Data This is the loaded data itself Check sum WWWWWWWW Description Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 plus the number of bytes in 5 Load address This is the 32 bit load address of the data in 4 within the range OH to FFFFFFFFH Data This is the loaded data itself Check sum WWWWWWWW 3 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 506 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description 1 Record type 2 Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 3 Entry address This is the 32 bit entry address within the range OH to FFFFFFFFH 4 Check sum WWWWWWWW 3 Item Description Number Record type Record length This is the number of bytes in 3 plus the number of bytes in 4 Entry address This is the 24 bit entry address within the range OH to FFFFFFH Check sum 4 Symbol table f
77. Add Folder and File dialog box 277 Assemble list 103 Assembler 394 Assembler source file 92 B b LK78KO 465 Batch build 80 84 Batch Build dialog box 295 Boot flash relink function 482 Browse For Folder dialog box 304 Build 80 82 Build mode 75 76 Build Mode Settings dialog box 293 Build tool version 13 c c CC78K0 344 c RA78KO 401 C compiler 333 Category 21 Change the build mode 76 Change the output file name 25 Character String Input dialog box 279 Clean 87 common CC78K0 390 common RA78K0 434 create 542 Cross reference list 106 Cross reference list file 99 D d CC78K0 361 d LK78KO 451 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 577 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX d RA78KO 433 delete 544 Delete a build mode 78 E e CC78K0 369 e LCNV78K0 561 e LK78KO 464 e OC78K0 520 e RA78K0 425 Editor panel 271 Error list 107 113 116 Error list file 95 exit 550 F f CC78K0 382 f LCNV78K0 562 f LK78K0 468 f OC78K0 521 f RA78KO 427 File dependencies 23 File display order 22 G g CC78K0 357 g LK78KO 448 g RA78KO 404 ga RA78KO 406 gb LK78K0 478 General Build Debug category
78. Build Options Look in sample gt DefaultBuild sample mtpj My Recent Documents e Desktop My Documents My Computer File name My Network Files of type Project File mtpj R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 68 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS In the dialog box select the target project file for import the build options and click the Open button The build options of the selected project file are imported to the current project Remarks 1 The conditions of the project that is importable are shown below The build tool is the same The type of the project application library etc is the same The project has been created by CubeSuite with the same version 2 The target build options for importing are only the general options set in the properties of the build tool The setting of the standard build options see 2 15 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project and the individual options are not imported 3 All the build modes of the import target are imported However the build modes of the current project other than DefaultBuild are deleted 4 The version of the build tool to be used is imported 2 15 2 Set the link order of files The link order of object module files and library files is decided automatically but you can also set the order The procedures for performing this operation are described below 1 Op
79. Change source regulation zs SJIS code usable in comment ze EUC code usable in comment zn no multibyte code in comment Use macro for DIVUW ROR4 ROL4 ADJBA ADJBS CALLF DBNZ Not Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT 0o ne p ka nks nkx 1w132 1166 nlf 1t8 g nj ga R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Page 437 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 Linker The linker inputs a number of object module files output by the 78KO assembler determines a location address and outputs them as a single load module file The linker also outputs list files such as a link list file and an error list file If a link error occurs an error message is output to an error list file to clarify the cause of the error When an error occurs the load module file will not be output Figure B 5 I O Files of Linker Object module file Library file Link directive file Parameter file 3 OU OD DD Temporary file Load module file Link list file Error list file B 3 1 I O files The I O files of the linker are shown below See 3 3 Linker for details about output lists Table B 8 1 O Files of Linker File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Object module file Binary file containing relocation information and symbol information regarding machine language information and machine language location addresses File
80. Description When a fatal error occurs the absolute assemble list file cannot be output If only the primary name of the input file name is specified the list converter will add Imf to the file name as the file type and input the file Example of use If the primary name is different between an assemble list file kKOmain prn and a load module file sample Imf describe as follows so as to specify the input of a load module file sample Imf C gt lcnv78k0 kOmain prn lsample 1lmf R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 559 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Absolute assemble list file output specification The absolute assemble list file output specification option is as follows 0 Description format o output file name Interpretation when omitted oassemble list file name p Function The o option specifies the output of an absolute assemble list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the o option to specify the location to which an absolute assemble list file is output or to change its file name Description An abort error occurs if the same device is specified for the file name as for the error file If the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be assemble list file name p If only the primary name of the output file na
81. Ih It and lf option Application Use the p option to specify the location to which an assemble list file is output or to change its file name Specify the np option when performing assembly only to output an object module file This will shorten assembly time Description If the output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the output file name will be input file name prn If the drive name is omitted when the p option is specified the assemble list file will be output to the current drive If both the p and np options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output an assemble list file Sample prn describe as C gt ra78k0O cF051144 kOmain asm psample prn R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 409 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list file information specification The assemble list file information specification options are as follows ka nka ks nks kx nkx ka nka Description format ka nka Interpretation when omitted ka Function The ka option outputs an assemble list into an assemble list file The nka option disables the ka option Application Use the ka option to output an assemble list Description If both the ka and nka options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If
82. No Does not output the error list file 7tENESAS Page 262 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the p option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs an assemble list file No np Does not output an assemble list file Execute list converter Output list converter error list file Select whether the list converter is executed following the generation of an execution module The list converter is not executed during library generation This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Executes the list converter after the generation of an exe cution module No Does not execute the list converter after the generation of an execution module Select whether to output an error list file during list converter execution This corresponds to the e option of the list converter This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected an
83. Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows es J y Description format ypath name Interpretation when omitted The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 Path registered in the device file installer 2 Path by which the ra78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option reads a device file from the specified path Application Use the y option to specify a path where a device file exists Description An abort error occurs if something other than a path name is specified after the y option An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted after the y option The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the y option 2 Path registered in the device file installer 3 Path by which the RA78KO was started up 4 Current folder 5 The environmental variable PATH R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 431 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify the path for the device file as folder C 78k0 dev describe as C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 yC 78k0 dev To specify the path for the device file as fol
84. Output assemble list file Property Output with assemble list info Yes Output with symbol list No Output with cross reference list No Output with form feed control code No Number of characters in 1 line 132 Number of lines on 1 page 66 Tab width 8 Header title Remarks 1 See 3 2 2 Assemble list for the assemble list 2 If you select No np on the Output assemble list file property when performing assembly only to out put an object module file you can reduce the assembly time 2 4 3 Output map information Map information information on the location of segments is output to the link list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel The setting to out put a link list file is made with the Link List category Figure 2 22 Link List Category For Map Information Link Lis Output link list file Yes Uutput with link directive into Yes Output with local symbol list No Futra u Output wit Output wi Number of lines on 1 page 66 If you select Yes default on the Output link list file property the Output with map list property is displayed To out put map information to the link list file select Yes default Remark See 3 3 2 Map list for map information R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 27 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 4 Output symbol information Symbol information local s
85. Press the Enter key to confirm the rename Press the ESC key to cancel When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project those file names are also changed Note that this menu is only enabled when the project subproject file and category node is selected Note that rename is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 151 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu 1 When the Project node is selected Build active project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Add Subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to
86. Project ea Remove from Project Shift Del ES aP Rename F2 a Property When a project is set as the active project that project is underlined R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 73 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 100 Active Project Project Tree x UR sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool ee Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool REED PEED 3_48 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool ee Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool S gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a File Remarks 1 Immediately after creating a project the main project is the active project 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 74 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 6 Adda build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collectively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every
87. R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 573 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Vacant saddr area specification The vacant saddr area specification option is as follows VS VS Description format vs size Interpretation when omitted vs0 Function After allocating variables to the saddr area via this tool an alignment error may occur during compilation or linking due to the relationship between processing order and alignment In this situation performing allocation with a mar gin in the saddr area can avoid this error The vs option specifies the margin size of the saddr area Application Use the vs option to avoid allocation errors during compilation or linking after allocating variables to the saddr area via this tool Description Specify the margin size number of bytes of the saddr area as size It can be specified in decimal hexadecimal or binary numbers Up to 192 in decimal numbers can be specified An error occurs if 193 or more is specified An error occurs if the specified amount of vacant area is greater than the actual amount of vacant area If the vo option is specified the vs option is valid Example of use To specify the margin size of the saddr area as 10 bytes in decimal numbers describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi vs10 To specify the margin size of the saddr area as OAH bytes in hexade
88. Reading completed For Help press F1 To exit the stack usage tracer from the Stack Usage Tracer window select File menu gt gt Exit sk78k0 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 88 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 2 Check the call relationship You can check the function call relationship in the tree display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Figure 2 124 Tree Display Area main c stabi B subi sub2 WW sub3 E sub31 subii W subii subiz amp W sub21 E sample c sub13 o subi4 Remark The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The display priority for icons is from High E to Low LJ The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file Recursive function The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above 2 17 3 Check the stack information You can check the stack information function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name from the list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Total stack size including stack size of callee functions Frame size not including stack size o
89. Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Object information file Specify the object information file name name Use the extension txt If the extension is omitted txt is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank the object information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default ProjectName _objinfo txt How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 234 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for refer Specify the folder for saving the reference information file ence information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject
90. The detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Warning level Select the warning display level under linking This corresponds to the w option of the linker Default Normal output How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No output w0 Does not output warning messages Normal output Outputs normal warning messages Particular out Outputs detailed warning messages put w2 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 213 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Stack The detailed information on the stack are displayed and the configuration can be changed Generate stack solution Select whether to generate a stack solution symbol symbol This corresponds to the s option of the linker If a C source file is added to the project and Yes is selected in the Use standard startup rou tine property in the Startup category from the Compile Options tab this property is always set to Yes s and cannot be changed Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes s Generates a stack solution symbol No Does not generate a stack solution symbol Area name Specifies the name of the memory area that generates the stack solution symbol If the area name is omitted it is assumed that RAM has been specified This corresponds to the s option of the link
91. Vx xx Date xx XXX Xxxx Page 1 Command cF051144 kOmain asm 1120 Para file In file kOmain asm Obj file kOmain rel Prn file kOmain prn Assemble list 78K0 Assembler Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxx Page ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT NAME SAMPM ERREBE ERA AIK BR AME RM RBS AB SM AR A AS HR RM HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine Assembler Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxx Page ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT f it t i t ii ee ee Rake Rae ee Rae A en ome ae PUBLIC MAIN START R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 418 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format lhcharacter string Interpretation when omitted None Function The Ih option specifies the character string printed in the title column of the header of an assemble list file Application Use the lh option to display a title that briefly explains the contents of an assemble list file By printing the title on each page the contents of the assemble list file can be understood at a glance Description Up to 60 characters can be specified in the title The character string cannot include blank spaces If more than 61 characters are specified the first 60 characters will be valid and no error message will be output A kanji and hiragana 2 byte character is calculated as two characters If the maximum number of characters per line is 11
92. a pair of double quotation marks n Example To add debug information to a load module file kO Imf describe as c gt 1x78x0 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 lmf g b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the linker will not fit on the command line or when the same link option is specified repeatedly each time linking is performed To start up the linker from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the linker from a parameter file as follows X gt 1k78k0 Aobject module file A fparameter file name f Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the linker Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 source file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all link options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kO plk using an editor and then start up the linker parameter file kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 lmf pk0 map e C imp C gt 1k78k0 fk0 plk R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 440 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 AP
93. add the selected subproject to the project Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Set selected project as Active Project Sets the selected project to an active project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Saves a set of the this product and the project by copying them in a folder Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected project Property Build active project Displays the selected project s property on the Property panel 2 When the Subproject node is selected Builds the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project Note tha
94. assembler debugging sym debugging info bol information to the object module file being gener ng ga ated Yes Local symbols Adds debug information local symbol and assembler info and assembler debugging symbol information to the object module debugging info file being generated No ng nga Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 200 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When this option is omitted
95. assumed that 66 has been specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the list sulbcommand is not specified the Il option is ignored If two or more Il options are specified the option specified last is valid Example of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in a list file describe as C gt 1b78k0 1120 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 535 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If nlf Description format nlf Interpretation when omitted nif Function The lf option inserts a form feed FF code at the end of a list file The nlf option disables the lf option Application Use the lf option to insert a form feed code if you wish to add a page break after the contents of a list file are printed Description If the list sulbcommand is not specified the If option is ignored If both the lf and nlf options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use Inserts a form feed code at the end of a list file C gt 1b78k0 lf R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 536 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation path specification The temporary file creation path specification option is as follows t Description format tpath name Interpretation when omit
96. b Execution end message If it detects no compile errors resulting from the C compiler the C compiler outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD780xx Device file Vx xx Compilation complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects a compile errors resulting from the C compiler the C compiler outputs the number of errors and warnigs to the display and returns control to the host operating system prime CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype prime CC78KO warning W0622 No return value prime CC78KO warning W0622 No return value prime CC78KO warning W0622 No return value Target chip uPD780xx Device file Vx xx Compilation complete 0 error s and 5 warning s found If the C compiler detects a fatal error during compilation which makes it unable to continue compiling processing the C compiler outputs a message to the display cancels compilation and returns control to the host operating system Example A non existent compile option is specified C gt cc78k0 kOmain c m 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation CC78K0 error F0018 Option is not recognized m Please enter CC78K0 if you want help messages Program aborted R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 339 of 585 Oct 01
97. be sorted in address order Description If both the r and nr options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the r and nr option are invalid Example of use To sort hex format objects in order of address describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 hex r R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 517 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object filling value specification The object filling value specification options are as follows u nu u nu Description format ufilling value start address size u Interpretation when omitted UOFFH filled with OFFH Function The u option outputs a specified filling value as an object code for an address area to which no hex format object has been output The nu option disables the u option Application Address areas to which no hex format object has been output may become written with unnecessary code When such addresses are accessed by the program for any reason their action may be unpredictable By specifying the u option write code in advance to address areas to which no hex format object has been output Description The range that can be specified for the filling value is OH to OFFH It can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something o
98. be specified with the lw option is 72 to 260 80 characters in the case of display output An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is speci fied If the number of characters is omitted it is assumed that 132 has been specified However when a list file is output to display it is assumed that 80 has been specified The specified number of characters does not include the terminator CR LF If the list subcommand is not specified the Iw option is ignored If two or more lw options are specified the option specified last is valid Example of use To specify 80 as the number of characters per line in a list file describe as C gt 1b78k0 1w80 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 534 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format ll number of lines Interpretation when omitted ll66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in a list file Application Use the ll option to change the number of lines per page in a list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 0 and 20 to 32767 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is speci fied If the number of lines is omitted it is
99. category specify the file name Example of use The no option that is specified first is ignored the o option that is specified last is valid so the object module file prime rel will be output C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c no o R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 347 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Memory assignment specification The memory assignment options are as follows r nr rd nr rk nr rs nr r nr Description format rprocess type two or more types can be specified E Interpretation when omitted nr Function The r option specifies how to assign a program to the memory The nr option disables the r option Application Use the r option to specify how to assign a program to the memory Description The process types that can be specified by the r option are shown below Process type specification cannot be omitted A fatal error F0012 occurs if the specification is omitted Process Type Function b Assigns a bit field from the most significant bit MSB d n m Assigns an external variable external static variable except for the const type variable automatically n 1 2 4 to the saddr area regardless of whether there is a sreg declaration or not See rd nr for details k n m In a static model assigns a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto
100. click the Save button R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 86 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files You can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build hereafter referred to as clean Running a clean is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 5 Change the file build target project 1 When running a clean of the entire project From the Build menu select Clean Project Figure 2 121 Clean Project Item Build E Build Project F7 _Bebui j Shift F7 4 Update Dependencies ral Build sample a Rebuild sample a Clean sample ag Update Dependencies of sample A Stop Buile trl F7 T Build Mode Settings EL Batch Build Ti Build Option List 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure 2 122 Clean active project Item D R sample Project BE uPD78F0588_48 A Pin Configurator Be Code Generato A CA78KO Build TS SS 78KO Simulator D BE Open Folder with Explorer Program Analyzer Add 3 E Ei File E Build sample Rebuild sample LA Clean sample R Set sample as Active Project Fm Save Project and Development Tools as Package Paste Ctrl aje Rename F2 A Property R20UT
101. code KKEKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKK KKK KKKKKK A 0AH check hex code gt 9 SSASC1 A 07H bias 30H R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 130 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS This chapter provides notes for using CubeSuite and CA78K0 commands 1 Source file names The part except the source file name extension primary name is used as the module name by default Therefore some restrictions apply to the source file names that can be used Regarding the length of the file name configure the file name with a primary name and extension within the range allowed by the host OS and separate the primary name and the extension with a dot The characters that can be used for the primary name and the extension consist of the characters allowed by the host OS except parentheses semicolons and commas Note that a hyphen cannot be used as the first character of a file name or file name Do not specify file names that include a space or 2 byte characters Sharp symbol cannot be used for file names and path names in parameter files 2 Using a network If you place the folder in which to create temporary files on a file system that is shared over a network file contention could occur when using certain types of network software causing abnormal operation Avoid this type of contention by properly conf
102. configuration can be changed Output folder Specify the folder for saving the module that is generated If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 209 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Output file name APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the load module file name to be output Use the extension Imf If the extension is omitted Imf is automatically added This corresponds to the o option of the linker The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName Imf has been specified Default ProjectName Imf How to change Directly enter to the text box Restr
103. contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after assemble process ing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 267 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on each file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Notes Figure A 21 Property Panel File Information Tab Property c main c Property E File Information Save with absolute path Writable Notes File name This is the name of t
104. display the project components in tree view Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the build tool file or category that is selected on the Project Tree panel and change the settings of the information Editor panel This panel is used to display edit text files source files Output panel Add File dialog box This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on the Editor panel Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to display object module files and library files to input to the linker and configure these link order Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build m
105. document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Com
106. execution order in an expression When n 2 In addition to 1 changes the execution order in an expression and performs address calculation without a carry while assuming that the size of the array does not exceed 256 bytes when a char short unsigned short int or unsigned int array that is allocated to the saddr area is referenced with an unsigned char variable Adds an automatic variable to a register or the saddr area Performs optimization based on the precedence of code size and replaces the standard code pattern with a library If this type is not specified the code is optimized based on the precedence of speed The scope replacing with a library differs depending on the value of nas follows If nis omitted it is interpreted as n 1 When n 1 Nothing is replaced with the library When n 2 Replaces only function pre and post processing with the library When n 3 In addition to 2 replaces a long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code with the library When n 4 In addition to 3 replaces the constant code pattern in one instruction unit with the library When n 5 In addition to 4 places common code in subroutines and uses the library for the stack access Note When the qc option is specified in the CC78KO the types of constants and character constants are handled as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 Oct 01 2011 00 2tENESAS Page 355 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPE
107. file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu The Add Existing File dialog box appears Select files to add Copy the file using windows explorer and the like and then point the mouse to this area Select Paste from the Edit menu Drag files using windows explorer and the like and then drop them at the location in this area where you want to add the files to Remark If the files are dragged from the windows explorer and the like and then dropped in the blank space under the lower project tree it is regarded as dropped in the Main project lt 2 gt When new files are added Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the File menu The Add File dialog box appears Designate the file to cre ate Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box appears Designate the file to cre ate Remark A blank file is created at the location designated in the Add File dialog box b Remove the file from a project You can remove files from the project by one of the following procedure The removed files are not deleted from the file system in this operation Select the file you want to remove from the project Then select Remove from Project from the Project menu R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 147 of
108. file is to be input from a specified folder Application Use the i option to search an include file from a certain folder Description Up to 8 folders can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after If two or more folders are specified following the i option or if two or more i options are specified the files specified by include is searched in the specified order The search sequence is as follows 1 Folder with source fileN te 1 2 The folder specified by the i option 3 Folder specified by environmental variable INC78KO 4 C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx inc78k0Ne 2 Notes 1 If the include file name is specified with double quotation marks in the include statement folders with source files are searched first If the include file name is specified with lt gt search is not performed 2 This is an example of when the C compiler is installed to C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 363 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To input the include file that is specified in an include statement in the C source file prime c from folder D and D sample describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c iD D sample R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 364 of 585 Oct 01 2011 Cube
109. follows s0 lt model gt lt lib gt lt flash gt rel lt model gt When the memory model is the normal model When the memory model is the static model lt lib gt When the fixed area used by the standard library is not used When the fixed area used by the standard library is used lt flash gt When the standard object is generated When the object for the boot area is generated When the object for the flash area is generated 6 Library The detailed information on the library are displayed and the configuration can be changed Use standard library Select whether to link the standard library during linking However when any C source file is added to the project the library is not linked Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Links the standard library during linking No Does not link the standard library during linking Not use multiply and Select whether to use the standard library which does not use multiply and divide instructions divide instructions This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard library property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard library which does not use multiply and divide instructions No Does not use the standard library which does not use mul tiply and divide instructions R
110. for that device Description See CubeSuite Operating Precautions for the target devices that can be specified by the c option Cautions The c option cannot be omitted However if a control instruction PROCESSOR with the same function as the c option is described at the beginning of the source command line specification can be omitted ASAPROCESSORA Adevice typeA ASAPCA Adevice typeA Abbreviated form Example of use To specify the uPD78F0511_ 44 as the target device describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 401 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object module file output specification The object module file output specification options are as follows 0 no o no Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted oinput file name rel Function The o option specifies the output of an object module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option disables the o j g and ga option Application Use the o option to specify the location to which an object module file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing assembly only to output an assemble list file This will shorten assembly time Description Even if the o option is specified when a fatal er
111. function information file If a positive value is specified the bank XX area is relocated and considered to become small by the specified value as a margin If a negative value is specified the bank XX area is relo cated and considered to become large by the specified value as a margin This property is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 Default 500 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 65536 to 65536 decimal number 3 Message The detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when No on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category is selected Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution status of the memory bank relocation support tool to the Output panel during build Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Displays the execution status of the memory bank reloca tion support tool during build No Does not display the execution status of the memory bank relocation support tool during build R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 236 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Settings tab This tab shows the detailed information on each C source file assembler source file link directive file variables infor mation file
112. hereafter referred to as Startup node This node is always placed lower than the File node Category name Categories that the user created to categorize files see 2 3 5 Classify a hereafter referred to as category node file into a category This node is always placed lower than the File node R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 146 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project hereafter referred to as Subproject node Note Only devices with a memory bank installed When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed in the Property panel You can change the settings Remark When more than one components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When multiple files are selected and the values of their common properties are different then the corre sponding value fields are displayed blank This area has the following functions a Add files You can add files by one of the following procedure The files are added under the File node lt 1 gt Add existing files Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the File menu The Add Existing File dialog box appears Select files to add Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a
113. in the context menu Remark The configuration of the standard build option takes effect to the whole project main project and subproject i Sort files and categories You can sort files and category nodes in order of the file name time stamp or the user definition by the follow ing procedure Select one of the buttons in the toolbar The following table explains the buttons is selected default by default ER Sorts files and category nodes in order of their names Em Ascending order ul h Descending order Ay Ascending order g Sorts files and category nodes in order of their time stamp i 9 Descending order Ef Ascending order M4 Descending order Sorts files and category nodes in order of the user definition default You can change the display order by dragging and dropping the file and category node j Display the file while editing When the file added to the project is edited in the Editor panel and the file is not saved once the file name is followed by When the file is saved is deleted The file that is saved The file that is not saved after editing k Display the source file in boldface that the individual build option is set The source file icon whose option is different from the project general option individual compile option individ ual assemble option is changed to a different one from the normal icon The file with project general option
114. into a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g pk0 map kp The contents of kO map is as follows 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxXx Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel g pkO map kp Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file k0O map Direc file Directive Link information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 457 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 8000H 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxx Page 2 Public symbol list MODULE ATTR VALUE NAME SAMPM ADDR 0000H MAIN SAMPM ADDR 0080H START SAMPS ADDR 0093H CONVAH Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 458 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kl nkl Description format nkl Interpretation when omitted nkl Function The kl option outputs a local symbol list into a link list file The nkl option disables the kl option Application Use the kl option to output a local symbol list into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the ng option is specified the local symbol list cannot be output If both the
115. k0 lmf a 78K0 Object Converter Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F4018 Option is not recognized a Please enter OC78K0 if you want help messages Program aborted In the above example a non existent object convert option is specified An error occurs and the object converter aborts the object conversion R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 511 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set object convert options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Object Convert Options tab You can set the various object convert options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 32 Property Panel Object Convert Option Tab Property A CA78KO Property E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeN ame Hex file name ProjectName hex Hex file format Intel expanded hex format kie Split hex file No Hex File Filling Fill free memory space Yesf u Filling value HEX FF Filling start address HEX Filing size byte HEX Symbol T able Error List Others Output hex file Select this option to generate a hex file This option corresponds to the o option Compile Link Opti N rje
116. kOsub rel 8 xx xxx xxxx 9 CONVAH NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS Item Description Number Librarian version number Displayed in x yz format Date of list creation Date of list creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Number of pages Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Library file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted lib is attached as the file type extension Date of library file creation Date of library file creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Module serial number Numbers are assigned starting with 0001 Module name Displays the module name If the file type is omitted ref is attached as the file type extension Date of module creation Date of module creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 115 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format Public symbol name Display the public symbol name Number of public symbols Displays the number of public symbols defined in the module defined in module Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 3 6 List Converter The list converter outputs the following lists Output List File Name Output List Name Absolute assemble list file Absolute assemble list Error list file Error list To configure the absolute assemble list file output in Cube
117. level n 0 to 2 zbaddress Create Boot file address flash start address go n Change On chip debug program size n 256 to 1024 giid Set Security ID Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o p ne km kd nkp nkl 1166 nlf ns g nj w1 directive file usage MEMORY memory area name origin value size memory space name MERGE segment name location type definition merge type definition memory area name memory space name example MEMORY ROM 0H 4000H MEMORY RAMA 0H 100H EX1 MERGE CSEG1 ROM MERGE DSEG1 AT 80H R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 481 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 5 Boot flash relink function 1 Relink function Some systems are equipped with flash area or detachable ROM To upgrade the version of the program the contents of the flash area may be rewritten or the detachable ROM may be replaced with a new ROM When changing the program even partially basically the project itself is reorganized or rebuilt However it would be convenient if the allocation to be upgraded was limited to the flash area or external ROM and if it was not necessary to reorganize the project The boot area is fixed to the internal ROM If a function is called between the flash area to be rewritten and the boot area and if the start address of the function is changed as a result of modifying the function in the flash area the function can
118. option for the largest vacant area in which no segment is allocated The linker then generates public symbol _ STEND which holds the start address of the largest vacant area as its value and public symbol STBEG which holds the end address 1 as its value These symbols are handled as publicly declared NUMBER attribute symbols and are registered at the end of the linker s symbol table When these symbols are output to a link list file the module name column is left blank If the largest vacant area is 10 bytes or smaller a warning message is output If no vacant area exists a warning message is output and both STEND and _ STBEG hold the end address 1 as their values If area name is omitted it is assumed that RAM has been specified If both the s and ns options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To reserve a stack area in memory area RAM describe as However the linker will assume that a segment of size 310H in RAM area and a segment of size D8H allocated in the saddr area are input C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel s R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 449 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE FEFFH 8H free FEF8H FEF7H Segment size D8H FE20H FE1FH This position FE10H FE1FH is the 10H free FE10H argest vacant area Memory area RAM Ee oey The following stack symbols are genera
119. option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ZC Allows the nest use of comments No Does not allow the nest use of comments Kanji character code of Select the Kanji character code of the source source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn option of the compiler Default Shift_JIS zs How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Shift_JIS zs Interprets the kanji code of the source as Shift_JIS EUC JP ze Interprets the kanji code of the source as EUC JP Unspecified zn Interprets the source as not containing kanji codes Follow ANSI Standard Select whether to disable non ANSI standard functions and enable some of the functions of the ANSI standard This corresponds to the za option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes za Disables non ANSI standard functions and enables some of the functions of the ANSI standard No Enables non ANSI standard functions Interpret int short as char Select whether to compile by interpreting int and short descriptions as char This corresponds to the zi option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zi Interprets int and short descriptions as char No Does not interpret int and short descriptions as char
120. or more path names are specified following the i option the include file is searched in the specified order 2 If two or more i options are specified the include file is searched with the option specified later taking priority 3 After the path specified by the i option is searched the include file is searched in the same order as interpretation when the option is omitted An abort error occurs if anything other than a path name is specified after i or if the path name is omitted An abort error occurs if 65 or more i options are specified Example of use To search and read an include file from folders C sample1 and C samplez2 in that order describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 407 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To read an include file from folder D include files describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 408 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list file output specification The assemble list file output specification options are as follows p np p np Description format p output file name np Interpretation when omitted pinput file name prn Function The p option specifies the output of an assemble list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The np option disables the p ka ks kx lw ll
121. other options are invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt lenv78k0 List Conversion Program for RA78K0O Vx xx xx xxx xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation usage LCNV78KO option input file option The option is as follows means omissible r file Specify object module file l file Specify load module file o file Specify output list file absolute assemble list file ffile Input option or input file name from specified file e file Create error list file Show this message R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 563 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 7 Variables Information File Generator The variables information file generator uses a number of object module files to be output by the C compiler or assem bler and outputs a variables information file that contains information for efficiently allocating variables If an error occurs an error message is output to the display to clarify the cause of the error When an error occurs the variables information file will not be output Figure B 36 I O Files of Variables Information File Generator Object module file Library file Link directive file Parameter file 93 ODO 0 fF Load module file Variables information file generator Variables informa
122. output a variables information file by using the file variables information file generator If Yes is selected in this field executes commands in the following order The compiler and the assembler are executed twice by one build processing The order 1 Compiler C478K0 2 Assemblerl RA 8KO 3 Variables information file generator F78K0 4 Compiler C4 78K 0 ma 5 AssemblerlRA 8KO B Linker LK 8K0 7 Object converter OC78K0 Common Compile Assemble Link Opti 4 Object COnN 2 10 1 Efficiently allocate variables Use the variables information file generator to efficiently allocate variables This tool generates a variables information file a file containing allocation information for all variables to be referenced Variables will be allocated to the saddr area by performing compilation using that file The procedures for performing this operation are described below Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions Editing and using an auto generated variables information file 1 Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions Below is the procedure for generating a variables functions information file automatically and using that file to allocate variables and functions via one build a Set the generation of the variables information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Va
123. point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 200 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 171 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before build processing before build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replac
124. project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when click ing the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition 3 Output File Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definit
125. registered to the project is searched and the file name is displayed This corresponds to the ma option of the compiler Default The name of the variables information file that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed 7tENESAS Page 190 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Variables information file Specify the variables information file which is used in the project of the boot area for boot area This corresponds to the ma option of the compiler If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different This property is not displayed when No in the Output objects for flash property in the Mem ory Model category is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog boxwhich appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters 13 Function Information File The detailed information on the function information file is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcontroller and aC source file is selected on the Project Tree panel Using functio
126. saddr area comments out these variables by adding a semicolon to the beginning of the line Variable information variable name Outputs the variable name Variable information number of references Outputs the number of references of the variable Variable information size Outputs the size of the variable Variable information reference type Outputs the reference type of the variable normal 1 changes from the normal area to the saddr area sreg 0 Already allocated to the saddr area via the sreg specification Variable information file name Outputs the target source file name surrounded by quotation marks Although static variables are output global variables are not Variable information const variable const is output for const variables Variable information variable for the boot area If a variable is defined in the boot area and referenced by the flash area then boot is output Function information start R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Indicates start of function information Function information is output in the order of priority from highest to lowest Since functions in the flash area callt functions and static functions cannot be allocated to the saddr area comments out these variables by adding a semicolon to the beginning of the line 2tENESAS Page 118 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS De
127. some of the functions of the ANSI standard This corresponds to the za option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes za Disables non ANSI standard functions and enables some of the functions of the ANSI standard No 7tENESAS Enables non ANSI standard functions Page 248 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Disable an int extension Select whether to disable the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the for function return values of functions This corresponds to the zb option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zb Disables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions No Enables the int extension for the char unsigned char type arguments and the return values of functions 7 Memory Model The detailed information on the memory model are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 249 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Use static model R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the number of bytes in the common area when the static model is used This corresponds to the sm option of the compi
128. that matches to the selections in Look in and Files of type is shown R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 302 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Designate the file name of the file to add to projects 4 Files of type area Designate the file type of the file to add to project S C source file c C language source file Header file h inc Header file Assemble file asm Assembly language source file Link directive file dr dir Link directive file Variable information file vfi Variable information file Function information file fin Not Function information file Library file lib Library file Object file rel Object file Text file txt Text format All Files All the format default Note Only devices with a memory bank installed Function buttons Adds the designated fi le to a project Closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 303 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select a folder and retrieve it for the caller Figure A 40 Browse For Folder dialog box Browse For Folder Select the folder to add File O Project aaa E O backup E O boot O Default O flash 2 4 O sample O DefaultBuild 4 sample_
129. the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 29 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the code size precedence select Yes Code size qx3 or Yes Code size Best qx4 on the Perform optimization property in the Optimization category No is selected by default If you select Yes Code size Best qx4 then addition to the settings of Yes Code size qx3 common code is placed in subroutines and the library for the stack access is used Figure 2 26 Perform optimization Property Code Size Precedence Yes Code size qx3 Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Perform optimization property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the execution speed precedence select Yes Speed precedence qx1 on the Perform optimization property in the Optimization category No is selected by default Figure 2 27 Perform optimization Property Execution Speed P
130. the Link Order dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 317 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Export File dialog box This dialog box is used to generate a link order specification file Figure A 47 Select Export File Dialog Box Select Export File 4 Save in sample B DefaultBuild 4 My Recent Documents Desktop A My Documents 39 My Computer 4 vie Netrrork F Link order specification file mtls The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Order dialog box click the Export button Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder for outputting a link order specification file Save Cancel Function buttons The project folder is selected when the file is selected for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 318 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the name of a link order specification file 4 Save as type area This area displays the following fi
131. the Project Tree panel by every category and change the settings of the information Figure A 3 Property Panel Property A CA78KO Property El Build Mode Build mode E Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Perform optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths System include paths E DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File BuildModeN ame Yes Standard qx2 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 2 Frequently Used O ptions for Link Using libraries Using libraries 0 Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame Imf El Frequently Used Options for Object Convert Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeN ame Hex file name ProjectName hex Hex file format Intel expanded hex format kie Device Build Method Version Select Notes Others Build mode 3 Selects the build mode name to be used during build 4 4 A Compile Link Opti The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu
132. the area is lacking Information after relocation Outputs the information after relocation start Outputs information at the area level Total code size Outputs the total code size of the files that could not be relocated 3 8 3 Object information file The object information file is an auxiliary information file with details about object files and library files To configure the object information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab Select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for object information file property and the Object information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 1 Object File Information Table 2 FILE 3 SEGMENT 4 SEGMENT 5 FUNCTION 6 GLOBAL NAME NAME SIZE SIZE SYMBOL Bytes Bytes sOl rel file1l000_3 rel CODE _file1l000_3 asm2 rel BANKOO _common2 BANKO1 _bank1_1 BANK02 Total Code Size 7 45695 Byte s 8 Library File Information Table 9 FILE 10 SEGMENT 11 SEGMENT 12 FUNCTION 13 GLOBAL R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 124 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 XIMUL REL LCODE RTARGO REL RTARGO C
133. the drop down list Restriction Sets the user option byte However if the User option byte value property is blank the user option byte is not set Does not set the user option byte User option byte value Specify the user option byte value in hexadecimal without Ox This corresponds to the gb option of the linker Values saved in versions of CubeSuite below 1 20 may be outside the allowed setting range If the values set outside the allowed range are restored this property is blank This property is not displayed when No in the Set user option byte property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to FFFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 212 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set flash start address Select whether to set the flash start address for the built in flash ROM product This corresponds to the zb option of the linker Do not set this property for a device that does not have a flash ROM area self programming function This property is changed to No when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zb Sets the flash start address for the built in flash ROM prod uct No Does not set
134. the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of the assembler is searched The ref erence point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subprop erties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools System include paths R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 The include paths which the system set during assembling are displayed The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Re
135. the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Set selected subproject as Active Project Sets the selected subproject to an active project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system with this operation When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected subproject Property Displays the selected subproject s property on the Property panel 3 When the Build tool node is selected Build Project Builds the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Rebuilds the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Cleans the selected project main project or subproject The subproject is also cleaned when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set to Default Build Opti
136. the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after object convert processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after object convert processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the object convert options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the object convert options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 223 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Library Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the librarian categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 List File 3 Others Caution This tab is displayed only for library projects Figure A 9 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property E Output File Output folder Bu
137. the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 5 Startup The detailed information on the startup are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 181 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use standard startup Select whether to link during linking the object module file provided with the compiler in which routine the standard startup routine is written However when any C source file is added to the project the object module file provided with the compiler is not linked The value of this property stored as the standard build option see 2 15 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project is set to the default value when the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category is changed Default When selecting Yes zf on the Output objects for flash property Yes For flash area When selecting No on the Output objects for flash property Yes Normal How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Normal Links the object module file provided with the compiler This item is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property is selected Yes For boot area Links the object module file for the boot area provided with the compiler This item is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash pr
138. time The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add a build mode is shown below 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box opens Figure 2 101 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Build mode list DefaultBuild MB Dupicate Select the build mode to be duplicated from the build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box opens Figure 2 102 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String BuildMode2 In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 75 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 103 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list Buid ded Duplicate BuildMode2 uplicate Delete Rename Close 2 Change the build mod
139. to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 222 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after object convert processing after object convert Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the input file under object convert processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ObjectConvertedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under object convert processing OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from
140. to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Shift_JIS zs Interprets the kanji code of the source as Shift_JIS EUC JP ze Interprets the kanji code of the source as EUC JP Unspecified Interprets the source as not containing kanji codes zn R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 205 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use Self programming Select whether to use self programming This corresponds to the self option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes self Even if the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address no error is output for the ALL 8100H descrip tion No If the internal ROM does not exist at the 8100H address an error is output for the ALL 8100H description Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name I nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replace
141. tool Add one item in one line This setting is common to all the build modes The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Other detailed information on the build tool are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output message format Specify the format of the message being built This applies to the messages output by the build tool to be used and commands added by plu gins It does not apply to the output messages of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being built If this is blank it is assumed that Program Options has been specified Default TargetFiles How to change Directly enter to the text box up to 256 characters or select from the drop down list Restriction TargetFiles Displays the file name in the output mes sage TargetFiles Options Displays the file name and command line
142. used to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Functions in the same manner as the E amp button Reset Function Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee func tions for the selected function to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for the selected function has the default values Reset All Functions R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee func tions for all functions to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for all functions has the default values 2tENESAS Page 321 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Help menu sk78k0 Help Displays the help of this window Functions in the same manner as the button About sk78k0O Opens the Version Information dialog box of the stack usage tracer 2 Toolbar This area consists of the following buttons Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain with the greatest total stack size including the stack size of callee functions of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Functions in the same manner as when Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function is selected from the File menu Recalculates the total stac
143. user option byte value in hexadecimal without Ox The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFFFF If the setting is made as above the following value is set 0x30 to address 0x80 0x00 to address 0x81 0x00 to address 0x82 0x00 to address 0x83 0x02 to address 0x84 3 Setting the security ID The security ID is used to perform authentication when the debugger is activated Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel On the Security ID property in the Device category specify the security ID in the 20 digit hexadecimal number The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 59 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 76 Security ID Property EET 112233445566778899AA If the setting is made as above the following value is set 0x11 to address 0x85 0x22 to address 0x86 0x33 to address 0x87 0x44 to address 0x88 0x55 to address 0x89 0x66 to address 0x8A 0x77 to address 0x8B 0x88 to address 0x8C 0x99 to address 0x8D OxAA to address Ox8E Remark See CubeSuite 78KO Debug for connecting with the debug tool R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 60 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 Prepare for Implementing Boot flash Relink Function Depending on the system in addition to the area which cannot be rewritten
144. using the pragma ext_func directive a branch table is created The address of this branch table is specified by the user R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 485 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Specify the address as follows by using pragma ext_table when a load module of the boot area and a load module of the flash area are created pragma ext_table 0x2000 When execution branches to the body of a function the actual function address is obtained by referencing the offset of the ID number from the beginning of the created branch table and then execution branches The example is shown below func_flash0O func_flashl If the above two C functions are allocated to the flash area and they are called from the boot area describe as follows in the C source file for the boot area pragma ext_func func_flashO 1 pragma ext_func func_flashl 2 It is recommended to describe these pragma ext_func directive in one file and include this file in all source files by using the include directive in order to prevent missing descriptions or the occurrence of contradictions i e to prevent the error of specifying the different ID numbers for the same function name or specifying the same ID number for the different function names An image of relink function is shown below lt 1 gt C source file for the boot area include ext_def h int boot_a 0x12 int boot_
145. variable n 1 2 4 automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is a sreg declaration or not See rk nr for details s n m Assigns a static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been n 1 2 4 declared See rs nr for details Does not insert any align data to allocate a 2 byte or more structure member In other words performs packing structure Remark Two or more process types can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 348 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If the nr option is specified the process types are interpreted as follows Process Type Function Assigns a bit field from the least significant bit LSB Does not automatically assign any variable to the saddr area Does not automatically assign any variable to the saddr area Does not automatically assign any variable to the saddr area Does not perform packing structure Example of use To assign the external variable or external static variable and static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 rds R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 349 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rd nr Description format Interpretation when omitted nr Func
146. variables relocation options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Variables Relocation Options tab You can set the various options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 38 Property Panel Variables Relocation Options Tab Property A CA78KO Property E Output File Output variables information file No ROM RAM Amount Information Output ROM RAM usage No Output variables information fle Selects whether to output a variables information file by using the file variables information file generator If Yes is selected in this field executes commands in the following order The compiler and the assembler are executed twice by one build processing The order 1 Compiler C478K0 2 Assemblerl RA 8KO 3 Variables information file generator F78K0 4 Compiler CA 8K0 ma 5 Assembler RA 8KO0 6 Linker LK 8K0 7 Object converte OC78kKO Common Compile Assemble Link Opti R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 571 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 7 5 Option 1 Types The variables relocation options are detailed instructions for the operation of the variables information file genera tor The types and explanations for variables relocation options are shown below Table B 31 Variables Relocatio
147. will be displayed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 57 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 73 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property asm main asm Property E Debug nformaton Add debug information YYes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Output File Assemble List Others You that Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q and qa options _ File Information can set assemble options for the assembler source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note this tab takes over the settings of the Assemble Options tab by default Remark You can also set assemble options for assembler source files created from C source files Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Individual Compile Options tab on the Property panel If you select Yes on the Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category the Individual Assemble Options tab is displayed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 58 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Prepare for Using On chip Debugger To use the on chip debugger you must se
148. with the project name ProjectName vfi is set by default If this property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree b Run a build of the project Run a build of the project A variables information file is generated It will be input into the compiler automatically and a rebuild will be executed again Remark The variables information file in a Set the generation of the variables information file is overwritten by running a build If the build completes successfully a load module file is generated with the variables allocated If the message E7001 The link error was found is displayed at this time then an error has occurred during linking If this happens take the action below to disable the variable information file lt 1 gt Select No in the Output variables information file property on the Variables Relocation Options tab lt 2 gt Select No on the Set as build target property of the variables information file vfi displayed on the project tree Or select the variables information file and select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure 2 55 Project Tree Panel After Generating Load Module File Project Tree EJ sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool a P Code Generator Design Tool 7210 ud Toon gt 78KO Simulator De
149. y option first searches the path specified as the search path for reading device files If it does not exist the normal paths are searched Application If the device file is not installed in the normal search path but in a special folder the path is specified by this option Cautions When using CubeSuite folders are determined by the microcontroller selected when the project was created Therefore it is not necessary to specify this option when setting options with this compiler Example of use To search C tmp dev read the device file describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 yC tmp dev R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 387 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Static model specification The Static model specification option is as follows Sm Description format sm n n 1 to 16 Interpretation when omitted Normal model n 0 Function Specifies the sm option while compilation The object when the sm option is specified is called a static model and the object when the sm option is not specified is called a normal model Normally the instruction accessing a static area is shorter and can be executed faster than the instruction accessing a stack frame Therefore an object code can be shortened and execution speed can be improved Interrupts can be serviced faster This is because the saving returning of arguments and variables
150. 0 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 01 Fixed at FF c Extended tektronix hex file format Hex files are composed of the following three types of block Data block Symbol block This is an unused block Symbol information uses the symbol table file Termination block Each block starts with a header field composed of a common 6 characters and ends with the string end of line Maximum length of each block is 255 not including the start character and end of line The format for the common header field is shown below Table B 14 Extended Tektronix Header Field Number of ASCII Description Characters The percent symbol specifies that the block is in extended tektronix format Block length This is a 2 digit hexadecimal which indicates the number of characters in the block This number of characters does not include the start character and end of line Block type 6 Data block 3 Symbol block 8 Termination block Check sum This is a 2 digit hexadecimal which indicates the remainder produced when the total value of the characters in the block except the start character the check sum and end of line is divided by 256 Note Character Values for Check Sum Evaluation Character Value Decimal 0to9 10 to 35 36 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 500 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Character Value
151. 0 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 6 file200 c 200 6 file201 c 201 6 file1000 c 1000 6 file2000 c 2000 6 file10000_4 c 10000 6 file10000_3 c 10000 6 file10000_2 c 10000 6 file10000 c 10000 6 main c 145 Total Code Size 7 45692 Byte s Available Space 8 14970 Byte s 9 BANK00 10 asm2 asm 1 Total Code Size LL 1 Available Space 12 16383 9 BANK01 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size Available Space 9 BANK02 10 asm3 asm 1 Total Code Size 11 1 Available Space 12 16383 Replace Information Information Table ROM E ESS 3 0x00000 E 4 32768 BANKOO E ESS 3 0x08000 E 4 16384 BANK01 E ESS 3 0x18000 E 4 16384 BANKO2 E ESS 3 0x28000 E 4 16384 BANK03 E ESS 3 0x38000 E 4 16384 BANKO4 E ESS 3 0x48000 E 4 16384 RY 2 BANKO5 ESS 3 0x58000 SI4ZE 4 16384 5 COMMON 6 callt c 1 6 asm3 asm 1 6 asml asm 1 6 filel c 1 6 file2 c 2 6 filel0_4 c 10 6 filel0_3 c 10 6 filel0_2 c 10 6 file1l0 c 10 6 ile1000_3 c 1000 6 file100 c 100 6 ile1000_2 c 1000 6 file200 c 200 6 file201 c 201 6 file1000 c 1000 Total Code Size 7 25707 Byte s Available Space 8 5015 Byte s 9 BANKO0 10 asm2 asm 1 10 file1l0000_2 c 10000 Total Code Size 11 10001 Byte s Available Space 12 6383 Byte s R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2011 Page 122 of 585 CubeSuite V1
152. 0 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 162 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Perform optimization APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the qx option of the compiler Default Yes Standard qx2 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Speed prece Performs optimization with the execution speed dence qx1 precedence Yes Standard qx2 Performs optimization with both the execution speed and module size precedence Yes Code size prece Performs optimization with the module size prece dence qx3 dence Yes Code size Performs optimization with top precedence to mod Best qx4 ule size In addition qx3 common code is placed in subrou tines and the library for the stack access is used Yes Detail setting The Optimization Details category is shown in the Compile Options tab The option that is selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization When No nq is selected in all the properties in the Optimization Details category the optimiza tion will not be done No nq The optimization will not be done Additional include paths R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName
153. 00 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 311 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Save As My Recent Documents Figure A 44 Save As Dialog Box O sample DefaultBuild sample _ib Output B uild Tool txt Text Files tat The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Save file name As from the File menu Focus the Output panel and then select Save tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file The following folders are selected by default a In the Editor panel The folder that currently editing file is saved Save Cancel Function buttons R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 312 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b In the Output panel The project folder is selected when the file is save for the first time The previously selected folder is selected after the second time 2 File list area File list that matches the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the file name to save 4 Save
154. 00H 0002H 007E 0020 0013 0014A gap 7F53 MEMORY LRAM BASE ADDRESS FAC0H SIZE 0020H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS gap MEMORY RAM BASE ADDRESS FBOOH SIZE 0500H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS FBOOH 03H FE20H 0003H DSEG AT FE20H 0003H gap FE23H OODDH gap Not Free Area FFOOH 0100H R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2011 Date xx XXX XXXX Page Page 454 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kd nkd Description format nkd Interpretation when omitted kd Function The kd option outputs a link directive into a link list file The nkd option disables the kd option Application Use the kd option to output a link directive file into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the nkm option is specified the link directive file cannot be output into a link list file If both the kd and nkd options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the kd option is invalid Example of use To output a link directive file into a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dkO dr pkO map kd The contents of kO map is as follows 78K0 Linker Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxXx Page Command kOmain rel kOs
155. 011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 Caution Figure 2 116 Rapid Build Item When a rapid build is valid Build Build p Build Project F7 Ea GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 ER pdate Dependencies ra Build sample g H Rebuild sample H p Clean sample p ag Update Dependencies of sample ag A Re T Build Mode Settings T El Batch Build E Ty Build Option List Ti When a rapid build is invalid Build Project F7 Rebuild Project Shift F7 Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample Clean sample Update Dependencies of sample Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 Enable Disable setting of the rapid build applies to the entire project main project and subprojects 3 Ifyou disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time This function is valid only when editing source files with the Editor panel 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes You can run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has hereafter referred to as batch build Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build See 2 16 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild See 2 16 2 Run a build of all files Clean See 2 16 8 Delete intermediate files and generated
156. 0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 391 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Function information file specification The function information file specification option is as follows mf Description format Interpretation when omitted All source are allocated to a common area Output file fin Remark Alphanumeric characters Function The mf option specifies to reference and create function information files Application Use the mf option to allocate functions to a bank or common area Cautions Specify the same function information file for all the C source files to be linked Example of use To compile using the function information file funcinf fin describe as gt ec78k0 cf053664 mffuncinf fin R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 392 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help options are as follows h h Description format Interpretation when omitted No display Function The and h options display brief explanations of the options and the help messages such as the default options on the console Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Application The option and its description are displayed See these when executing the compiler Description When the or h option is specifie
157. 0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 87 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 Estimate the Stack Capacity To estimate the stack capacity use the the stack usage tracer The stack usage tracer performs a static analysis and displays the functions called by a function in a tree format as well as stack information for each function function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name in list format 2 17 1 Starting and exiting To start the stack usage tracer from the Main window select the Tool menu gt gt Startup Stack Usage Tracer After the stack usage tracer finishes starting up it will display the function call relationship and stack information for each function in the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Figure 2 123 Starting Up Stack Usage Tracer sample Stack Usage Tracer File View Option Help bel Ed main Total Stack Size Additional Margin E stabi man 4 D proj STK Gi sub stabi 4 D proj STK B sub2 W subi D proj STK ae Bsub11 D proj STK ce ae 7 Hsub12 amp D proj STK E sub11 H sample c D proj 5TK subl2 amp E subi4 D proj STK sub21 Reading completed E sample c sub13 C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeS uite Plugins Stk dat78kO Ml0 tet c subi4 Reading C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeS uite Plugins Stk dat 8kO4I0 txt
158. 1 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To output a temporary file to folder D temporary files describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 429 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Kanji code 2 byte code specification The kanji code 2 byte code specification options are as follows zs ze zn Zs ze zn Description format ZS z a Interpretation when omitted ZS Function Kanji 2 byte character described in the comment is interpreted as the specified kanji code 2 byte code Kanji code is interpreted as follows depending on the option zs Shift JIS code ze EUC code zn Not interpreted as kanji Application Use these options to specify the interpretation of the kanji code in the comment line Description If the zs ze and zn options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid A control instruction KANJICODE with the same function as the zs ze and zn option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAKANJICODEASJIS ASAKANJICODEAEUC ASAKANJICODEANONE Kanji code can also be specified by using the environmental variable LANF78K Example of use To interpret the kanji code as EUC code describe as C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 ze R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 430 of 585
159. 1 00 2tENESAS Page 518 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 1 ufilling value If the target device contains internal ROM the internal ROM range 2 ufilling value size From address 0 to size 1 3 ufilling value start address size From start address to start address size 1 In a bank supported product specify the bank number CPU address in the start address and size See 12 Hex output method of bank supported products for details Example of use Fill an address area to which a hex format object has not been output with code It is supposed that the following hex file exists In this case code cannot be written to the address area 003EH to OFFFH 020000000200FC 100002002B41000BFC80FE2B40000944F7083A20EC 100012001A6720FE2822006521FED350D25014FE1A 10002200B900059F2835002431B900059F28350005 0000320024215 6AF0A8302A807A830560C O1000003B5D0d0026A3 LOL0LO00Z4A5F622B667 00000001FF 1000H OFFFH Code is filled to this area 003EH 003DH 0002H 0001H 0000H To fill OOH to the address area 003EH to OFFFH describe as C gt oc78k0 kO 1lmf u00h 003eh 0fc2h R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 519 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Descriptio
160. 1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If nlf Description format nlf Interpretation when omitted nlf Function The lf option inserts a form feed FF code at the end of a link list file The nlf option disables the lf option Application Use the lf option to insert a form feed code if you wish to add a page break after the contents of a link list file are printed Description If the np option is specified the lf option is invalid If both the lf and nlf options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To insert a form feed code at the end of a link list file k0 map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0 map 1f R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 463 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format e file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e o
161. 1 RES l Ty fleash_a 8 2 9 2 10 2 7 flash_b 8 2 9 2 10 1 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 117 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS PT varl C8 1 oi 4 C10 1 2p tlash c 12 const i 7 var2 8 1 9 2 10 1 const CT vars CO Ty Cop 4 VOT CTI ft lashe 2 Citbeot a B ly CIty CLOY 077 4 LS boot i 7 boot_b 8 1 9 2 10 0 13 boot F 7 14 function information calit 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 lash c e 15 22 16 1 17h 1 aC Sp Eun 16 1 IT Ar CLS boot Item Description Number Version number Displayed in x yz format Format information start Indicates start of format information of the variable and function information Vacant area information start Indicates start of vacant area information of the saddr area BASE area and callt area Comments out by adding a semicolon to the beginning of the line Vacant area information start address Outputs the start address of the vacant area Vacant area information size Outputs the size of the vacant area Variable information start Indicates start of variable information Variable information is output in the order of priority from highest to lowest Since const sreg and static variables and variables defined in the boot area that are referenced by the flash area cannot be allocated to the
162. 1 in the tree display area and open the Adjust Stack Size dialog box the changes are reflected in sub called by func2 as well int sub int i void funcl void void func2 void void main void funcl func2 sub int i i return i void funcl void int ret i 0 ret sub i void func2 void int ret i 100 ret sub i ASM statements in C source If C source contains ASM statements the stack usage tracer may output the following message W9432 Illegal format in file path name line number If this occurs fix the problem by disabling the code in question using if declarations or the like or commenting it out Calls to indirectly recursive functions If a recursion path consists of multiple functions the stack size may be calculated incorrectly Example Assuming that the frame size of recursive functions func_rec1 func_rec2 is 8 bytes if the recursion depth of func_rec1 func_rec2 is set to 3 in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box then although the stack size of func will be calculated correctly as 8 24 3 the stack size of func2 will be calculated as 8 3 ignoring calls to func_rec1 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 325 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE func_recl int func_rec2 int funcl void func2 void void main void funcl func2 void func_recl
163. 11 2tENESAS Page 420 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE NAME SAMPM PRARARAAAAERRAE ERA ERA RARER RARER HK RK ERR ER RM r HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 421 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format lt number of characters Interpretation when omitted t8 Function The It option specifies the basic number of characters for outputting a horizontal tabulation HT code in the source file replacing it with several blanks spaces in each list tabulation processing Application Use the It option to reduce the number of characters per line by reducing the number of blanks per HT code for example when a small number of characters per line has been specified for lists via the Iw option Description The range number of characters that can be specified with the It option is 0 to 8 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of characters is omitted it is assumed that 8 has been specified If It0 is specified tabulation processing will not be performed and a tabulation code will be output If the np option is specified the It option is invalid Cautions A control instruction TAB with the same function as the It option can be described at the beg
164. 19H 1CH 1DH 1EH 1FH Can be described However these will appear in the assemble list file as Can be described However these will appear in the assemble list file as 1AH Can be described However these will appear in the Cannot be described end of file assemble list file as Alphabetic characters Uppercase and lowercase characters are input as is Uppercase and lowercase characters are input as is Other Can be described Can be described Remark If an asterisk on the startup line is not a target for wild card expansion it can be written even if it is not enclosed in Cautions A control instruction TITLE or TT with the same function as the Ih option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASATITLEA A character string A ASATTA A character string A abbreviated form Example of use To print the title RA78KO_MAINROUTINE in the header of an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm 1hRA78KO_MAINROUTINE The contents of kKOmain prn is as follows 78KO Assembler Vx xx RA78K0O_MAINROUTINE Date xx xxx xx Page l Command cF051144 kOmain asm 1hRA78K0_MAINROUTINE Para file In file kOmain asm Obj file kOmain rel Prn file kOmain prn Assemble ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 20
165. 1E Analysis R20UT0735E Message R20UT0736E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 9 1 1 Overview 9 1 2 Features 10 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 11 2 1 Overview 11 2 1 1 Create a load module 11 2 1 2 Create a user library 12 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version 13 2 3 Set Build Target Files 14 2 3 1 Set a startup routine 14 2 3 2 Add a file to a project 16 2 3 3 Remove a file from a project 20 2 3 4 Remove a file from the build target 21 2 3 5 Classify a file into a category 21 2 3 6 Change the file display order 22 2 3 7 Update file dependencies 23 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 25 2 4 1 Change the output file name 25 2 4 2 Output an assemble list 27 2 4 3 Output map information 27 2 4 4 Output symbol information 28 2 5 Set Compile Options 29 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence 30 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence 30 2 5 3 Add an include path 30 2 5 4 Seta macro definition 32 2 5 5 Enable C comments 33 2 5 6 Use floating point compatible standard input output functions 2 5 7 Change the setting to use the multiplier and div
166. 2 5 Set Compile Options To set options for the compiler select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 25 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property aq CA 78KO Property E Debug Informaton Add debug information Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 E Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qx2 E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 E Startup Use standard startup routine Yes Normal Use fixed area used by standard library Yes Using standard startup routine Ol rel E Library Use standard library Yes Not use multiply and divide instruction No Use standard 1 0 library supported floating point data No Use multiplier and divider Yes Using standard libraries Using standard libraries 3 Message Extension Memory Model OutputFie Assembly File Function Information File Variables Information Fie Data Control List File Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option Common Comp sgl i Object Co Variables Memory Remark Often used options have been gathered under
167. 20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 183 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use standard I O library Select whether to use sprintf sscanf printf vprintf and vsprintf which support the input and supported floating point output of floating point data data This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard library property is selected If Yes is selected in the Use static model property in the Memory Model category Yes is selected in the Add pascal function attribute to functions property then this property will behave as if No were selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard library which support the input and out put of floating point data No Does not use the standard library which support the input and output of floating point data Use multiplier and Select whether to use the standard library which supports a multiplier and divider divider Whether there is a multiplier and divider depends on the microcontroller that is used This property is not displayed when the microcontroller does not have a multiplier and divider and No in the Use standard library property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the standard library which supports a multiplier and divider No Does not use the standard library which suppo
168. 4 nga RA78K0 406 nj LK78K0 nj RA78K0 447 403 nka RA78K0 410 nkd LK78K0 455 nkl LK78K0 nkm LK78KO nkp LK78KO 459 453 457 nks RA78KO 412 nkx RA78KO 413 nlf LB78KO nlf LK78KO nlf RA78KO no CC78KO no LK78KO no OC78K0 no RA78KO np LK78KO np RA78KO nq CC78KO nr CC78K0 nr OC78K0 536 463 424 347 446 514 402 452 409 354 348 350 351 353 517 ns LK78K0 449 ns OC78K0 516 nu OC78K0 518 nv CC78K0 381 nz CC78K0 384 O o CC78K0 347 o LCNV78K0 560 o LK78K0 446 o OC78K0 514 o RA78K0 402 Object converter 495 Open with Program dialog box 314 Option dialog box 298 General Build Debug category 300 Output an assemble list 27 Output map information 27 Output panel 272 Output symbol information 28 P p CC78K0 358 p LK78K0 452 p RA78K0 409 Parameter file 394 438 495 509 552 Path Edit dialog box 284 pick 546 Preprocess list file 98 Progress Status dialog box 297 Project Tree panel 145 Property panel 157 Assemble Options tab 200 Build Settings tab 237 Category Information tab 270 Common Options tab 160 Compile Options tab 174 Create Library Options tab 224 File Inf
169. 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 13F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 2011 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 1 C
170. 8000H O7FFFH O7FFFH Common 32K bytes Common 32K bytes 00000H 00000H bank number CPU address flash memory real address Hex Format Bank The assembler references an address based on the bank number CPU address so the user is conscious of this bank number CPU address When performing self programming or on board programming to the flash memory however programming must be performed based on the flash memory real address Therefore the object converter outputs the hex file with the flash memory real address thereby address translation from bank number CPU address to the flash memory real address during self programming or by the writer is no longer required The hex output based on the flash memory real address is supported in the object converter With the bank supported products codes are output in the Intel extended hex format and flash memory real address by default but other output formats can also be selected by specifying the k option With a 64 KB or larger flash memory the code does not operate if it is output in the Intel standard format In this case be sure to specify the Intel extended format or the Motorola S type 24 bit standard address or 32 bit address for output R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 135 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS In the following program lab_bk1 is allocated to address 18000H Assemble list ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT main_c C
171. 9 or less the length of the effective character string changes as follows Effective length Max number of characters per line 60 An abort error occurs if he character string is not specified If the np option is specified the Ih option is invalid If the Ih option is omitted the title column of the assemble list file will be blank The character set that can be described in the title column is as follows Character In Command Line In Parameter File Can be described if enclosed in Can be described Interpreted in the same way as in the command line even if enclosed in Can be described if enclosed in Cannot be described Assumed to be a comment Can be described Cannot be described Assumed to be a comment double quotation mark Cannot be described as a valid Cannot be described as a valid character character 00H Cannot be described Can be described However it is interpreted as the end of the character string R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 419 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Character 03H 06H 08H ODH OEH 10H 15H 17H 18H 1BH 7FH APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE In Command Line Cannot be described In Parameter File Can be described However these will appear in the assemble list file as A single ODH will not be output to the list 01H 02H 04H 05H 07H OBH OCH OFH 11H 12H 13H 14H 16H
172. Area Project Project Tree EJ Fjboot Project FE uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool i Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool S 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool B g File 5X Startup c boot c dr link_boot dr lt 2 gt Set the build options for the boot area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel lt 3 gt Set variables relocation options Set the variables functions relocation options to generate a variables information file and use it to allocate variables and functions Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark If a variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure B 12 Output folder for variables information file Property in Boot Area Variables information file name ProjectName vfi Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the output fol
173. Block Format for Extended Tektronix Number of ASCII Description Characters Standard header field Block type 8 Load address Start address for program execution Number of characters is variable Item Description Number Header character Block length 8H Block type 8 Check sum 1AH Number of digits in load address Load address 80H Symbol block unused The extended Tech symbol block is data used for symbolic debugging It may be assumed to have the following characteristics Table B 17 Symbol Block Characteristics for Extended Tektronix Items Characteristics 1 to 16 uppercase and lowercase alphabets numerals period and underscore Numerals are not permitted for the start character Up to 64 bits 16 digit hexadecimal are possible Address or scalar a scalar indicates any numerical value other than an address Addresses are divided into code addresses instruction addresses and data addresses addresses of data items Global local specification Indicates whether a symbol is global external reference enabled or local R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 502 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Section membership A section may be considered a range to which a memory name is given Each address in a program belongs to at least one section A scalar does not belong to any section The format for the symbol block
174. Build mode list DefaultBuild Hg BuildMode2 Duplicate Select the build mode to be deleted from the build mode list and click the Delete button The Message dialog box below opens Figure 2 107 Message Dialog Box Question Q0232001 p Delete build mode BuildMode2 ox tances tee To continue with the operation click the OK button in the dialog box The selected build mode is deleted from the project Caution You cannot delete DefaultBuild R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 78 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface Figure 2 108 Property Panel After Changing Standard Build Option E Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex File Intermediate file output folder BulldModeN ame To make the build options for the currently selected project main project or subproject the standard build options remove the boldface select the Build tool node on the project tree and select Set to Default Build Option for Project from the context menu Figure 2 109 Set to Default Build Option for Project ltem 0 Build Tool i a 78KO Simulator Dek z shila zi amp Program Analyzer 4 eR Rebuild Project Shift
175. C O D aes Cp lt 5 D CtENESAS CubeSuite V1 01 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual 78KO Build Target Device 78KO Microcontroller All information contained in these matenals including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics Www renesas com Rev 1 00 Oct 2011 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or othe
176. Cross reference list file Assembler source file Object module file If there are compiling errors a variety of files other than the error list and cross reference files cannot be Remark output A temporary file is renamed to an appropriate name when the compiling ends without error If compiling ends in error the temporary files are deleted R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 333 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 1 O files The I O files of the C Compiler are shown below See 3 1 C Compiler for details about output files Input files Table B 1 I O Files of C Compiler File Name C source file Explanation Source file written in the C language user created file Default File Type Include file File referenced from C source files File written in C language user created file Parameter file File created by the user when the user wants to specify multiple commands that cannot be specified in the command line when the C compiler is run Variables information file File which specifies the allocation destinations of variables Output files Object module file Binary image file containing machine language information relocatable information related to the location address of the machine language and symbol information Assembler source file ASCII image file of the object code output by the compiler Preproce
177. CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file creation specification The error list file creation specification options are as follows e se Description format e output file name Interpretation when omitted No error list file is output Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be input file name ecc If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be output file name ecc If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If the w0 option is specified warning messages cannot be output Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the error list file prime ecc describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c e Output example is shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 369 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE prime H warning Expected function prototype prime warning
178. Decimal 37 period 38 _ underscore 39 atoz 40 to 65 Data block The format for the data block is shown below Table B 15 Data Block Format for Extended Tektronix Number of ASCII Description Characters Header Standard header field Block type 6 Load address Address from which the object code is loaded Number of characters is variable Object code Number of bytes n displayed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Caution In extended Tektronix the number of characters in a specific field is variable within 2 to 17 1 to 16 characters of actual data The first character in this variable field is a hexadecimal which indicates the length of the field The first character in this variable field is a hexadecimal which indicates the length of the field The length of the character string is therefore 1 to 16 characters and the length of the variable length field including the character string length indicator is 2 to 17 15 6 1c 3 100 020202020202 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item Description Number Header character Block length 15H 21 Block type 6 Check sum 1CH Number of digits in load address Load address 100H Object code 6 bytes R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 501 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Termination block The format for the termination block is shown below Table B 16 Termination
179. Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool T Ce Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Lp File sX Startup meg ew category R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 21 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 The default category name is New category To change the category name you can use Rename from the context menu of the category node 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as an existing category node 3 Categories can be nested up to 20 levels You can classify files into the created category node by dragging and dropping the file 2 3 6 Change the file display order You can change the display order of the files and category nodes using the buttons on the project tree Figure 2 14 Toolbar Project Tree Panel Proiect Tree A Pin Configurator Design Tool m P Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 2S 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool B EU File a Fall Build tool generated files im sample Im map sample map hex sample hex sym sample sym sx Startup ej main c Select any of the buttons below on the toolbar of the Project Tree panel Button Description Sorts category nodes and files by name Bd Ascending order ou Descending order Ral Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files by timestamp a Descending order Et Ascending order Ei Descending order
180. Device file Vx xx VF check complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If the variables information file generator detects a fatal error during variables functions information file gener ation which makes it unable to continue variables information file generate processing the variables functions information file generator outputs a message to the display cancels variables information file generation and returns control to the host operating system 78KO Var Func Inf Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation VF78KO error F0006 File not found sampl rel VF78KO error F0006 File not found samp2 rel Program Aborted R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 570 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE In the above example a non existent object module file is specified An error occurs and the variables infor mation file generator aborts the execution Anon existent variables relocation option is specified C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel z 78KO Var Func Inf Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation VF78KO error F0018 Option is not recognized z Program Aborted In the above example a non existent variables relocation option is specified An error occurs and the vari ables functions information file generator aborts the execution 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set
181. E HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 416 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format ll number of lines Interpretation when omitted ll66 No page breaks in the case of display output Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in an assemble list file Application Use the Il option to change the number of lines per page in an assemble list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 20 to 32767 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of lines is omitted it is assumed that 66 has been specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the np option is specified the Il option is invalid Cautions A control instruction LENGTH with the same function as the Il option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below Example of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm 1120 The contents of kKOmain prn is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 417 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Assembler
182. Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 216 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after link processing after link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is des
183. F7 H D Fie fd Clean Project Set to Default Build Option For Project Uy Import Build Options W Set Link Order a Property The value of the properties after setting them as the standard build option are as shown below Figure 2 110 Property Panel After Setting Standard Build Option E Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex File Intermediate file output folder ZbuildModeN ames Caution When the main project is selected only the main project settings are made Even if subprojects are added their settings are not made R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 79 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build 1 Build types The following types of builds are available Table 2 1 Build Types Type Description Build Out of build target files runs a build of only updated files See 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild Runs a build of all build target files See 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with other operations See 2 16 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has See 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they ar
184. Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following property and then click the button From the Compile Options tab Variables information file for boot area in the Variables Information File cate gory Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set in the caller of this dialog box exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 308 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the file name to set in the caller of the dialog box 4 Files of type area Specify the file type to set in the caller of the dialog box Variables information file for boot area vfi Variables information file for boot area Function buttons Open Sets the specified file in the caller of the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 309 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the boot area load module file to set in the caller of the dialog box Figure A 43 Specify Boot Ar
185. Functions System Library Functions Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 328 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Figure A 50 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size 1 Function Name subt il OK 2 Frame Size Cancel Function buttons 3 Additional Margin 4 4 Recursion Depth Callee Function List for Indirect Call Callee Functions All Functions sub11 4 4 main 576 4 stab1 4 4 sub 572 424 sub11 4 4 5 sub12 8 4 sample c sub1 3 4 4 subl 4 4 4 sub2 148 140 sub21 4 4 sub3 8 8 sub31 4 4 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then select Adjust Stack Size from the Option menu On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then click the W button from toolbar On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then select Adjust Stack Size from the context menu On the Unknown Functi
186. HAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS SYMBOL iumul ismul _ RTARGO _ RTARGL _ RTARG2 _ RTARG3 _ RTARG4 _ RTARGS5 _ RTARG6 _ RTARG7 CPR1 FPRS FPRXP FPRXD FPRXS FPRFP FPRF1 FPRF2 Total Code Size 14 45820 Byte s Description Object information start Format Outputs information related to the object module file File name Outputs the file name Segment name Outputs the name of the segment to which the file is to be relocated Segment size Outputs the size of the segment to which the file is to be relocated Code size Outputs the code size of the global function defined in the file No assembler source file is output for assembler source files Global function name Outputs the name of the global function defined in the file external symbol name Total size of segments at relocation destination Outputs the total size of the segments to which the files is to be relocated Library information start Outputs information related to the library file File name Outputs the file name Segment name Outputs the name of the segment to which the file is to be relocated Segment size Outputs the size of the segment to which the file is to be relocated Code size Outputs the code size of the global function defined in the file Global function name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Outputs the name of the global f
187. IX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths The include paths which the system set during compiling are displayed The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when click ing the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name
188. IX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx Assembler Source Date xx xxx xxxx Time xx xx xx Command cF051144 prime c sa In file prime c Asm file prime asm Para file SPROCESSOR F051144 SDEBUG SNODEBUGA SKANJICODE SJIS STOL_INF O3FH 0400H 02H 020H OOH FIL_NAM file 022H OFFFEH O3FH O67H O1H OOH AUX_FIL prime c MOD_NAM prime OOH OFFFEH OOH 077H OOH OOH _printf _ RTARGO isrem _putchar _mark _main CODE CSEG _main SDGL 1 14 push push push push push mMmovw movw bf_main line 9 int i prime line 10 line 11 SDGL 0 4 a 00H hl a Lak ge ee R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 367 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE po X hl ax 014H GY pas ss 4 L0004 Code Information SFILE C um prime c 8 be void CODE SIZE 218 bytes CLOCK_SIZE 723 clocks STACK_SIZE 14 bytes printf 18 3 be pointer putchar 20 be int printf 25 bc pointer printf 31 be pointer 1 ae aint i s sp 2 CODE SIZE 30 CLOCK_SIZE 124 clocks STACK_SIZE 8 bytes printf 41 be char c x CODE SIZE 14 bytes CLOCK_SIZE 60 clocks STACK_SIZE 6 bytes Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file Vx xx R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 368 of 585 Oct 01 2011
189. It is assumed that the n has been specified 1 Adds debug information information starting with DGS or DGL to the object module file only No debug information is added to the assembler source file This option makes it easier to reference an assembler file Source debugging of object files is available since debug information is added to them Adds debug information to the object module file and the assembler source module file If both the g and ng options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If both the object module file and assembler source module file are not output the g option is invalid Example of use To add assembler source debug information to an object module file prime rel describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c g R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 357 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocess list file creation specification The preprocess list file creation specification options are as follows p k p Description format p output file name Interpretation when omitted None no file is output Function The p option specifies the output of a preprocess list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name If the p option is omitted no preprocess list file is output Application Use the p option to output the source file after pre
190. J0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 99 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 78K0 C Compiler V 1 x xx Cross reference List Date 2 xx XXX XXXX Page 3 xXxxx Command 4 cF051144 prime c x lw80 In file 5 prime c Xref file 6 prime xrf Para file 7 Inc file 9 ATTRIB 10 MODIFY 11 TYPE 12 SYMBOL 13 DEFINE 14 REFERENCE EXTERN EXTERN AUTO1 15 Target chip uPD78F0511_44 16 Device file Vx xx Description Format Version number Displayed in x yz format Date System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Number of pages Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Command line Outputs the command line contents following CC78K0 Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Cross reference list file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted xrf is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents that exceed the line length are output be
191. J0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 473 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Boot area ROM program linking specification for a product with built in flash memory The boot area ROM program linking specification option for a product with built in flash memory is as follows zb Description format Interpretation when omitted No link specification Function The zb option specifies the start address of the flash memory area Description Specify boot area ROM program linking for a product with built in flash memory and specify the start address of the flash memory area The range that can be specified for the value is OH to OFFFFH An error occurs if the address is omitted Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Example of use To specify 2000H as the start address of flash memory area describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel zb2000h R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 474 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE On chip debug specification The on chip debug specification option is as follows goO go Description format Interpretation when omitted On chip debug is not used Function The go option specifies whether on chip debug is used or not Application Use the go option to change the size of the debug monito
192. KO Property E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeN ame Hex file name ProjectName hex Hex file format Intel expanded hex format kie Split hex file No O Hex File Filling Fill free memory space Yesf u Filling value HEX FF Filing start address HEX Filling size byte HEX Output hex file Select this option to generate a hex file This option corresponds to the o option Common Compile Assemble Link Opti N 0 iy i A Memory Description of each category 1 Hex File The detailed information on hex files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output hex file Select whether to output the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the hex file No no Does not output the hex file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 218 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Output folder for hex file APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the folder for saving the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholde
193. ModeName Replaces with the build mode name nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the input file under object convert processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ObjectConvertedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under object convert processing OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before object convert processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before object convert processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up
194. NDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 0 to 127 0x00 to Ox7F 00 to 0177 char type 128 to 255 0x80 to OxFF 0200 to 0377 unsigned char type OU to 255U unsigned char type LO Eo TN3T7 char type However when the qu option is specified character constants in the range from 200 to 377 are handled as unsigned char type constants and have the values from 128 to 255 The constant added minus is handled as follows char type int type If the result of constant or variable calculation is overflow cast either the constant or variable to a type capable of representing the calculation result By casting changing the data type can be avoided When the qc1 option is specified constant calculation is sign extended Multiple optimization types can be specified If the q option or optimization types are omitted the optimization is identical to when the qcjlvw option is specified To delete a portion of the default options specify the options other than the options you want to delete example qr is specified gt Deletes qcjlvw If both the object module file and assembler source module file are not output the q options other than qu are invalid If both the q and nq options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If two or more q options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If both the qr and sm options are specified the compiler outputs the war
195. NESAS Page 330 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b All Functions Display a list of functions that can be added as functions called by the selected function callee functions This area generally displays functions that can be added in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the function that can be added is written in assembly language or it is a system library func tion then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe function that can be added is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe function that can be added includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an ampersand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe function that can be added is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name c Button area Adds the function selected in All Functions to Callee Functions If no function is selected in All Functions then this button will be grayed out Deletes the function selected in Callee Functions from Callee Functions If no function is selected in Callee Functions then this button will be grayed out Remark Functions can only be deleted from Callee Funct
196. OUTPUT LISTS CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX C INDEX It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OxXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such CubeSuite Start R20UT0727E Integrated Development Environment V850 Design R20UT0549E User s Manual R8C Design R20UT0550E RL78 Design R20UT0728E 78KOR Design R20UT0547E 78K0 Design R20UT0546E RX Coding R20UT0767E V850 Coding R20UT0553E Coding for CX Compiler R20UT0825E R8C Coding R20UT0576E RL78 78KOR Coding R20UT0729E 78K0 Coding R20UT0782E RX Build R20UT0768E V850 Build R20UT0557E Build for CX Compiler R20UT0826E R8C Build R20UT0575E R20UTO730E This manual RX Debug R20UT0769E V850 Debug R20UT0734E R8C Debug R20UT0770E RL78 Debug R20UT0733E 78KOR Debug R20UT0732E 78K0 Debug R20UT073
197. Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Forced load module file output specification The forced load module file output specification options are as follows j nj j nj Description format Interpretation when omitted nj Function The j option specifies that the load module file can be output even if a fatal error occurs The nj option disables the j option Application Normally when a fatal error occurs the load module file cannot be output When you wish to execute the command with a notice that a fatal error has occurred specify the j option to output the load module file Description When the j option is specified the load module file will be output even if a fatal error occurs If both the j and nj options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the j option is invalid Example of use To output a load module file kOsub Imf even if a fatal error occurs describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel j R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 447 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information output specification The debug information output specification options are as follows g ng g ng Description format 9 Sha Interpretation when omitted 9 Function The g option specifies that debug i
198. PENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the linker is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no link errors resulting from the link the linker outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Link complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects a link errors resulting from the link the linker outputs the number of errors and warnings to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Link complete 1 error s and 0 warning s found If the linker detects a fatal error during linking which makes it unable to continue link processing the linker outputs a message to the display cancels linking and returns control to the host operating system Anon existent object module file is specified C gt 1k78k0 sampl rel samp2 rel 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0 error F3006 File not found sampl rel RA78KO error F3006 File not found samp2 rel Program Aborted In the above example a non existent object module file is specified An error occurs and the linker aborts the
199. ProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile process ing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 258 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces wi
200. R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 The name of the library file which the system uses is displayed The system library file is searched with lower priority than the library file to be used The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default System libraries number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed 2tENESAS Page 210 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional library paths Specify the search folder to be used other than the standard libraries The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The library files are searched from the library path If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the linker The specified libr
201. R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 445 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Load module file output specification The load module file output specification options are as follows 0 no o no Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted oinput file name mt Function The o option specifies the output of a load module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option disables the o j and g option Application Use the o option to specify the location to which a load module file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing linking only to output a link list file This will shorten link time Description Even if the o option is specified when a fatal error occurs the load module file cannot be output If output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the load module file nput file name mf will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name mf will be output to the specified path If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output a load module file kO Imf describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 1mf R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 446 of 585
202. RENCE Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the assembler categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Debug Information 1 2 Preprocess 3 Output File 4 Assemble List 5 Others Figure A 6 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property A CA78KO Property E DebugInformaton Add debug information Yes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Output File Output common object file for various devices No Output error list file No Assemble List Others Add debug informaton Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g and ga options Compile hi Li i Object Co Variables Memory 7 Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g and ga options of the assembler Default Yes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Assembler Adds debug information
203. Run builds in batch with build modes Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file 6 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 12 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version You can change the version of the build tool compiler package used in the project main project or subproject Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Always latest version which was installed or the version on the Using compiler package version property in the Version Select category Figure 2 1 Version Select Category E Version Select Using compiler package version Always latest version which was installed v Remarks 1 When the build tool used in the main project and subprojects is the same you can collective
204. SAS Page 451 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link list file output specification The link list file output specification options are as follows p np p np Description format p output file name np Interpretation when omitted pinput file name map Function The p option specifies the output of a link list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The np option disables the p km kd kp kl Il and If option Application Use the p option to specify the location to which a link list file is output or to change its file name Specify the np option when performing linking only to output a load module file This will shorten link time Description If output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the link list file input file name map will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name map will be output If both the p and np options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0O map R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 452 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link list file information specification The link list file informa
205. SEG AT 100H 00100 13F301 BANK BANKNUM lab_bk1l 00103 R9A0080 lab_bk1 BANK1 7 18000 gt 0C000H Lab bk1 The example of output in Intel extended hex format flash memory real address is as follows gt LOOOFOOOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1O0 020000020000FC 0601000013F3019A0080D8 020000020000FC gt LOO1LOOOOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9 10011600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE9 10012600FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEFD9 gt LOBFFOOOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFS1 020000020000FC 04CO0000000000AF8D 020000020000FC gt LOCOO400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF3C gt LOCO1L400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF2C Since the 00100 address is not a bank so the code 13F301 9A0080 are written as is to address 00100 Since the 18000H address is a bank it is converted to a flash memory real address and the code visible to address 18000H is overwritten by address OCOOOH The code after the first 10 bytes remains as 00 00 00 AF causing the address value to be shifted At the same time the checksum values of the last byte of each line are also changed The user is not required to make special allowances for this change The example of output in Intel extended hex format bank number CPU address is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 136 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS LOOOFOOOPFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF10 020000020000FC
206. Save log R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 273 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive to the Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Replace Context menu Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on this panel Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column Help for Message Shows the help with regard to the message at the current caret Note that the help is only for warning error messages R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 274 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 25 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable inform
207. Select whether to expand the define directive into the preprocess list file cessor directive This corresponds to the kd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kd Expands the define directive into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the define directive into the preprocess list file Expand if ifdef ifndef Select whether to perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the pre preprocessor directive process list file This corresponds to the kf option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kf Performs output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef direc tives into the preprocess list file No Does not perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifn def directives into the preprocess list file Expand include prepro Select whether to perform output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file cessor directive This corresponds to the ki option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is sel
208. Specifies the processing for the preprocess list Preprocess specification Performs macro definitions Invalidates macro definitions Reads an include file from a specified folder Assembler source file creation specification Specifies the output of the assembler source file Error list file creation specification Specifies the output of the error list file Cross reference list file creation specification Specifies the output of the cross reference list file List format specification Specifies the number of characters per line in each list file Specifies the number of lines per page in each list file Specifies the number of expansion characters of a tab in each list file Inserts a form feed code at the end of each list file Adds the C source in the include file to the assembler source file with C source comments R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 341 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Classification Warning output specification APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Execution state display specification Specifies whether the execution status of compilation is output to the console Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Temporary file creation folder specification Creates a tempo
209. Suite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes on the Execute list converter property in the Assemble List category To output the error list file in the Assemble List category set the Output list converter error list file property to Yes e The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property Remark See B 6 1 O files for details about input and output files of the list converter 3 6 1 Absolute assemble list The absolute assemble list embeds absolute values in the assemble list and outputs the list The output format is same as for the assemble list output by the assembler 3 6 2 Error list Error messages output when the list converter is started up are stored in an error list The output format is same as for the error list output by the assembler R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 116 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 7 Variables Information File Generator The variables information file generator outputs the following file Variables information file Remark See B 7 1 O files for details about input and output files of the variables information file generator 3 7 1 Variables information file The variables information file contains informatio
210. Suite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assembler source file creation specification The assembler source file creation specification options are as follows a sa Description format a loutput file name Interpretation when omitted No assembler source file is output Function The a option specifies the output of the assembler source file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the a option to specify the location to which an assembler source file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the a option is specified the output file name will be input file name asm If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the a option is specified the output file name will be output file name asm If the drive name is omitted when the a option is specified the assemble source file will be output to the current drive If both the a and sa options are specified at the same time the sa option is ignored Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the assembler source file Sample asm describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c asample asm R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 365 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description for
211. Symbol value Displays the public symbol values Public symbol name Displays the public symbol names 3 3 4 Local symbol list A local symbol list outputs data on local symbols defined in an input module To configure the local symbol list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes kl on the Output with local symbol list property in the Link List category Local symbol list 1 MODULE 2 ATTR 3 VALUE 4 NAME R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 112 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format Name of module in which Displays the name of the input object module in which local symbols are defined local symbols are defined Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit PSW bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT
212. The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel 5 When a file is selected Compile Compiles the selected C source file Note that this menu is only displayed when a C source file except for non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Assemble Assembles the selected assembler source file Note that this menu is only displayed when an assembler source file except for non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see r Run the editor Note that this menu is
213. The build tool compiler assembler etc used in the project hereafter referred to as Build tool node File The following files that are added to the project are displayed under the hereafter referred to as File node root of this node C source file c Assembler source file asm Header file h inc Object file rel Library file lib Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Function information file fin Not Other file doc xml etc Build tool generated files The following files generated by the build tool appear directly below the hereafter referred to as Build tool generated Node generated during the build files node For other than library projects Load module file Imf Link list file map Error list file elk eoc Hex file hex hxb hxf Symbol table file sym Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt For library projects Library file lib List file Ist Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt Files displayed under this node cannot be renamed deleted or moved This node is always placed lower than the File node This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building Startup This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the project
214. UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 203 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output with assemble list Select whether to output the assemble list information into the assemble list file info This corresponds to the ka option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the assemble list information into the assemble list file No nka Does not output the assemble list information into the assemble list file Output with symbol list Select whether to output the symbol list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the ks option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ks Outputs the symbol list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the symbol list information into the assem ble list file Output with cross refer Select whether to output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file ence list This corresponds to the kx option of the assembler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Ba
215. Using libraries property in the Library category Figure 2 45 Using libraries Property El Libra a Using libraries 0 ystem libraries ystem Iibranes U Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 38 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 46 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text user lib Enter the library file name in Text with one name per line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 64 line If you click the OK button the entered library files are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 47 Using libraries Property After Setting Library Files A Using libraries 1 0 user lib ystem libraries ystem libranes U Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 To change the library files you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Using libraries property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab The library files are searched from the library path To add a library path set the Additional library paths property Caution Library files can also be linked by adding them direct
216. WINDOW REFERENCE Optimize for debugging Select whether to perform the optimization for debugging This corresponds to the qg option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qg Performs the optimization for debugging No Does not specify performing the optimization for debug ging Note The results of the calculation when the qc option is set are as follows Calculation Target Calculation Result unsigned char type variable and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type unsigned char type variable and signed char type variable unsigned char type signed char type variable and signed char type variable signed char type Constants from 128 to 255 and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type Constants from 128 to 127 and signed char type variable signed char type Constants from 0 to 255 with suffix U and signed char type variable unsigned char type 4 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectD
217. a link list file Inserts a form feed code at the end of a link list file Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file Library file specification Inputs the specified file as a library file Library file read path specification Reads a library file from a specified path Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Temporary file creation path specification Creates a temporary file in the specified path Device file search path specification Reads a device file from a specified path R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 443 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Classification Description Warning message output Specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the specification console Boot area ROM program linking Specifies the start address of the flash memory area specification for a product with built in flash memory On chip debug specification Specifies whether on chip debug is used or not Security ID specification i Specifies a security ID User option byte specification Specifies the value set for the user option byte Help specification Outputs a help message on the display 2 Precedence For the link options shown in the following table the precedence is explained in a case where two or more options along the vertical axis
218. ab Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category Object Convert Options tab R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 160 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 4 Property Panel Common options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property El Build Mode Build mode Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Perform optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition El Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output file name DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File BuildModeN ame Yes Standard qx2 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 Additional library paths 0 BuildModeN ame ProjectN ame mf E Frequently Used Options for Object Convert Output hex file Output folder for hex file Hex file name Hex file format Device Build Method Version Select Notes Others Build mode Yes BuildModeN ame ProjectName hex Intel expanded hex format kie Selects the build mode name to be used during build EA Compile Description of each cat
219. acters are not distinguished for the options 0 An error occurs if output file name is omitted If the file type is omitted it is assumed that nput file name I st is entered public nopublic It can also be specified as p np public specifies the output of public symbol information The nopublic option disables the public option If both the public and nopublic options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use Output a module information in the library file kO lib to the list file kO Ist At this time specify the p option so as to output public symbol information list p ok0 ist k0 lib The contents of the list file kO Ist is as follows 78K0 librarian Vx xx DATE xx XXX xx PAGE 1 LIB FILE NAME k0O 1lib xx XXX XXXxX 0001 mil rel XX XXX XXXX syml sym2 sym3 NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 0002 m3 rel xx XXX XXXxX NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 547 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 0003 m2 rel XX XXX XXXX NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 548 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format help h Abbreviated form Function The help command outputs a help message on the display Description The help message is a list of explanations of the subcom
220. after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 One or more white space characters or tabs are replaced by a single white space character Device type This character string is specified via the c option Debug information Outputs DEBUG control Output is either DEBUG or NODEBUG Debug information control of assembler Kanji type information Outputs NODEBUGA control Output is NODEBUGA Outputs the kanji code 2 byte code type Output is KANJICODE SJIS KANJICODE EUC or KANJICODE NONE Tool information Outputs tool information version number error information specified options etc information starts with TOL_INF Symbol information Outputs symbol information information starts with DGS This information is output only when the debug information output option has been specified Even then it is not output if the g1 option has been specified Assembler source Outputs an assembler source file containing the compilation results Line number Outputs the C source module file s line numbers as right aligned decimal value with zeros suppressed C source This is the input C source image Contents after column 80 are output beginni
221. age 144 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components such as the build tool source files etc in tree view Figure A 2 Project Tree Panel Tree UR Ee Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller a A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool S 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 File 5 ral Build tool generated files im sample Inf map sample map hex sample hex a sym sample sym sx Startup ej main c B LR sub Subproject uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool eii Code Generator Design Tool A CA78K0 Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 4 E File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Project Tree R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 145 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node Node Description Project name Project Project name hereafter referred to as Project node Build tool name Build tool
222. age number Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Subtitle character string Outputs the character string specified by SUBTITLE control instruction Command line Outputs the command line contents Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character Input source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted asm is attached as the file type extension Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 102 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format 9 Output object module file Outputs the specified file name name If the file type is omitted ref is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line 10 Print file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted prn is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 11 on the next line 3 2 2 Assemble list The assemble list outputs the res
223. al Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the higher 8 bit value of the address R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 498 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Data record Item Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number 2 digits Number of bytes in the code stored in the record A maximum of 16 bytes can be stored Location address offset The start address offset of the code displayed in the record is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal Record type Fixed at OOH Code Max 32 digits The object code is shown one byte at a time with the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits separated A maximum of 16 bytes can be expressed in th e code Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the code 04 0000 03 0000 0000 F9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 04 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 03 Fixed at 0000 Fixed at 0000 Check sum Fixed at F9 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 499 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 0
224. all folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after build processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 173 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the compiler categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Debug Information N Se eas a a es a Ns Be Optimization i Optimization Details Preprocess Startup Library Message Ex
225. alog box then closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 280 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 28 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Supports Placeholders Text Edit Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active project folde ActiveProjectName sample Active project name E 2 BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite install Y lt gt Function buttons Help Figure A 29 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Does Not Support Placeholders Text Edit Function buttons R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 281 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category Macro definition
226. ames are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name Common Compile Op Assemble 0 Variables R Memory Ba B 5 4 Option 1 Types The create library options are detailed instructions for the operation of the librarian The types and explanations for create library options are shown below Table B 26 Create Library Options Classification Description List file format specification Changes the number of characters printed per line in a list file Changes the number of lines printed per page in a list file Inserts a form feed code at the end of a link list file Temporary file creation path Creates a temporary file in the specified path specification Help specification Outputs a help message on the display R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 533 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE List file format specification The list file format specification options are as follows lw Il lf nlf lw Description format lw number of characters Interpretation when omitted lw132 80 characters in the case of display output Function The Iw option specifies the number of characters per line in a list file Application Use the Iw option to change the number of characters per line in a list file Description The range of number of characters that can
227. an boot area ROM When a code is output to a segment allocated in extended space the object converter generates a separate hex file for each space The file types of hex files generated for extended space are as follows File Normal Space Extended Space REGULAR ai EX13 EX14 EX15 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 514 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To output a hex file sample hex describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 lmf osample hex R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 515 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Symbol table file output specification The Symbol table file output specification options are as follows s ns s ns Description format s output file name ns Interpretation when omitted sinput file name sym The file type for extended space is S1 to S15 Function The s option specifies the output of a symbol table file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ns option specifies that no symbol table file is output Application Use the s option to specify the location to which a symbol table file is output or to change its file name Specify the ns option when performing object conversion only to output a hex file This will shorten object conversion time Description If output file name is omitte
228. and line only 1 source file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all assemble options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kOmain pra using an editor and then start up the assembler parameter file kOmain asm osample rel psample prn C gt ra78k0 fkOmain pra 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the assembler is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K0 Assembler Vx xx XX XXX xXxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no assembly errors resulting from the assembly the assembler outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system PASS1 Start PASS2 Start Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 396 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If it detects an assembly errors resulting from the assembly the assembler outputs the number of errors and warnings to the display and returns control to the host operating system PASSI Start kOmain asm 12 RA78KO error E2201 Syntax error PASS2 Start kOmain asm 12 RA78KO error E2201 Syntax error
229. and options along the horizontal axis are specified at the same time Table B 10 Precedence of Link Options Location marked with NG If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The km option is invalid C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel np km Location marked with A If all three of the options in the horizontal axis are specified at the same time the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example If the nkm nkp and nkl options are specified at the same time the p option is invalid C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel p nkm nkp nkl Blank area If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is valid R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 444 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE As with the o no options if two options for which n can be added to the beginning of the option name are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example The no option is specified after the o option so the o option is invalid and the no option is valid C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel o no Options not described in Table B 10 Precedence of Link Options are not particularly affected by other options However if the help specification option is specified all of other option specifications become invalid
230. ange Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 207 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the linker categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Debug Information 2 Input File 3 Output File 4 Library 5 Device 6 Message 7 Stack 8 Link List 9 Error List 10 Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure A 7 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property a CA78KO Property Debug Informaton Add debug information E Input File Using link directive file E Output File Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectN ame Imf Force linking against error No E Library Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Additional librar
231. ard qx2 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Speed prece dence qx1 Performs optimization with the execution speed pre cedence Yes Standard qx2 Performs optimization with both the execution speed and module size precedence Yes Code size qx3 Performs optimization with the module size prece dence Yes Code size Best qx4 Performs optimization with top precedence to module size In addition qx3 common code is placed in subrou tines and the library for the stack access is used Yes Detail setting The Optimization Details category is shown The option that is selected in the category has the prece dence for the optimization When No nq is selected in all the properties in the Optimization Details category the optimization will not be done The optimization will not be done The detailed information on the optimization are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes Detail setting in the Perform optimization property in the Optimiza tion category is selected R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 176 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Swap order of formula operations APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to output an efficient code in order to achieve efficient register utilization by swapping the execution order of formula T
232. are changed from the Compile Options tab the properties are displayed in boldface Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected Debug Information Optimization Optimization Details Preprocess Message 6 Extension Memory Model Output File Assembly File 0 Data Control 1 List File 2 Others Figure A 19 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c main c Property E Debuginformation Add debug information Yesf dd to both assembly and object file g2 E Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qx2 E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 Message Extension Memory Model Output File Assembly File Data Control List File Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option Build Settings i Individual Assemble Opti File Information R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 241 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Description of each category 1 Debug Information APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The detailed information on debug information is displayed and
233. area 1 Menu bar This area consists of the following menu items a File menu Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain with the greatest total stack size including the stack size of callee functions of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Functions in the same manner as the gj button Save All Call Chains from Selected Function Opens the Save As dialog box for saving all call chains of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Every Root R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain of the function displayed in the tree display area with the largest total stack size to an output result file 7tENESAS Page 320 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Save All Call Chains from Every Root APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Save As dialog box for saving all call chains of all functions dis played in the tree display area to an output result file Load Stack Size Specification File Opens the Open dialog box for loading a stack size specification file Save Stack Size Specification File Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the results of the operations made in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box e g changes to func
234. argument and automatic variable to KREGxx Replaces the processing routines before and after the function with a library Outputs a warning message for ql4 and processes as ql3 Automatically adds a pascal function modifier Outputs objects for flash Regards int and short descriptions as char The compiler defined macro _FROM_INT_TO_CHAR is regarded as 1 Regards long descriptions as int The compiler defined macro _FROM_INT_TO_INT is regarded as 1 Note s e and n cannot be specified at the same time R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 385 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use The characters after before the line feed code in the C source file prime c are interpreted as a comment Also nesting of comments is permitted C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c zpc R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 386 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows es J y Description format y folder Interpretation when omitted Normal search path only Remark The normal search paths are as follows 1 lt dev gt Path by which the cc78k0 exe was started up 2 Path by which the cc78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The
235. arious devices No Does not specifies outputting the objects common to the various devices 9 Assembly File The detailed information on assembly files is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 251 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output assemble file Select whether to output the assembly file This corresponds to the a sa and li options of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes With no C source info a Outputs the assembly file without C source information Yes With C source info unex Outputs the assembly file with C source panded include file con information include file contents are not tents sa expanded Yes With C source Outputs the assembly file with C source info expanded include file information include file contents are contents sa li expanded No Does not output the assembly file 10 Data Control The detailed information on data control are displayed and the configuration can be changed Assign bit field in struc Select whether to assign the member of the bit field structure from MSB ture from MSB This corresponds to the rb option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restr
236. ark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 5 Enable C comments Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To enable C comments select Yes zp on the Allow C format comments property in the Extension category default Figure 2 34 Allow C format comments Property ve Cet a comments vee zp Kanji character code of source JIS zs Follow ANSI Standard No Interpret int short as char No Interpret long as int No Disable an int extension for function No 2 5 6 Use floating point compatible standard input output functions Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel In the Library category if you select Yes on the Use standard library property the Use standard I O library supported floating point data property is displayed To use the standard input output functions which support floating point data sprintf sscanf printf vprintf and vsprintf select Yes Figure 2 35 Use standard library and Use standard I O library supported floating point data Property Use standard library Notuse multiply and divide instructhon oY Use multiplier and divider E Using standard libraries Using standard libraries 3 2 5 7 Change the setting to use the mul
237. arks 1 See 2 7 1 Add a user library for the method of adding a user library to the project 2 Also you can set the link order of object module files and library files see 2 15 2 Set the link order of files 4 Specify the output of a load module Select the type of the load module to be generated see 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 5 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler linker and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assem ble Options 2 7 Set Link Options 6 Run a build Run a build see 2 16 Runa Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 16 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild see 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 16 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes lt Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 11 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Optio
238. ary path name is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional library paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified If the number of items specified in the System library paths property and in the Using standard libraries property in the Library category on the Com pile Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution System library paths The folder to search the system library file is displayed The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If a relative path is displayed the reference point of the path
239. as type area a In the Editor panel The following file types are displayed depend on the file type of the currently editing file Text file txt Text format C source file c C language source file Header file h inc Header file Assemble file asm Assembly language source file Link directive file dr dir Link directive file Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Variable information file vfi Variable information file yNote Function information file Function information file fin Map file map Map file Symbol table file sym Symbol table file Hex file hex hxb hxf Hex file Note Only devices with a memory bank installed b In the Output panel The following file types are displayed Text file txt Text format Function buttons Button Function Save Saves the file as the designated file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 313 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file selected in Project Tree Figure A 45 Open with Program Dialog Box Open with Program 1 Program Files J O 2 rega Adobe MSN Gaming Zone O altime300 NEC Electronics Tools My Recent Common Files NetMeeting Documents ComPlus Applications Network As
240. ash Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool m P Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a Ei File sk Startup c flash c e link_flash dr lt 9 gt Set the build options for the flash area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel lt 10 gt Set variables relocation options Set the variables relocation options to generate a variables information file and use it to allocate variables and functions Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark If a variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure B 19 Output folder for variables information file Property in Flash Area Variables information file name ProjectN ame vfi Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the output folder and file name of the variables infor
241. ate a path at a line By default the contents of the text box that opened this dialog box are reflected in this area Path can be added by one of the following method Click the Browse button and then select folders in the Browse For Folder dialog box Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Caution If an extremely long absolute path is specified as a relative path an error could occur when clicking the OK button In this case designate the absolute path Remark Up to 10000 lines are allowed Up to the maximum characters that are limited by the Windows OS are allowed When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description Specify a path The field is empty The path is too long Specify a path with a number of The file name including the path is exceeding the characters equal to or fewer than maximum number of character limit defined in the original path restriction in the property that called this dialog box The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path includes the folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated characters cannot be used lt gt The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name More than maximum number of paths or files specified The number of paths or f
242. ath per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 64 line Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder 3 Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 30 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths 2 Anc ProjectDir ystem include paths U Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition 0 Macro definition Macro undefinition To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 31 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional incl
243. ation file vfi Function information file fin Text file txt Empty C source file 2 6 File name J 3 File location D work sample The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or category node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select file types to create The description is shown at the lower box when a file type is selected File types to be shown are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Function information file fin Noe R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 275 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to create The default file extension is txt Remark If extensions are not designated the one selected in the File type area are is added Also that if extensions different from the one selected in the File type area are designated the one selected in
244. ault order is the order that the files are registered to the project By changing the display order of the paths you can set the specified order of the paths to the compiler To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the path names Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with the absolute path of that file 2 Newly added system include paths are added next to the last path of the list 3 When the path names are dragged and dropped the multiple path names which are next to each other can be selected together b Button R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 287 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Moves the selected path to down Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any path is not selected Function buttons Button Function Sets the specified order of the paths to the compiler as the display order in the Path list dis play area and closes this dialog box Cancels the specified order of the paths and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 288 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 32 S
245. ave Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode Western European Windows Newline code Windows CR LF 3 C Reload the file with these settings Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Current encoding of the file default Default encoding of the current OS Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Windows CR LF Macintosh CR R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 289 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Unix LF An active newline entry is selected by default 3 Reload the file with these settings Reloads the file with the selected e
246. b 0x34 extern int func_flashl int extern int func_flash2 int void boot_main void func int k boot_a func_flashl boot_a boot_b func_flash2 boot_b R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 486 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 2 gt C source file for the flash area include ext_def h extern void func void void main void func void func_flashl void func_flash2 lt 3 gt ext_def h pragma ext_table 0x2000 pragma ext_func func_flashl 1 pragma ext_func func_flash2 2 c Startup routine Separately prepare a startup routine for the boot area and a startup routine for the flash area Startup routines are provided for both the boot area and the flash area by the CA78KO Each startup routine must perform the following processing Perform processing to initialize the RAM area to be used for the boot area Branching from the boot area to the startup routine of the flash area Perform processing to initialize the RAM area to be used for the flash area Moving to the processing of the flash area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 487 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE d How to create the projects specifically lt 1 gt Create the boot area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure B 11 Boot
247. bject Co Variables 2 11 1 Relocate C source files to the optimum area Use the memory bank relocation support tool to relocate C source files to the optimum area This tool generates a function information file a file containing relocation information for each file C source files will be relocated to the common area or bank area by performing compilation using that file Caution This function is valid only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microconiroller The procedures for performing this operation are described below Generating a function information file automatically and relocating C source files Changing the relocation destination of the auto generated function information file 1 Generating a function information file automatically and relocating C source files Below is the procedure for generating a function information file automatically and using that file to relocate C source files via one build a Set the output of the function information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab on the Property panel To use the memory bank relocation support tool select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output category No is selected by default R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 48 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 60 Use memory ban
248. boot sym s Startup c boot c ar link_boot dr veil boot vfi 2 14 3 Set the flash area project 1 Create the flash area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure 2 84 Flash Area Project Project Tree EJ o AMES uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool w Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool o G File 5 Startup ej flash c de link_flash dr R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 64 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set the build options for the flash area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel a Set variables relocation options Set the variables relocation options to generate a variables information file and use it to allocate variables Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark If a variables information file with the same name already exists the build
249. bug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool B Ei File B g Build tool generated files im sample Inf map sample map hex sample hex sym sample sym 5X Startup e main c veil sample vfi R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 45 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Editing and using an auto generated variables information file Users can edit a variables information file Below is the procedure for editing the generated variables information file in 1 Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions by the user and using that file to allocate variables a Edit the variables information file Edit the variables information file generated automatically in 1 Generating a variables information file automatically and allocating variables and functions Remark See 3 7 1 Variables information file for details about the format of the auto generated variables information file Describe the variables information file according to the following format Variable information static variable and const variable variable name number of references size reference type file name const global variable and const variable variable name number of references size reference type const static variable variable name number of references size reference type file name global variable variable name number of references size
250. by an external text editor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Cautions 1 The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been reg istered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build 2 If this item is selected a file that is registered in the project but does not exist a file grayed out will not be observed even if it is registered again by the Explorer etc To observe the file reload the project file or select this item again after unselecting this item and closing this dialog box 3 Enable Break Sound Beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break Do not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break default 4 Observe downloaded load module files changing Observes the load module file downloaded to the debug tool for changes When there is a change a message dialog box confirming whether to execute the download will be displayed Does not observe the load module file downloaded to the debug tool for changes default 5 Buttons Initialize Settings Return all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function
251. bytes common area sm14 Specifies 14 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 15 bytes common area sm15 Specifies 15 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 16 bytes common area sm16 Specifies 16 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area No 2tENESAS Does not use the static model Page 188 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use static model exten Specify the extension method when the static model is used extended sion This corresponds to the zm option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Use static model property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Only use common area for Uses only the common area for argu args and auto vars zm1 ments and auto variables Yes Only use saddr area for args Uses only the saddr area for argu and auto vars zm2 ments and auto variables No Does not use the static model exten sion Output objects for flash Select whether to output the object for flash This corresponds to the zf option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zf Outputs objects for flash No Does not output objects for flash Add pascal function Specify whether to automatically add a pascal function attribute __ pascal attribute to funct
252. can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder BuildModeName is set by default If this property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree lt 2 gt Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Variables information file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 44 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces
253. catable addresses and symbols in the input file and outputs an absolute assem bly list Figure B 35 1 O Files of List Converter Assemble list file Object module file Load module file Parameter file List Converter Absolute assemble list file Error list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 551 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 1 I O files The I O files of the list converter are shown below Table B 28 1 O Files of List Converter File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Object module file Binary fils containing relocation information and symbol information regarding machine language information and machine language location addresses Assemble list file File containing assembly information such as assemble lists and cross reference lists Load module file Binary image file of the object codes output as a result of linking Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed commands user created file Output files Absolute assemble list file List file which embed actual addresses in relocatable addresses and symbols in input files Error list file File containing error information generated dur ing converting lists B 6 2 Functions 1 Resolving disadvantages of the assembler relocatable assembler The list converter offers a solution to disadvantages of relocatable assembler by embedding the locatio
254. ce Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the variables relocation options See B 7 5 Option for details about variables relocation options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks object module file name The name of the object module file to generate the variables information file Up to 1024 items can be input as an input module Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Caution Add options specific to the variables information file generator after specifying the same options and object module file name as those specified for the linker Example To output a variables information file info vfi describe as C gt vf78kO main rel sub rel voinfo vfi b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the variables information file generator will not fit on the command line or when the same variables relocation option is specified repeatedly each time a variables information file is generated To start up the variables information file generator from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the variables information file generator from a parameter file as follows X gt v 78k0 Aobject module file A fparameter file name f Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which in
255. cess list file Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e and se options of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Without C source e Outputs the error list file without C source Yes With C source se Outputs the error list file with C source No Does not output the error list file Output cross reference Select whether to output the cross reference list file list file This corresponds to the x option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes x Outputs the cross reference list file No Does not output the cross reference list file Output with form feed Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files preprocess list file error list control code file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the lf option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lf Outputs a fo
256. change the branch table address When setting the branch table s start address to other than 2000H also change the interrupt vector processing in the following manner Change the address value of ITBLTOP EQU 2000H in vect inc The default installation location for vect inc is as follows C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO Vx xx src cc78k0 src bat repvect bat oat mkstup bat on the DOS prompt and update the startup routine and library copy to lib78k0 and use for linking Page 493 of 585 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE f Describing a link directive file The following points should be noted when using a link directive file If the address of a section placed in the RAM area overlaps in the boot area and flash area the linker outputs an error For the RAM area that must be referenced simultaneously in the boot area and flash area addresses must be specified so that they do not overlap A link directive file related to the branch table does not have to be described It is automatically allocated to an address specified by the link option g Library If a library function is called from the boot area or flash area the library is linked to the object on the calling side For example even if a library is linked to the flash area the same library is linked to the boot area if the same library function is called from the b
257. cimal numbers describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi vs0AH To specify the margin size of the saddr area as 1010B bytes in binary numbers describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi vs1010B R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 574 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ROM RAM usage output specification The ROM RAM usage output specification option is as follows VX Description format VX Interpretation when omitted ROM RAM usage is not output to the standard output Function The vx option outputs ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output Application Use the vx option to output ROM RAM usage after the linking Description Both the vx and vo options cannot be specified at the same time ROM RAM usage output example is shown below When the default memory area name is used x x Memory Area Information ROM xxxxxH byte s real data RAM xxxxxH byte s real data x x Memory Area Information in ROM ROM xxxxxH byte s x Memory Area Information in RAM RAM xxxxxH byte s R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 575 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE When the memory area name is defined in the memory directive x x Memory Area Information ROM xxxxxH byte s real data RAM xxxxxH byte s real data x Memor
258. cludes the data required to start up the variables information file generator Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 569 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE A option Aoption If the source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 source file name can be specified in the parameter file The source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all variables relocation options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file sample plk using an editor and then start up the variables information file generator parameter file main rel sub rel osample lmf psample map e tc tmp C gt v 78k0 fsapmle plk voinfo vfi 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the variables information file generator is started up an execution startup message appears on the dis play 78K0 Var Func Inf Vx xx xx xxx xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no errors resulting from the variables information file generation the variables information file gen erator outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD780xx
259. compilation are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 197 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile process Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat ing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last lin
260. create subcommand add subcommand add subcommand delete subcommand replace subcommand B 5 3 Method for manipulating 1 Librarian startup The following two methods can be used to start up the librarian a Startup from the command line X path name gt 1b78k0 Aoption X Current drive name path name Current folder name lb78k0 Command name of the librarian option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the librarian When specifying two or more create library options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the cre ate library options See B 5 4 Option for details about create library options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Example To specify 20 as the number of lines per page and specify 80 as the number of characters per line in a list file describe as C gt 1b78k0 1120 1lw80 When the librarian is started up an execution startup message appears on the display R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 530 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation After an asterisk specify a librarian subcommand create k0 lib add kO lib kOmain rel kOsub rel xexit When input of subcommands is finished processing o
261. cribed in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after link processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the link options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the link options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 217 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Object Convert Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the object converter categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Hex File 2 Hex File Filling 3 Symbol Table 4 Error List 5 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure A 8 Property Panel Object Convert Options Tab Property aq CA78
262. cription The range of number of characters that can be specified with the Iw option is 72 to 2046 80 characters in the case of display output An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of characters is omitted it is assumed that 132 has been specified However when an assemble list file is output to display it is assumed that 80 has been specified The specified number of characters does not include the terminator CR LF If the np option is specified the Iw option is invalid Cautions A control instruction WIDTH with the same function as the Iw option can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAWIDTH R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 415 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify 80 as the number of characters per line in an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm lw80 The contents of the assemble list file kKOmain prn is as follows Assemble list STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT NAME SAMPM PERRRRRERRAERERE RARER AREER REE R RAK RRR HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine GP REA RE RA RR Re Re Re AI Re AIR AIR ATR RI Re ere Ro PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH AT OFE20H 1 2 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620F
263. ct Help specification Outputs a help message on the display R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 513 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex file output specification The hex file output specification options are as follows o no o no Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted oinput file name hex The file type for extended space is H1 to H15 Function The o option specifies the output of a hex file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option specifies that no hex file is output Application Use the o option to specify the location to which a hex file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing an object conversion only to output a symbol table file This will shorten object conversion time Description If output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the hex file nput file name hex will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name hex will be output to the specified path If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the zf option is specified the file type is as follows dai Output file at boot area ROM program side Output file at program side other th
264. ct folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output file name Specify the load module file name to be output Use the extension Imf If the extension is omitted Imf is automatically added This corresponds to the o option of the linker The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName Imf has been specified Default ProjectName mf How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 6 Frequently Used Options for Object Convert The detailed information on frequently used options for object conversion are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for library projects Output hex file Select whether to output the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the hex file No no Does not output the hex file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 167 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Out
265. cted in the detailed information display change area Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed by selecting a tab In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section on each tab for the details of the display setting on the tab a When the Build tool node is selected on the Project Tree panel Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab Object Convert Options tab Create Library Options tab Variables Relocation Options tab Memory Bank Relocation Options tab b When a file is selected on the Project Tree panel Build Settings tab for C source file assembler source file link directive file variables information file function information file object file and library file Individual Compile Options tab for C source file Individual Assemble Options tab for assembler source fileN File Information tab Note This tab is also displayed when Yes is selected in the Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category from the Individual Compile Options tab R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 158 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c When the category node File node Build tool generated files node or Startup node is selected on the Project Tree panel Category Information tab Remark When multiple components are selecte
266. cters Variables information file Specify the variables information file name name This corresponds to the vo option of the variables information file generator Use the extension vfi If the extension is omitted vfi is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This property is not displayed when No in the Output variables information file property is selected Default ProjectName vfi How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 2 Margin The detailed information on the margin is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when No in the Output variables information file property in the Output File cate gory is selected R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 229 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Margin for saddr area Specify the Margin for saddr area After allocating variables to the saddr area via the variables information file generator an align ment error may occur during compilation or linking due to the relationship between processing order and alignment In this situation setting the margin in the saddr area can avoid this error This corresponds to the vs option of the variabl
267. ction information file property and the Function information file name property Remark If a function information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure 2 61 Output function information file Property 0 UldM odeN ame Function information file name Output folder for replacement information file Replacement information file name Output folder for object information file Object information file name Output folder for reference information file Reference information file name ProjectN ame fin BuildModeN ame ProjectName _replace txt BuildModeN ame ProjectName _objinfo txt BuildModeN ame ProjectName_tetinfo txt R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 49 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 62 Project Tree Panel After Generating Function Information File Project Tree BP sample Project F uPD78F0547_80 Microcontroller A CA78K0 Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool B E File s Startup c main c fini sample fin The settings of the output folder and file of the function information file are can be changed lt 1 gt Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for function information file property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box This prope
268. ction to specify a batch file example call a bat ing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after assemble process ing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items How to ch
269. ctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or R
270. d Default 132 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 132 decimal number R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 196 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of lines on 1 Specify the number of lines on 1 page of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross page reference list file If 0 is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default 66 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 65535 decimal number Tab width Specify the tab width of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the It option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default 8 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to 8 decimal number 16 Others Other detailed information on
271. d all other options are invalid To view the continuation of a displayed help message press the Enter key To quit the display press any key other than the Enter key and then press the Enter key Example of use Outputs a help message on the console C gt cc78k0 h R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 393 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 2 Assembler The assembler inputs source files written in the assembly language for 78KO microcontrollers converts them into machine language coding and outputs them as an object module file The assembler also outputs list files such as assemble list files and error list files If assembly errors occur an error message is output to the assemble list file and error list file to clarify the cause of the error Figure B 3 I O Files of Assembler Include file Assembler source file Parameter file Temporary file Assembler Assemble list file Object module file Error list file B 2 1 I O files The I O files of the assembler are shown below See 3 2 Assembler for details about output lists Table B 5 1 O Files of Assembler File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Assembler source file Source file written in assembly language for 78KO microcontrollers user created file Include file File referenced from assembler source files File written in assembly language for 78KO microcontrollers us
272. d Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab 2 6 2 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 41 Macro definition Property El Preprocess If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 42 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Enter the macro definition in Text in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 31 characters per line up to 30 line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 43 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 em include nath em include naths N A Macro definition 2 0 SYM 2 To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 36 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common O
273. d can be manipulated in 1 bit units R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 388 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cautions Since arguments and automatic variables are secured statically the contents of arguments and automatic variables of a recursive function may be damaged An error occurs when a recursive function calls itself However when a recursive function is called to where another function has been called no error occurs since the CC78KO cannot detect it If a function that is processed during interrupt servicing is called by means of interrupt servicing interrupt function or function called by interrupt function its argument automatic variable may be damaged Even if a function that is processed during interrupt servicing uses a common area saving returning to from a common area is not performed sm and ql5 cannot be specified at the same time Otherwise a warning for ql5 will be output and it will be processed as ql4 Example of use C gt cc78k0 cF051144 test c sm16 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 389 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Common object specification The common object specification option is as follows common common Description format Interpretation when omitted The object for the specified device is output Function The common option specifies the output of a
274. d on the Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the value of the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Undo Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property Cut While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copy Copies the selected characters of the property to the clip board Paste While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clip board Delete While editing the value of the property deletes the selected character string Select All While editing the value of the property Selects all the characters of the selected property Context menu Undo Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copies the selected characters of the property to the clip board While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clip board While editing the value of the property deletes the selected character string Select All While editing the value of the property selects all the characters of the selected property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to the default configuration of the pr
275. d subproject has Remark Order of the batch build follows the build order of the project which the subproject comes before the main project When more than one build mode is selected for a main project or a subproject all the selected build modes are built and then the next subproject or main project is built Figure A 35 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build made list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area Show the combination list of the names of the main project and the subproject which the currently opening project has and build modes and defined macros which they have a Project Show the main project and the subproject which the currently opening project has Select the combination of the main project and subproject to build and the build modes When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 295 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Build mode Show build modes which the main project and subp
276. d when No in the Execute list converter property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file during list converter execution No Does not output an error list file during list converter exe cution Output with assemble list info Select whether to output the assemble list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the ka option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the assemble list information into the assemble list file No nka Does not output the assemble list information into the assemble list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 263 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Output with symbol list APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to output the symbol list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the ks option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ks Outputs the symbol list information into t
277. d when the s option is specified the symbol table file nput file name sym will be output to the current folder If only the path name is specified in output file name input file name sym will be output to the specified path If both the s and ns options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid When a symbol having an ADDRESS or BIT attribute is defined for a segment allocated in extended space the object converter generates a separate symbol table file for each space All symbols which have NUMBER attribute are output to a symbol table file in normal space The file types of symbol table files generated for extended space are as follows Normal Space Extended Space REGULAR Example of use To output a symbol table file sample sym describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 lmf ssample sym R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 516 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object address order sort specification The object address order sort specification options are as follows r nr r nr Description format n Interpretation when omitted r Function The r option outputs sorting of hex format objects in order of address The nr option outputs hex format objects in the order in which they are stored in the load module file Application Use the nr option to specify when the hex format objects do not need to
278. ddition to the swapping the order of formula operations changes the execution order in an expression and performs address calculation without a carry while assuming that the size of the array does not exceed 256 bytes when a char short unsigned short int or unsigned int array that is allocated to the saddr area is refer enced with an unsigned char variable Does not specify swapping the order of formula operations o automatically assign automatic variables to a register and the saddr area s to the qv option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qv Assigns automatic variables to a register and the saddr area automatically No Does not specify assigning automatic variables to a regis ter and the saddr area automatically Assign register variables to register and saddr area Select whether to assign register variables to registers and assign them also to the saddr area This corresponds to the qr option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Automatic variables and norec argument qr Assigns auto variables and norec arguments to registers and assigns them also to the saddr area Yes Automatic and regis ter variables and norec argument qr2 Assigns auto variables register variab
279. defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble The detailed information on frequently used options for assembling are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 164 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Additional include paths APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with
280. der D device files describe as C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 y D device files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 432 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Symbol definition specification The symbol definition specification option is as follows d Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The d option defines symbols Application Use the d option to define symbols Description The value given to a symbol is binary octal decimal or hexadecimal If the value is omitted it is assumed that 1 has been specified Up to 30 symbols can be specified by using a comma as a delimiter Up to 31 characters can be described for a symbol name If duplicate names are specified the symbol specified last is valid Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for symbol names Symbols defined with d are used instead of EQU SET RESET An abort error occurs if a symbol name specified for d was also defined in the source Example of use To specify 2 as the symbol definition describe as C gt ra78k0 kOmain asm cF051144 dSYM 2 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 433 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Common object specification The common object specification option is as follows common common Description format
281. der and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 488 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 4 gt Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select No on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure B 13 Memory Model Category in Boot Area E Memory Model Output objects for flash Use prologue epiloque library No Next select Yes For boot area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure B 14 Use standard startup routine Property in Boot Area Use standard startup routine Yes For boot area es lt 5 gt Set link options Select the Link Options tab In the Device category if you select Yes zb on the Set flash start address property the Flash start address property is displayed Specify the start address of the flash memory area here The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFF Figure B 15 Device Category in Boot Area E Device Use on chip debug No Set flash start address lt 6 gt Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select No on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category d
282. des If you have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed If the options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Default Always latest version which was installed How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Always latest version Uses the latest version in the installed compiler which was installed packages Versions of the Uses the selected version in the compiler package installed compiler packages R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 169 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Latest compiler package version which was installed 10 Notes Display the version of the compiler package to be used when Always latest version which was installed is selected in the Using compiler package version property This setting is common to all the build modes This property is displayed only when Always latest version which was installed in the Using compiler package version property is selected Default The latest version of the installed compiler packages How to change Changes not allowed The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed 11 Others Add memos to the build
283. des the C source R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 132 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 8 9 User option byte The gb option sets the user option byte to address 80H to 84H The gb option takes priority when the user option byte is set in duplicate by the assembler source file and the gb option However if the user option byte is not set in either the initial value in the device file is set Moreover set the code segment as follows when you set the user option byte and the software break of QB MINI2 MINICUBE2 in the assembler source file If the code segment is not specified for the user option byte the intial value of the device file is set and then an error will occur OCN_SBR CSEG AT 07EH DB OFFH DB OFFH r OPT_SET OFT_BYTE Specify the code segment 30H Using the object converter Use the object converter by specifying the r address sort of object and u filling value specification options When using CubeSuite on the Property panel from the Object Convert Options tab configure the Hex File Filling property in the Hex File category These options are specified by default An abort error occurs if a ROM code is ordered work known as across processing or tape out when the addresses of the objects are not sorted Therefore be sure to specify r do not cancel the specification 10 Object filling value specification option u
284. disabled when multiple files are selected R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 154 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Selected Applica Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated tion application Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabl
285. e b Build Saves a set of the this product and the project by copying them in a folder The Build menu shows menu items for the build process and others Build Project Builds the project The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Rebuilds the project The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Rapid Build Update Dependencies Build active project Cleans the project The subproject is also cleaned when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Toggles the rapid build function between enabled default and disabled Updates the dependency of the file in the project to build The dependency of the file in the subproject to build is also updated when the subproject is added to the project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main projec
286. e MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName hex is set by default R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 41 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Set Create Library Options To set options for the librarian select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is displayed only for library projects Figure 2 50 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property E Output File Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName lib E List File Output list file No Others Output folder Specifies the folder to which the generated libraries are saved The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name Common Compile Op lA Variables R Memory Ba 2 9 1 Set the output of a library file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a library file is made with the Output File category Figure 2 51 Output File Category Z put File Output folde BuildiodeN ame Output file name lib ProjectName a 1 Set the output folder Sett
287. e Change the build mode to the newly created build mode see 2 15 7 Change the build mode 3 Change the setting of the build mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and change the build options and macro definition settings on the Property panel Remark Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode 2 15 7 Change the build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collectively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time 1 When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target project on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the build mode to be changed to on the Build mode property in the Build Mode category Figure 2 104 Build Mode Property Build mode DefaultBuild v 2 When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box opens R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 76 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2
288. e Description for details Description The optimization types that can be specified by the q option are shown below Optimization Type Process Description No specification It is assumed that the qcjlvw has been specified u Regards the char with no qualifier as a unsigned char to improve code efficiency c Performs calculations including char without sign extension Calculation Target Calculation Result unsigned char type variable and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type unsigned char type variable and signed char type variable unsigned char type signed char type variable and signed char type variable signed char type Constants from 128 to 255 and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type Constants from 128 to 127 and signed char type variable signed char type Constants from 0 to 255 with suffix U and signed char type unsigned char type variable R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 354 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Optimization Type APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Process Description Adds a register variable to a register and assigns it to the saddr area The scope assigning a register variable differs depending on the value of nas follows f nis omitted it is interpreted as n 2 When n 1 Assigns norec argument and auto variable to the saddr area When n 2 Assigns norec argument auto variable and register var
289. e are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before compile process ing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 198 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replace
290. e Files to which is appended the end of file name code size in common area the replacement information file Files that can be relocated to the Files to which is not appended the end of file name code size common area and bank area in the replacement information file Example Change the relocation destination of file file100 c from the common area to bank 3 and that of file file200 c from the common area to bank 4 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 53 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Before Change After Change filel00 c filel00 c filel00 filel00 file200 c file200 c file200 file200 lt 2 gt When the size of the vacant area is larger than that of the file that could not be relocated The memory bank relocation support tool keeps some margin by default common area 1000 bytes bank area 500 bytes during relocation process of files Consequently the size of the vacant area may be larger than that of the file that could not be relocated in the replacement information files In this case on the Property panel from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab in the Margin category set the margins of the common area and bank area to smaller values lt 3 gt When the total code size is larger than the ROM size Reinforce the optimization by the C compiler and review the source program to reduce the total code size Refer to the reference info
291. e Options Tab Property eat main asm Property E Debug nformaton Add debug information YYes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro definition 0 Output File Assemble List Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the q and qa options Build Settings 5 A File Information Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 260 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add debug information Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g and ga options of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Assembler Adds debug information assembler debugging sym debugging info bol information to the object module file being gener ng ga ated Yes Local symbols Adds debug information local symbol and assembler info and assembler debugging symbol information to the object module debugging info file being generated
292. e a link order specification file to change the display order on a file basis The procedures for performing this operation are described below a Generate a link order specification file Click the Export button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Export File dialog box Figure 2 95 Select Export File Dialog Box Select Export File Save in sample DefaultBuild My Recent Documents File name My Network Save as type Link order specification file mtls In the dialog box specify the file link order specification file that is output the list of the file names displayed in File in the Link Order dialog box Click the Save button to generate the link order specification file Caution Only the file names are output to the link order specification file If a file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display after installing the link order specification file b Edit the link order specification file Open the link order specification file with a editor and then change the description order of the file names The code example of the link order specification file is shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 70 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite Vx xx xx Link order specification file SampleProject XXXXXX XX XXXX fileOl rel file03 rel library02 1lib file02 rel library01 lib library03
293. e absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The library files are searched from the library path If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the linker The specified library path name is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional library paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 166 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder Specify the folder for saving the module that is generated If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the proje
294. e asm describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c a lf R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 378 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format 15 Interpretation when omitted No C sources in the include file will be added Function The li option adds the C source in the include file to the assembler source file with C source comments Description If the sa option is specified the li option is invalid Example of use To add the C source file in the include file to the assembler source file prime asm with C source comments describe as C gt cc78k0O cF051144 prime c sa li R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 379 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning output specification The warning output specification option is as follows W Description format w level Interpretation when omitted w1 Function The w option specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Application Use w option to specify whether or not a warning message is output to the console Detailed messages can also be output Description The levels of the warning message are as follows e No warning messages are output Normal warning messages are output 2 Detailed warning messages are output If the e or se option is specified the war
295. e displayed on the project tree see 2 15 3 Change the file build order of subprojects 2 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build rebuild or batch build then all these files are saved 2 Display execution results The execution results of the build output messages of the build tool are displayed in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build Rapid Build tab Figure 2 111 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Start build all Thursday April 2Z 2010 3 13 01 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt src main cl gt DefaultBuild sample luf gt DefaultBuild sample hex Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday April 22 Z010 3 13 03 Rapid Build Build Tool R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 80 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 112 Build Execution Results Rapid Build gt sre main c gt DefaultBuild sample lmf gt DefaultBuild sample hex EOF All Messages Remarks 1 The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed 2 When afile name or line number can be obtained from the output messages if you double click on the message you can jump to the relevant line in the file 3 If you press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error me
296. e global function defined in the file external symbol name Reference from different file Outputs the number of references to global functions number of locations calling them defined in separate files Reference from same file Outputs the number of references to global functions number of locations calling them defined in the same file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 126 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS This chapter introduces the lists of sample programs attached to CA78KO build tool in CubeSuite 4 1 C Compiler This section introduces the lists of sample programs attached to the C compiler 4 1 1 C source file define TRUE define FALSE define SIZE char mark SIZE 1 i 0 i lt SIZE i mark i TRUE i 0 i lt SIZE i if mark i prime i i 3 printf 76d prime count if count 8 0 putchar n for k i prime k lt SIZE k prime mark k FALSE printf n d primes found count printf char s int i putchar char c R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 127 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS CC78KO warning Expected function prototype CC78KO warning Expected function prototype CC78KO warning No return value CC78KO warning No return value
297. e ignored Therefore include files not required for build are mistaken as required files In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build if include else include endif define ifdef include else include endif include Ey 0 headerl header2 AAA AAA header3 header4 header5 Dependence zero Dependence Dependence Dependence Dependence relationship relationship relationship relationship relationship judged to exist to exist to exist to exist judged to exist During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite include statements described after comments are ignored Therefore include files required for build are mistaken as no required files In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build comment comment include 7 Generation of stack decision symbols specification option s header7 h include header6 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist Dependence relationship judged not to exist To secure a stack area specify the link option s during linking When using CubeSuite The setting is performed in Stack category from the Link Options tab on the Property panel When using CubeSuite the s option is automatically attached when the source file specification inclu
298. e link processing before link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before link processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text
299. e log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from the File menu and opens the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows Tab Name Description All Messages Shows all the messages by order of output Except while executing a rapid build Rapid Build Shows the message output from the build tool by running a rapid build Build Tool Shows the message output from the build tool by running build rebuild clean Caution Tab is not automatically switched when a new message is output on the non selected tab If this is the case 3 is added to the tab informing a new message is output File menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Save Output tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save log When this item is selected for the first time after launching the program the operation is equivalent to when selecting Save Output tab name As Save Output tab name As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the des ignated text file txt see c
300. e name CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Format Displays the memory space name Memory area name Displays the memory area name Memory area start address Displays the start address of the memory area It is displayed in hexadecimal format left padded with zeroes Memory area size Displays the size of the memory area It is displayed in hexadecimal format left padded with zeroes Output group Displays gap for areas where nothing is located Segment names output to load module file Displays the names of the segments output to the load module file Segment names read from object module file Input module name Displays the names of the segments read from the object module file Displays the module name of an input file that existed the input segment displayed in 7 If the module name exceeds 8 characters that name is output as it is Items 9 10 and 11 are output from column 39 on the next line Segment start address Displays the start address that output segments are allocated Output segment size Displays the size of the output segments Segment type and reallocation attributes Displays the segment type and the reallocation attributes Target device for this assembler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file 3 3 3 Device file version Public symbol list Displays the version number of the i
301. e static variables to saddr area 11 List File APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the static variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rs option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Size of char rs1 Allocates char and unsigned char types auto matic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int rs2 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer func tion pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long rs4 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Structure union array rsm Allocates structure union and array types auto matic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char and structure union array rsim Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rs2m Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer func tion pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types auto
302. e that contains a C source can be used as a C source file by revising the C source and deleting comments such as the list header To configure the error list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab In the List File category set the Output error list file property to Yes The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 95 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Error list file with C source 78KO C Compiler V 1 x xx Error List Command C file 5 prime c Err file 6 prime cer Para file 7 sf define TRUE define FALSE define SIZE mark SIZE 1 void main int i p prime p K y cont 0 3 CC78KO error for i 0 mark i for i 0 1E prime printf CC78K0 warning 11 Target chip 12 Device file Vx xx Compilation complete S Description Version number IJEOTLL i lt SIZE i lt SIZE mark i 9 WO745 13 1 error s Date 2 xx xxx xxxx Time 3 xx xx xx 4 cF051144 prime c se 4 count 10 Undeclared cont function main i TRUE i J has te 3 3 S6d prime 10 Expec
303. ea Load Module File Dialog Box Specify Boot Area Load Module File 1 Look in sample B DefaultBuild My Recent Documents Lg Desktop My Documents 39 My Computer 3 ile name a 4 hetter i Boot area load module file Imf Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Link Options tab Boot area load module file name in the Device category Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set in the caller of this dialog box exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 310 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the file name to set in the caller of the dialog box 4 Files of type area Specify the file type to set in the caller of the dialog box Boot area load module file Imf Boot area load module file default All files All the formats34 Function buttons Open Sets the specified file in the caller of the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box R20UT0783EJ01
304. ea ROM program linking for a product with built in flash memory add this option to split up the file into separate hex format files one for the boot area and one for other areas If the zf option is specified the output file type at the boot area ROM program side is hxb and the output file type at the side of the other programs is hxf Caution Do not specify this option for a device that does not have a flash memory area self programming function Example of use To split the hex file into separate files kKO hxb for the boot area and kO for other areas describe as C gt oc78k0 kO 1lmf zf R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 525 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format a Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the object convert options See these when executing the object converter Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C3 gt ocT78kO R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 526 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78K0 Object Converter V
305. ea after normal allocation c Determining priority The value calculated via the expression below taking into account the code reduction rate per byte deter mines the priority higher values mean higher priority Not number of references symbol size reference type S Note Reference type normal 1 changing from the normal area to the saddr area reduces code by 1 byte sreg 0 variables already allocated to the saddr area via the sreg specification are not targets for alloca tion R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 566 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Example Number of References Symbol Size Reference Type 10 times 2 bytes 10 2 1 5 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 6 times 1 byte 6 1 0 0 Variable sym3 is not eligible for allocation since it has already been allocated to the saddr area Remark The following variables are excluded from prioritization const variable const variables are not eligible for allocation to the saddr area because they are allocated to the internal ROM area However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments sreg variable Variables for which sreg has already been specified are not eligible for allocation However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments static variable static variables are not eligible for allocation whether they are inside a file or a function However that ref
306. ea and one for other areas 2 Hex File Filling The detailed information on hex file filling are displayed and the configuration can be changed Fill free memory space The unnecessary code may be written to address to which the hex format object is not output Specify whether to write a code in advance to prevent the program runaway by accessing the address This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property in the Hex File category is selected Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Writes a code in advance to address to which the hex format object is not output Does not write a code in advance to address to which the hex format object is not output Filling value Specify the values in hexadecimal number without Ox example FF to be written to the address for which no hex format object is output If this is blank it is assumed that FF has been specified This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No nu in the Fill free memory space property is selected Default FF How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to FF hexadecimal number R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 220 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Filling start address Spec
307. ea to Flash Area In boot area In flash area void void func_roml void func_flashl void void void func_rom2 void func_flash2 void func_flashl func_flash Execution jumps to the branch table of Branch table flash area br _func_flashl br _func_flash2 In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the flash area cannot be referenced from the boot area Therefore an external variable of the same name can be defined in both the boot area and flash area Each of these external variables is referenced only from the respective areas To call function in the boot area from the flash area When a function in the boot area is called from the flash area the contents of the boot area are not changed Therefore a function in the boot area can be directly called from the flash area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 484 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 10 From Flash Area to Boot Area In boot area In flash area void func_roml void void func_flashl void func_rom2 func_rom2 void void oA void func_flash2 void called from flash area A function in boot area can be directly Branch table br _func_flashl br _f
308. ecified at the same time ks is ignored If both the ks and nks options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the ks option is invalid Example of use To output a symbol list followed by an assemble list file into an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ks The contents of kKOmain prn is as follows Symbol Table List ATTR RTYP NAME ATTR CSEG CONVAH HDTSA SAMPM STASC R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 412 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kx nkx Description format nkx Interpretation when omitted nkx Function The kx option outputs a cross reference list followed by an assemble list into an assemble list file The nka option disables the kx option Application Use the kx option to output a cross reference list when you wish to know where and to what degree each symbol defined in a source file is referenced in the source or when you wish to know such information as which line of the assemble list a certain symbol is referenced on Description If the nka nks and nkx options are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If the ks and kx options are specified at the same time ks is ignored If both the kx and nkx options are specified at the same time the option specified las
309. ect conversion errors resulting from the object conversion the object converter outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Complete 0 error s and 0 warning s found If it detects an object conversion errors resulting from the object conversion the object converter outputs the number of errors and warnings to the display and returns control to the host operating system R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 510 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Target chip uPD78xxx Device file Vx xx Object Conversion Complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found If the object converter detects a fatal error during object conversion which makes it unable to continue object convert processing the object converter outputs a message to the display cancels object conversion and returns control to the host operating system Examples 1 A non existent load module file is specified C gt oc78k0 sample lmf 78KO Object Converter Vx xx xx XXX xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0O error F4006 File not found sample lmf Program aborted In the above example a non existent load module file is specified An error occurs and the object converter aborts the object conversion 2 A non existent object convert option is specified C gt oc78k0
310. ected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ki Performs output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the include directive into the preprocess list file Expand line preproces Select whether to perform output by expanding line directives into the preprocess list file sor directive This corresponds to the kl option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kl Performs output by expanding line directives into the pre process list file No Does not expand the line directive into the preprocess list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 255 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output line numbers Select whether to output line numbers into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kn option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kn Outputs line numbers into the preprocess list file No Does not output line numbers into the prepro
311. ed Path specified by environmental variable TMP Current path if no path is specified Function The t option specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Only a path can be specified as a path name The path name is cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when assembly is finished They are also deleted when assembly is aborted by pressing the keys CTRL C key The path in which the temporary file is created is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the t option 2 Path specified by environmental variable TMP when the t option is omitted 3 Current path when TMP is not set Caution When 1 or 2 is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt ra78k0O cF051144 kOmain asm tC tmp R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 428 of 585 Oct 0
312. ed The boldface display is canceled after building is executed o Highlight non build target file The file that is set as non build target is highlighted as shown in the example below Build target file Non build target file p Highlight the project that has been changed The file component that is added to the project and the property of the project component are changed the project name is followed by and is displayed in boldface The boldface is canceled when the project is saved The project that has not been changed UR sample Project The project that has been changed UR sample Project q Highlight the active project The active projects is underlined Non active project UR sample Project Active project sample Project R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 150 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE r Run the editor Open the file with the specific extension in the Editor panel When an external text editor is specified to use in the Option dialog box open the file with the external text editor Other files are opened with the application associated with the OS Caution The files with the extensions that are not associated with the OS are not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedure Double click the file Select the file and then select Open from the context menu Select the file and then press the Enter ke
313. ed in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt 1k78k0O kOmain rel kOsub rel tC tmp R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 469 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To output a temporary file to folder D temporary files describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 470 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device file search path specification The device file search path specification option is as follows es J y Description format ypath name Interpretation when omitted The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 Path registered in the device file installer 2 Path by which the Ik78k0 exe was started up 3 Current folder 4 The environmental variable PATH Function The y option reads a device file from the specified path Application Use the y option to specify a path where a device file exists Description An abort error occurs if something other than a path name is specified after the y option An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted after the y option The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the y option 2 Path registered in the device file insta
314. ed while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The removed file is not deleted from the file system in this operation Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clip board This menu is always disabled You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to another projects it is also renamed Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel 6 When the Build tool generated files node is selected Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 7 When the Startup node is selected Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 155 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Add File APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly b
315. efault Figure B 16 Split hex file Property in Boot Area E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeName Hex file name ProjectName hex R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 489 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 7 gt Runa build of the boot area project When you run a build of the boot area project a load module file is created A hex file is also created If a variables information file is generated it will be input into the compiler automatically and a build will be executed again Remark The variables information file generated in lt 3 gt Set variables relocation options is overwritten by running a build Figure B 17 Created Files for Boot Area Project Tree o boot Project FE uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool g File tl Build tool generated files im boot Inf map boot map hex boot hex Sym boot sym sX Startup c_ boot c dr link_boot dr vai boot vfi R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 490 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 8 gt Create the flash area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure B 18 Flash Area Project Project Tree 6 O38 EME fl
316. efault Execute Module Load Module File How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Execute Module Load The file to be generated during build is regarded Module File as the executable format load module file Execute Module Hex The file to be generated during build is regarded File as the executable format hex file Library The file to be generated during build is regarded as the library format library file Intermediate file output folder Specify the path to the folder to which intermediate files object module files rel cross refer ence list files xrf etc are to be output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 3 Frequently Used Options for Compile The detailed information on frequently used options for compilation are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ010
317. egarded as 1 The following warning is output for a int type bit field CC78KO warning W0787 Bit field type is not int If w2 is specified for the qc zp zc zi zl options the following warnings are output CC78KO0 warning W0029 QC option is not portable CC78KO warning W0031 ZP option is not portable CC78KO warning W0032 ZC option is not portable CC78KO warning W0036 ZI option is not portable CC78KO warning W0037 ZL option is not portable If w2 is specified for each pragma statement the following warning is output CC78KO warning W0849 pragma statement is not portable If w2 is specified for an___asm statement the following warning is output and the assemble output is performed CC78KO warning W0850 Asm statement is not portable If w2 is specified for an asm to endasm block the following error is output CC78KO error E0801 Undefined control etc Enables use of extend specifications for a static model Up to 6 arguments can be described in int size and up to 9 arguments can be described in char size Enables description of structure union return value for 1 2 byte structure union arguments and function return values The _ KREGxx utilization method is changed by the value of n If nis omitted it is interpreted as n 1 When n 1 Uses _ KREGxx as the shared area only for leaf function When n 2 Performs saving restoring KREGxx and allocates
318. egory 1 Build Mode Assemble Link Opti Variables Memory gt The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Select the build mode to be used during build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction DefaultBuild Builds with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Build mode that is added to the project other than DefaultBuild 2tENESAS Builds with the build mode that is added to the project other than DefaultBuild Page 161 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Output File Type and Path The detailed information on output file types and paths are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output file type Select the type of the file to be generated during build The file type set here is subject to debugging For other than library projects only Execute Module Load Module File and Execute Mod ule Hex File are displayed However only Execute Module Load Module File is displayed when Yes is selected in the Output hex file property in the Hex File category from the Object Convert Options tab For library projects only Library is displayed D
319. elect the relocation destination on the Select common bank area property in the Memory Bank category You can select any of items below No specification The memory bank relocation support tool automatically determines the optimum area and relocates the program code there Common area Relocates the program codes to the common area in build processing BankXX Relocates the program codes to bankXX in build processing This item is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 Figure 2 65 Select common bank area Property Select common bank area No specification e Runa build of the project Run a build of the project A function information file is generated It will be input into the compiler automatically and a rebuild will be executed again Remarks 1 The function information file in a is overwritten by running a build If the output folder or file name is changed the specified file will be generated again 2 Since objects are generated anew using the function information file the second build will be a rebuild If the build completes successfully a load module file is generated with the C source files relocated to the specified area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 52 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 66 Project Tree Panel After Generating Load Module File Project Tree EME sample Project F uPD78F0547_80 Microcon
320. elocation Support Tool 120 3 8 1 Function information file 120 3 8 2 Replacement information file 121 3 8 3 Object information file 124 3 8 4 Reference information file 126 CHAPTER 4 SAMPLE PROGRAMS 127 4 1 C Compiler 127 4 1 1 C source file 127 4 2 Assembler 129 4 2 1 kOmain asm 129 4 2 2 kOsub asm 130 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 131 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 139 A 1 Description 139 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 333 B 1 C Compiler 333 B 1 1 VO files 334 B 1 2 Functions 335 B 1 3 Method for manipulating 337 B 1 4 Option 341 B 2 Assembler 394 B 2 1 VO files 394 B 2 2 Functions 395 B 2 3 Method for manipulating 395 B 2 4 Option 398 B 3 Linker 438 B 3 1 I O files 438 B 3 2 Functions 439 B 3 3 Method for manipulating 439 B 3 4 Option 443 B 3 5 Boot flash relink function 482 B 4 Object Converter 495 B 4 1 W O files 495 B 4 2 Functions 496 B 4 3 Method for manipulating 509 B 4 4 Option 512 B 5 Librarian 528 B 5 1 VO files 528 B 5 2 Functions 529 B 5 3 Method for manipulating 530 B 5 4 Option 533 B 5 5 Subcommands 541 B 6 List Converter 551 B 6 1 W O files 552 B 6 2 Functions 552 B 6 3 Method for manipulating 555 B 6 4 Option 557 B 7 Variables Information File Generator 564 B 7 1 VO files 564 B 7 2 Functions 565 B 7 3 Variables
321. elow this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 8 When a category node is selected Add File Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the applica
322. em are counted and output to the file as comments Functions not defined in Functions not defined in the C source are not eligible for allocation e g definitions the C source in the assembler source or runtime libraries They are also not output to the output file Unreferenced functions They are also not output to the output file 4 Symbols not output to the variables information file The following symbols are not output to the variables information file Unreferenced symbols Symbols defined in libraries EXTERN symbols in other than load modules Symbols defined in assembler source The relocation attribute of the location segment is AT Interrupt handlers for RTOS tasks or RTOS Firm ROM functions Vector interrupt functions Symbols which type is T_NULL R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 568 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 7 4 Method for manipulating 1 Variables information file generator startup The following two methods can be used to start up the variables information file generator a Startup from the command line Current drive name path name Current folder name vf78k0 Command name of the variables information file generator option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the variables information file generator When specifying two or more variables relocation options separate the options with a blank spa
323. en the Link Order dialog box On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu The Link Order dialog box opens Figure 2 94 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order fileO1 rel file02 rel file03 rel library01 lib library02 lib library03 lib The names of the following files are listed in File in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Remark The default order is the order the files are added to the project Object module files created from newly added source files and newly added object module files are R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 69 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list 2 Change the file display order By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker Change the file display order by one of the following procedures Move the file name by using the Up and Down buttons Drag and drop the file name Use a link order specification file Remark You can us
324. en the file Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last is valid An abort error occurs if two or more f option is specified The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF Example of use Perform list conversion using a parameter file kO plv The contents of the parameter file kO plv is as follows parameter file kOmain 1k0 1mf ek0O elv Enter the following from the command line C gt lenv78k0 k0 plv R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 562 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format ed Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the list convert options See these when executing the list converter Description When the option is specified all
325. enesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for 78KO microcontrollers and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for 78KO microcontrollers integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual Conventions This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 3 BUILD
326. ependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header7 h R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 24 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File Set the type of the file to be output as the product of the build Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the file type on the Output file type property in the Output File Type and Path category Figure 2 17 Output file type Property 1 When Execute Module Load Module File is selected default A load module file is created The file set in the Output File category on the Link Options tab is the debug target 2 When Execute Module Hex File is selected A hex file is also created The file set in the Hex File category on the Object Convert Options tab is the debug target Caution For library projects this property is always Library and cannot be changed 2 4 1 Change the output file name The names of the load module file hex file and library file output by the build tool are set to the following names by default Load module file name ProjectName Imf Hex file name ProjectName hex Library file name ProjectName lib Remark ProjectName is a placeholder It is replaced with the project name The method to change these file names is shown below 1 When changing the load module fi
327. er This property is not displayed when No in the Generate stack solution symbol property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 256 characters 8 Link List The detailed information on the link list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output link list file Select whether to output the link list file This corresponds to the p option of the linker Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs a link list file No np Does not output the link list file Output with link directive Select whether to output link directive information to the link list file info This corresponds to the kd option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs link directive information to the link list file No nkd Does not output link directive information to the link list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 214 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output with local symbol Select whether to output local symbol list information to the link list file list This correspond
328. er created file Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed programs user created file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 394 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE File Name Explanation Default File Type Output files Object module file Binary file containing relocation information and symbol information regarding machine language information and machine language location addresses Assemble list file File containing assembly information such as assemble lists and cross reference lists Error list file File containing error information generated during assembling I O files Temporary file File created automatically by the assembler for RAXxxxxx n assembly purposes n 1 to 4 Temporary files are deleted when assembling ends B 2 2 Functions 1 Conversion of assembly language into machine language The assembler reads source files and converts them from assembly language files into machine language files B 2 3 Method for manipulating 1 Assembler startup The following two methods can be used to start up the assembler a Startup from the command line X path name gt ra78k0 Aoption source file name Aoption X Current drive name path name Current folder name ra78k0 Command name of the assembler option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the assembler When specifying two or
329. ered path to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered path to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 286 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Figure A 31 System Include Path Order Dialog Box System Include Path Order The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cate gory and System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Compile Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path list display area This area displays the list of the system include paths specified for the compiler a Path This area displays the list of the system include paths in the specified sequence for the compiler The def
330. erences to them are counted and output to the file as comments Variables not defined in the C source Variables not defined in the C source are not eligible for allocation e g definitions in the assembler source or runtime libraries They are also not output to the output file Variables defined in the boot area and refer enced by the flash area Variables defined in the boot area and referenced by the flash area are not eligible for allocation However that references to them are counted and output to the file as comments Unreferenced variables d Alignment considerations They are also not output to the output file The following variables can be allocated to odd addresses Variables with a size of 1 byte char unsigned char enumeration type structure and union Arrays of variables with a size of 1 byte char unsigned char Arrays of variables of enumeration type structure and union with a size of 1 byte and having 1 element 3 Function information a Reference counting The variables information file generator counts the number of times reference symbols are referenced during relocation resolution However all functions are excluded from allocation specification targets and they are output as a comment b Vacant area detection The variables functions information file generator detects the start address and size of vacant area in the callt area after normal allocation
331. ers Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option Assemble Link Opti Variables Memory R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 340 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 B 1 4 Option 1 Types APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The compile options are detailed instructions for the operation of the C compiler The types and explanations for compile options are shown below Classification Device type specification Table B 3 Compile Options Description Specifies the type of the target device Object module file creation specification Specifies the output of an object module file Memory assignment specification Specifies how to assign a program to the memory Specifies to assign an external variable external static variable automatically to the saddr area Specifies to assign a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area Specifies to assign an static auto variable automatically to the saddr area Optimization specification Specifies optimization types Debug information output specification Specifies the output of the C source level debugging information Preprocess list file creation specification Specifies the output of the preprocess list file
332. ery time you perform object conversion describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last is valid The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF An abort error occurs if two or more f option is specified Example of use Perform object conversion using a parameter file 78k0 poc The contents of the parameter file 78k0 poc is as follows parameter file kO 1lmf osample hex ssample sym r Enter the following from the command line C gt oc78k0 kO 1lmf f 78k0 poc R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 521 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex format specification The hex format specification options are as follows ki kie kt km kme ki kie kt km kme Description format Interpretation when omitted kie Function
333. es Correct the C source files so that definitions do not overlap If there are an descriptions relating to nonexistent files left in the function information file edit this file to remove the descriptions of nonexistent files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 137 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS 16 Device file search order of the C compiler a Paths specified via y option b cc78k0 exe startup path dev c Path where cc78k0 exe was started d The current folder e Paths specified by the PATH environment variable cc78k0 exe does not reference registry information relating to devices files For this reason device files not located in executable format startup path dev cannot be found Executable format startup path dev is the path where the device file was installed during the installation of the C compiler R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 138 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This appendix explains windows panels dialog boxes used in build process A 1 Description The following lists the windows panels dialog boxes used in build process Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description List of Windows Panels Dialog Boxes Main window This is the first window to be open when CubeSuite is launched Project Tree panel This panel is used to
334. es char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area No 2tENESAS Does not allocate automatic variables to the saddr area Page 192 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Allocate static variables to saddr area APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the static variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rs option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Size of char rs1 Allocates char and unsigned char types auto matic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int rs2 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long rs4 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers types auto
335. es information file generator Default 0 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to 192 decimal number 3 ROM RAM Amount Information The detailed information on the ROM RAM usage is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output ROM RAM usage Select whether to display the ROM RAM usage to the Output panel This corresponds to the vx option of the variables information file generator Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the ROM RAM usage No Does not output the ROM RAM usage R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 230 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Bank Relocation Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the memory bank relocation support tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Margin 3 Message Caution This tab is displayed only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcon troller Figure A 11 Property Panel Memory Bank Relocation Options Tab Property A CA78KO Property E Output File Use memory bank relocation support tool No Use memory bank relocation support tool Selects whether to execute the memory bank relocation support tool afrer build processing If Yes is selected in this field the following properties changes aut
336. es with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before build processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 172 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after build processing after build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the inst
337. evices with a memory bank installed B 1 2 Functions 1 Optimization method Optimization is performed to create efficient object module files in the CA78KO Error list files without C source corresponding to all of the source files output by specifying the e option The supported optimization methods are shown below Syntax Analyzer Table B 2 Optimization Methods Contents Execute constant computations during compilation Example True or false decision based on partial evaluation of a logical expression all b gt a ee b gt 1 Offset calculations of pointers arrays etc Calculate the offsets during compilation Code Generator R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Register management Effectively use unused registers Use the special instructions of the target CPU a a 1 gt Use the inc instruction Use the move instruction to substitute array elements Use short instructions If there is an instruction with the same operation use the instruction with fewer bytes mov a 0 or xor a a differs depending on the device Change long jump instructions to short jump instructions 2tENESAS The intermediate code that was output is reprocessed Page 335 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Contents Example Optimizer Delete common partial expressions Move outside an instruction loop Delete un
338. f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options and input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the CA78KO will not fit on the command line because two or more options are input while compiling When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform compilation describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description Nesting of parameter files is not permitted The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space and a tab Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last takes precedence The characters following or are all assumed to be comments before the end of the line Example of use Contents of the parameter file prime pcc parameter file prime c cF051144 aprime asm e x Perform compilation using a parameter file prime pcc C gt cc78k0 fprime pcc R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 382 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation folder specification The temporary file creat
339. f callee functions Additional margin value mandatorily added to frame size Figure 2 125 List Display Area Total Stack Size Additional Margin 4 main 576 D proj STK E stabi 4 4 D proj STK W subi 572 424 D iprojiSTk WB sub11 4 4 D proj STK E subiz amp 8 4 D proj STk E sample c 4 4 D proj STK subi4 4 4 D iprojiSTk R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 89 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If you make changes to the project that will affect the total stack size while the stack usage tracer is running e g you edit the files in your project so that the total stack size changes then after rebuilding the project click el to update the display 2 17 4 Check unknown functions You can check functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack information in the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box under Unknown Functions Figure 2 126 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions sub11 4 4 sub1 28 8 4 System Library Functions a Remark Functions will appear under Unknown Functions in the following circumstances The frame size could not be measured A recursive function for which the recursion depth has not been set in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The function includes indirect functi
340. f each subcommand begins When processing of one subcommand is complete appears again on the screen and the librarian waits for the next subcommand to be entered The librarian repeats this operation until the exit subcommand is entered Specify subcommand Subcommand processing Specify subcommand Subcommand processing Specify exit subcommand Exit librarian Up to 128 characters can be specified per line If all the required operand data will not fit on 1 line use amp to continue specification on the next line Specification can be continued up to 15 lines b Startup from a subcommand file A subcommand file is a file in which librarian subcommands are stored If a subcommand file is not specified when the librarian is started up multiple subcommands must be specified after appears By creating a subcommand file these multiple supbcommand files can all be processed at once A subcommand file can also be used when the same subcommand is specified repeatedly each time library formation is performed When using a subcommand file describe lt before the file name Start up the librarian from a subcommand file as follows X gt 1b78k0A lt subcommand file name Aoption lt Be sure to add this when specifying a subcommand file subcommand file name File in which subcommands are stored Remark Create the subcommand file using an editor The rules for writing the contents
341. f updated files 82 2 16 2 Runa build of all files 83 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations 83 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes 84 2 16 5 Compile assemble individual files 85 2 16 6 Stop running a build 86 2 16 7 Save the build results to a file 86 2 16 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files 87 2 17 Estimate the Stack Capacity 88 2 17 1 Starting and exiting 88 2 17 2 Check the call relationship 89 2 17 3 Check the stack information 89 2 17 4 Check unknown functions 90 2 17 5 Change the frame size 90 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 92 3 1 C Compiler 92 3 1 1 Assembler source file 92 3 1 2 Error list file 95 3 1 3 Preprocess list file 98 3 1 4 Cross reference list file 99 3 2 Assembler 102 3 2 1 Assemble list file headers 102 3 2 2 Assemble list 103 3 2 3 Symbol list 105 3 2 4 Cross reference list 106 3 2 5 Error list 107 3 3 Linker 109 3 3 1 Link list file headers 109 3 3 2 Map list 110 3 3 3 Public symbol list 111 3 3 4 Local symbol list 112 3 3 5 Error list 113 3 4 Object Converter 114 3 4 1 Error list 114 3 5 Librarian 115 3 5 1 Library information output list 115 3 6 List Converter 116 3 6 1 Absolute assemble list 116 3 6 2 Error list 116 3 7 Variables Information File Generator 117 3 7 1 Variables information file 117 3 8 Memory Bank R
342. file Select Import File dialog box This dialog box is used to select a link order specification file to import to the Link Order dialog box Select Export File dialog box This dialog box is used to generate a link order specification file Stack Usage Tracer window This is the first window to be open when the stack usage tracer is launched Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists This dialog box is used to display a list of functions for which the stack dialog box usage tracer could not obtain stack information functions for which information was changed intentionally and functions for which the stack usage tracer forcibly set an additional margin Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to change the information for the selected function Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing stack size specification file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 140 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the first window to be open when CubeSuite is launched This window is used to control the user program execution and open panels for the build process Figure A 1 Main Window sample CubeSuite Project Tree 1 fe Edt view project Buld Debug Tool Window Help 2 DA BAT Eh AO a ORORO TESA a R sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool Build T
343. files Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box opens R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2011 Page 84 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 117 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Project Build mode Defined macros DefaultBuild C sample BuildMode2 sub DefaultBuild C sub BuildMode2 In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run 2 16 5 Compile assemble individual files You can just compile or assemble for each source file added to the project 1 When compiling a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Compile from the context menu Figure 2 118 Compile Item File ER Startup c_ main Compile en iS B i Es Open with Internal Edi
344. files node Remark See B 4 1 O files for details about input and output files of the object converter 3 4 1 Error list Error messages output when the object converter is started up are stored in an error list The output format is same as error list output by the linker R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 114 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 5 Librarian The librarian outputs the following list Output List File Name Output List Name List file Library information output list To configure the list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Create Library Options tab Select Yes on the Output list file property in the Error List category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node Remark See B 5 1 O files for details about input and output files of the librarian 3 5 1 Library information output list The library information output list outputs data on the modules in a library file 78KO librarian 1 Vx xx Date 2 xx XXX XXXX Page 3 xXxXxx LIB FILE NAME 4 k0 1lib 5 xx xxx XXE 6 0001 7 kOmain rel 8 xx XXX xxxx NUMBER OF PUBLIC SYMBOLS 6 0002 7
345. fine directive into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the define directive into the preprocess list file Expand if ifdef ifndef Select whether to perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef directives into the pre preprocessor directive process list file This corresponds to the kf option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Yes kf How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kf Performs output by expanding if ifdef and ifndef direc tives into the preprocess list file No Does not perform output by expanding if ifdef and ifn def directives into the preprocess list file Expand include prepro Select whether to perform output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file cessor directive This corresponds to the ki option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes ki Performs output by expanding include directives into the preprocess list file No Does not expand the include directive into the preprocess list file Expand line preproces Select whether to perform output by expanding line directives into the preprocess list file sor directive This co
346. folder property If PAGEWIDTH is 80 the result is as follows 78K0 C Compiler V 1 x xx Preprocess List Date 2 xx XXX XXXX Page 3 XxXxx Command 4 cF051144 prime c p lw80 In file 5 prime c PPL file 6 prime ppl Para file 7 xy 9 define TRUE 9 define FALSE 9 define SIZE mark SIZE 1 10 Target chip uPD78F0511_44 11 Device file Vx xx 7 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 98 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Description Version number CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Format Displayed in x yz format Date System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Number of pages Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Command line Outputs the command line contents following CC78KO Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character C source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Preprocess list file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted ppl is attached Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Parameter file contents Line number
347. formation file ables information file This corresponds to the vo option of the variables information file generator If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No in the Output variables information file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 chara
348. from the drop down list Restriction Yes 0 byte common area sm0 Specifies 0 byte as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 1 byte common area sm1 Specifies 1 byte as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 2 bytes common area sm2 Specifies 2 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 3 bytes common area sm3 Specifies 3 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 4 bytes common area sm4 Specifies 4 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 5 bytes common area sm5 Specifies 5 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 6 bytes common area sm6 Specifies 6 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 7 bytes common area sm7 Specifies 7 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 8 bytes common area sm8 Specifies 8 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 9 bytes common area sm9 Specifies 9 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 10 bytes common area sm10 Specifies 10 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 11 bytes common area sm11 Specifies 11 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 12 bytes common area sm12 Specifies 12 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 13 bytes common area sm13 Specifies 13 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 14
349. function implements main function 79 gt 80 Parameters 81 we None 82 gt 8 Returns B4 we None 85 686 a a m i a eee 87 88 void main void 89 gi 90 Start user code Do not edit comment generati 91 92 int local_a local_b local_c 93 int result 94 unsigned long i lt gt R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 271 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool Figure A 24 Output Panel Start build all Thursday April 2Z 2010 3 13 01 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt sre main c gt DefaultBuild sample 1mf 1 __ gt DefaultBuild sample hex Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Failed 0 Projects Thursday April 22 2010 3 13 03 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Output panel Edit menu only available for the Output panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area Display messages and the search results output from each tool In build result search result batch search display a new message is displayed deleting the previous message every time build search is done but not the All Messages tab
350. function information file object file and library file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build 2 Memory Bank Figure A 12 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting C Source File Property Set as build target Set individual compile option Select common bank area No specification Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information Figure A 13 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Assembler Source File Property Set as build target Set individual assemble option File ype Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information Figure A 14 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Link Directive File Property dir link dir Property E Build Set as build target File type Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 237 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 15 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Variables Information File Property veil sample vfi Property E Build Set as build target Yes File type Variable information Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Figure A 16 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Function Information File Property fini sample fin P
351. functions information 565 B 7 4 Method for manipulating 569 B 7 5 Option 572 APPENDIX C INDEX 577 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL This chapter explains the product overview of the build tool 1 1 Overview The build tool is comprised of components provided by this product It enables various types of information to be con figured via a GUI tool enabling you to generate load module file hex file or library file from your source files according to your objectives The build tool process flow is shown below Figure 1 1 Build Tool Process Flow csouce tes eN w Include file w a w Assembler source files Assemble list file a Variables information file Memory bank support tool Library file Load module file Object converter Hex file Absolute assemble list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 9 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Features The features of the build tools are shown below Optimization function You can generate efficient object module files by performing optimizations such as prioritizing code size or execu tion speed when compiling ROMization function ROMiczation is processing that locates in ROM the initial values for external variables that have initial values and copies them to RAM when the system is executed The CA78KO provides a program start
352. g this option is handled in a similar way to the sreg declared function argument and auto variable Cautions If the sm option is specified the rk option is valid If the sm option is not specified the compiler outputs the warning message and the rk option is ignored Example of use To assign a char or unsigned char type function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is an sreg declaration or not describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 351 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE C gt cc78k0 cF051144 rkl R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 352 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rs nr Description format Interpretation when omitted nr Function The rs option specifies to assign an static auto variable automatically to the saddr area The nr option disables the rs option Application Use the rs option to assign a static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared Description Variables to be assigned change depending on the value of n and the specification of m Specification of n m Variable Types to Be Assigned to saddr Area When n 1 char unsigned char When n 2 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned in
353. ge 537 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To output a temporary file to folder D temporary files describe as C gt 1b78k0 t D temporary files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 538 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format ed Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the subcommands See these when executing the librarian Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as C gt 1b78k0 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 539 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation Subcommands create add delete replace pick list help exit subcommand option masterLBF option transaction option transaction OMFname LBFname modulename lt create create masterLBF transaction lt add gt add masterLBF transaction lt delete gt delete masterLBF modulename lt replace gt replace masterLBF transact
354. ginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 100 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format Include file Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file n is a number starting with 1 that indicates the include file number Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning at column 13 on the next line This line is not output when there is no include file Symbol attribute Displays the symbol attributes An external variable is displayed as EXTERN an external static variable as EXSTC an internal static variable as INSTC an auto variable as AUTOnn a register variable as REGnn where nn is the scope value a numerical value that begins with 1 an external typedef declaration as EXTYP an internal typedef declaration as INTYP a label as LABEL a structure or union tag as TAG a member as MEMBER and a function parameter as PARAM Symbol qualifier attributes Displays the symbol qualifier attributes left aligned A const variable is displayed as CONST a volatile variable as VLT a callt function as CALLT a callf function as CALLF a noauto function as NOAUTO a norec function as NOREC an sreg bit variable as SREG an sfr variable as RWSFR a read only sfr variable as ROSFR a write only sfr variable as WOSFR
355. gram Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite ProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the project folder lt gt Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cat egory Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category and Additional library paths in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Link Options tab Additional include paths in the Library category From the Individual Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 284 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Path edit area Edit or add the path a Path One path per one line Edit or adds the path by directly entering the path Path can be designated in multiple lines Design
356. haracters in one line By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 279 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the maxi erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be mum number of restriction in the property that called specified this dialog box b Button The placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed in a popup ascending order If a placeholder is selected the string will be surrounded with percentage signs and displayed in String Caution This button is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered characters to the property that called this dialog box then closes the dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the property that called this di
357. has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above a Context menu Select a function in this area and then right click with the mouse The context menu described below appears Adjust Stack Size Sort List by 5 Message display area Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Changes the function display order in the list display area Function Name Sort by function name Icon Type Sort by icon display priority High J to Low HH Stack Size Sort by total stack size Frame Size Sort by frame size Additional Margin Sort by additional margin File Name Sort by file name Display operation logs of the stack usage tracer R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 323 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Caution Assembly files The stack usage tracer calculates total stack size by collecting information from the assembly files output by the C compiler as intermediate files with debugging information added As a consequence in order to obtain stack information at the function level using the stack usage tracer it is necessary to configure the compiler options to output Assembly files with debugging information Timing of static analysis The stack usage tracer performs static analysis upon sta
358. he assemble list file No Does not output the symbol list information into the assem ble list file Output with cross refer ence list Select whether to output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file This corresponds to the kx option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kx Outputs the cross reference list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file Output with form feed control code Select whether to output a form feed code into list files This corresponds to the lf option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lf Outputs a form feed code into the list file No Does not output a form feed code into the list file Number of characters in 1 line Specify the number of characters in each line of the list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected
359. he auxiliary information files only c Set the margin of the relocation destination Set the margin for the common area or bank area to which the function information file will be relocated when it is generated Set the margin in the Margin category Figure 2 64 Margin Category Margin for bankO0 area Margin for bank01 area Margin for bank02 area Margin for bankO3 area Margin for bank04 area Margin for bankO5 area Set the margin for the common area on the Margin for common area property in decimal numbers The range that can be specified for the value is 65536 to 65536 default 1000 Set the margin for the bank area on the Margin for bank XX area property in decimal numbers The range that can be specified for the value is 65536 to 65536 default 500 This property is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 51 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If a positive value is specified on the above property each area is relocated and considered to become small by the specified value as a margin If a negative value is specified each area is relocated and considered to become large by the specified value as a margin d Set the relocation destination for each file Specify the relocation destination for each C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the project tree S
360. he extension is omitted lib is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Default ProjectName lib How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters The detailed information on list files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output list file Select whether to output the list file with the librarian This corresponds to the o option of the list subcommand Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the list file information on modules in the library file No Does not output the list file information on modules in the library file Output with public sym bol information Select whether to output public symbol information to the list file with the librarian This corresponds to the public option of the list subcommand This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs public symbol information to the list file No Does not output public symbol information to the list file Output with form feed control code Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list fi
361. he static model extension Use prologue epilogue Select whether to use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function library This corresponds to the zd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zd Uses a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function Does not use a library for the prologue epilogue rou tines of a function 8 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file name Specify the name of the object file generated after compilation If this field is blank the file is saved under the file name with extension c replaced by rel This corresponds to the o option of the compiler Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Output common object file for various devices Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices This corresponds to the common option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes common Outputs the objects common to the v
362. he text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 65535 decimal number Tab width Specify the tab width of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the It option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to 8 decimal number 12 Others Other detailed information on compilation are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 257 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed before compile process ing Specify the command to be executed before compile processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder Main
363. hich the relocation destination is specified in the Property panel Total code size Outputs the total code size of the files to be relocated to the common area Vacant area size Outputs the size of the vacant area in the common area The code size output to the replacement information file does not include libraries and the like For this reason the vacant area may be less than the size of the common area minus the code size If the size of the vacant area is negative it indicates that the amount of the area is lacking Bank area information start R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Outputs the relocation information of the bank XX area XX 00 to 15 7tENESAS Page 123 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format File name code size Outputs the file name and code size allocated to the bunk area A file to which is appended the end of the file name is one for which the relocation destination is specified in the Property panel Total code size Outputs the total code size of the files to be relocated to the bank area Vacant area size Outputs the size of the vacant area in the bank area The code size output to the replacement information file does not include libraries and the like For this reason the vacant area may be less than the size of the bunk area minus the code size If the size of the vacant area is negative it indicates that the amount of
364. his corresponds to the qw option of the compiler Default Yes Swap order of formula operations qw1 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Swap order of for mula operations qw1 Swaps the order of formula operations Yes for speed assumed SADDR array is in 256 bytes qw2 In addition to the swapping the order of formula operations changes the execution order in an expression and performs address calculation without a carry while assuming that the size of the array does not exceed 256 bytes when a char short unsigned short int or unsigned int array that is allocated to the saddr area is refer enced with an unsigned char variable No Does not specify swapping the order of formula operations Assign automatic vari ables to register or saddr area Select whether to automatically assign automatic variables to a register and the saddr area This corresponds to the qv option of the compiler Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Assigns automatic variables to a register and the saddr area automatically Does not specify assigning automatic variables to a regis Assign register variables to register and saddr area ter and the saddr area automatically Select whether to assign register variables to registers and assign them also to the saddr area This correspond s to the qr option of the compiler
365. his file Change the file name in the project tree panel Build Settings Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file are displayed and the configuration can be changed File name Display the file name Change the file name on the Project Tree panel Default File name How to change Changes not allowed Relative path Display the relative path of the file from the project folder Default The relative path of the file from the project folder How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Display the absolute path of the file Default The absolute path of the file How to change Changes not allowed Save with absolute path Select whether to save the file location with the absolute path Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Saves the file location with the absolute path No Saves the file location with the relative path R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 268 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Last update Display the time APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE and date on which this file was changed last Default File updated time and date How to change Changes not allowed Writable 2 Notes Select whether t o enable writing to the file Default Yes when the file is write enabled No when the file is not write enabled
366. hree of the options in the horizontal axis are specified at the same time the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example If the nka nks and nkx options are specified at the same time the p option is invalid C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm p nka nks nkx Blank area If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is valid As with the o no options if two options for which n can be added to the beginning of the option name are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example The no option is specified after the o option so the o option is invalid and the no option is valid C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm o no Options not described in Table B 7 Precedence of Assemble Options are not particularly affected by other options However if the help specification option is specified all of other option specifications become invalid R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 400 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device type specification The device type specification option is as follows Description format cdevice type Interpretation when omitted Cannot be omitted Function The c option specifies the target device for performing assembly Application Be sure to specify the c option The assembler performs assembly for the target device and generates an object code
367. i Variables B 4 4 Option 1 Types The object convert options are detailed instructions for the operation of the object converter The types and explanations for object convert options are shown below Table B 24 Object Convert Options Classification Description Hex file output specification Specifies the format of a hex file Symbol table file output Specifies the output of a symbol table file specification Object address order sort Sorts hex format objects in order of address specification Object filling value specification Outputs a specified filling value as an object code for an address area to which no hex format object has been output Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 512 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Classification Description Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Hex format specification i Intel standard hex format Intel expanded hex format Extended tektronix format Motorola S type format standard address Motorola S type format 32 bit address Device file search path Reads a device file from a specified path specification File separate output Splits the file into separate files one for the boot area and one for specification for built in flash other areas memory produ
368. iable to the saddr area Optimizes branch instructions Assigns the optimization options automatically according to the precedence of speed code size The assigned option differs depending on the value of nas follows When nis omitted it is interpreted as n 2 When n 1 Speed precedence It is assumed that the qcjvw option has been specified When n 2 Default It is assumed that the qcjlvw option has been specified When n 3 Code size precedence It is assumed that the qcjl4vw option has been specified When n 4 Code size precedence It is assumed that the qcjl5vw option has been specified Outputs the object using HL B This type is valid only when the sm option is specified Outputs the object using HL bit Designs for the effective use of the registers by changing the execution order in an expression and outputs an efficient code i e changing the execution order of the right subexpression and left subexpression in an expression with two terms Consequently the results of execution may differ depending on whether this option is added this is however within the scope of the ANSI C specification because it does not define evaluation order with the exception of some operators According to the ANSI C standard this is not a problem in a properly written source The scope differs depending on the value of nas follows If nis omitted it is interpreted as n 1 When n 1 Changes the
369. iction Up to 259 characters Force linking against error 4 Library Select whether to forcibly generate the load module file when an error occurs during linking This corresponds to the j option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Forcibly generates the load module file when an error occurs during linking Does not generate the load module file when an error occurs during linking The detailed information on the library are displayed and the configuration can be changed Using libraries Specify the library file name lib to be used other than the standard libraries Add one file in one line The library files are searched from the library path This corresponds to the b option of the linker The specified library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified If the number of items specified in the System libraries property and in the Using standard libraries property in the Library category on the Compile Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution System libraries
370. iction Yes rb Assigns the member of the bit field structure from MSB No Assigns the member of the bit field structure from LSB Pack structure members Select whether to prohibit from inserting the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address This corresponds to the rc option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rc Prohibits from inserting the align data to allocate the mem bers consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address Inserts the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 252 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Allocate automatic vari ables to saddr area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the automatic variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rk option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Size of char rk1 Allocates char and unsigned char types auto matic variables to
371. ider 33 2 6 Set Assemble Options 34 2 6 1 Add an include path 34 2 6 2 Seta macro definition 36 2 7 Set Link Options 38 2 7 1 Adda user library 38 2 8 Set Object Convert Options 40 2 8 1 Set the output of a hex file 40 2 9 Set Create Library Options 42 2 9 1 Set the output of a library file 42 2 10 Set Variables Relocation Options 43 2 10 1 Efficiently allocate variables 43 2 10 2 Display ROM RAM usage 47 2 11 Set Memory Bank Relocation Options 48 2 11 1 Relocate C source files to the optimum area 48 2 12 Set Build Options Separately 56 2 12 1 Set build options at the project level 56 2 12 2 Set build options at the file level 56 2 13 Prepare for Using On chip Debugger 59 2 14 Prepare for Implementing Boot flash Relink Function 61 2 14 1 Prepare the build target files 61 2 14 2 Set the boot area project 61 2 14 3 Set the flash area project 64 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations 68 2 15 1 Import the build options of other project 68 2 15 2 Set the link order of files 69 2 15 3 Change the file build order of subprojects 72 2 15 4 Display a list of build options 73 2 15 5 Change the file build target project 73 2 15 6 Adda build mode 75 2 15 7 Change the build mode 76 2 15 8 Delete a build mode 78 2 15 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project 79 2 16 Runa Build 80 2 16 1 Runa build o
372. ified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create an error list file sample elv describe as C gt lcnv78k0 kOmain prn esample elv The contents of the error list file sample elv is as follows RA78K0 warning W6701 Load module file is older than object module file kOmain 1mf kOmain rel Passl start RA78K0 error F6105 Segment name is not found is load module file DATA R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 561 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options or input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the list converter will not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform list conversion describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will add plv to the file name as the file type and op
373. ify the start address for filling in hexadecimal without 0x example 100A0 If this is blank it is assumed that 0 has been specified If this property is specified configure the Filling size byte property If the Filling size byte property is blank the specification of this property is invalid This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No nu in the Fill free memory space property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to largest address of the program space hexadecimal Filling size byte 3 Symbol Table Specify the size from the start address for filling in hexadecimal without 0x example F00 If the result of changing the Filling start address property is outside the range that can be specified for this property then this property will be blank This corresponds to the u option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No nu in the Fill free memory space property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 1 to largest address of the program space filling start address 0x1 hexadecimal However the compiler s bounds checking will be stricter As a result the actual upper bound during a build may be smaller than this value causing a error during linking The detailed
374. iguring the options and environment variables When using CubeSuite avoid using temporary files in a network environment 3 Kanji code 2 byte code classification To use a source containing EUC code set the environmental variable LANG78K to euc or specify the ze option When using CubeSuite on the Property panel configure the Kanji character code of source property in Extension category from the Compile Options tab for C source file or the Kanji character code of source files property in the Others category from the Assemble Options tab for assembler source If the specified Japanese character encoding scheme differs from the encoding scheme used in the source an error might occur during building or some of the code might be incorrectly processed as comments 4 Specification of compile options When using CA78KO note the following points When several specifications have been made for an option that does not allow multiple specifications the last specification takes precedence The type specification following the c option must not be omitted If it is omitted an abort error will occur If the c option is not specified be sure to enter pragma pc type in the C source module file instead During compilation if the specified option is different from the option in the C source the specified option takes precedence A warning message is output at that time If the help option has been specified all other opt
375. ildModeN ame Object information file name ProjectName _objinfo txt Output folder for reference information file BuildModeN ame Reference information file name ProjectName_tetinfo txt c Runa build of the project Run a build of the project A load module file is generated with the C source files relocated in accordance with the changes made to the relocation destinations Caution Ifa file with an extension of fin is added to the project it is treated as a function information file It is also treated as a function information file if it is added below the Startup node When adding a function information file to the project if a functions information file has already been added then only the latest function information file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a function information file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other function information files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 55 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Set Build Options Separately Build options are set at the project or file level Project level See 2 12 1 Set build options at the project level Project level See 2 12 2 Set build options at the file level 2 12 1 Set build options at the project level To set option
376. ildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName lib E List File Output list file No Others Output folder Specifies the folder to which the generated libraries are saved The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name Common O 4 Compile Op Assemble Variables R Memory Ba Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output folder Specify the folder for saving the library that is generated If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 224 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Output file name 2 List File APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the library file name to be output Use the extension lib If t
377. ile c Assembler source file asm Header file h inc Link directive file dr dir Variables information file vfi Function information file fin N te Map file map Symbol table file sym Hex file hex hxb hxf Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed Remarks 1 You can use one of the methods below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu 2 When the environment is set to use an external text editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS 2 3 3 Remove a file from a project To remove a file added to a project select the file to be removed from the project on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu In addition the file itself is not deleted from the file system Figure 2 10 Remove from Project Item File sk Startup BS main Compile J Open Es Open with Internal Editor E Open with Selected Application BE Open Folder with Explorer Add gt El Remove from Project Shift Del D 5 Copy Ctrl C E aP Rename F2 Property R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 20 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1
378. ile The symbol table file output by the object converter is input to a debugger The following is the symbol table file of the sample program 04 FF PUBLIC 010097CONVAH O10000MAIN O010080START OOFE20_ STBEG OOFBOO_ STEND FF SAMPM lt O2FE20HDTSA O2FE21STASC FF SAMPS lt 0100A8SASC O100AESASC1 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 507 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 30 Formats for Symbol Table File Start of symbol table Start of public symbol Public symbol ae ae AP 4 4 blank spaces 4 blank spaces Module name 1 Module name 1 1 Local symbols for Start of local symbol Symbol attributes Symbol value Local symbol name CR y each module Symbol attributes Symbol value Local symbol name FF Repeated in units of object module End mark of symbol table Note Symbol attributes are the values shown below See the following figure about formats of symbol values Symbol Attribute Constant defined by the EQU directive Label within a code segment Label within a data segment Bit symbol Module name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 508 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 31 Formats for Symbol Value When the symbol attribute is NUMBER Constant value 4 digits When the symbol attribute is LABEL Address value 4 dig
379. iles which have been input by the caller lines cannot be specified exceeds the maximum number of paths or files specified by the caller b Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected the path is added to Path One path per one line c Subfolders are automatically included After checking this check box designate the path from Browse button and a path is added to Path One path per one line including subfolders up to 5 layers 2 Placeholder The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in the path edit area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 285 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the ent
380. imum of 16 bytes can be stored Location address offset The start address offset of the code displayed in the record is shown as a 4 digit hexadecimal Record type Fixed at 00 Code Max 32 digits The object code is shown one byte at a time with the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits separated A maximum of 16 bytes can be expressed in the code Check sum 2 digits A value is input subtracting in order from 0 which counts down the data from the code number to the code Item Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 00 Fixed at 0000 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 497 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description 4 Record type Fixed at 01 5 Check sum Fixed at FF b Intel extended hex file format Figure B 28 Intel Extended Format Start address record Extended address record Data record Note Extended address record Data record Data record End record Note The extended address record and the data record are repeated here Extended address record Item Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number Fixed at 02 Fixed at 0000 Record type Fixed at 02 Paragraph value of the segment The paragraph value of the segment is shown as a 4 digit hexadecim
381. in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Memo in the Notes category and Commands executed before build pro cessing Commands executed after build processing in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Library category and Commands executed before link processing Commands executed after link processing in the Others category From the Object Convert Options tab Commands executed before object convert processing Commands executed after object convert processing in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Commands executed before making library Commands executed after making library in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess cate gory and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category Fro
382. information on the symbol table is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output symbol table file 4 Error List Select whether to output the symbol table file This corresponds to the s option of the object converter Default Yes s How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes s Outputs the symbol table file No ns Does not output the symbol table file The detailed information on the error list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error list file 5 Others Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file No Does not output the error list file Other detailed information on object conversion are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 221 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before object convert processing before object convert Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name Build
383. ing the output folder is made with the Output folder property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholder BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name BuildModeName is set by default 2 lt Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName lib is set by default R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 42 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Set Variables Relocation Options To set options for the variables information file generator select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various variables relocation options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 52 Property Panel Variables Relocation Options Tab Property a CA 78KO Property E Output File Output variables information file No E ROM RAM Amount Information Output ROM RAM usage No Output variables information fle Selects whether to
384. inning of the source The description format is shown below ASATABAnumber of tabs Example of use To reference an assemble list file Sample prn when the It option is omitted describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 sample asm The contents of sample prn is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 422 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT SAMPM To specify 1 blank entered by the HT code describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 sample asm 1t1l The contents of sample prn is as follows Assemble list ALNO STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT SAMPM Remark The number of blanks entered by the HT code is 1 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 423 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If nlf Description format nlf Interpretation when omitted nif Function The lf option inserts a form feed FF code at the end of an assemble list file The nlf option disables the lf option Application Use the lf option to insert a form feed code if you wish to add a page break after the contents of an assemble list file are printed Description If the np option is specified the lf option is invalid If both the lf and nlf options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Cautions
385. input and edit characters in one line Figure A 27 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input a Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Format of build option list in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Link Options tab Area name in the Stack category and Other additional options in the Others category From the Object Convert Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Create Library Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category In the General External Tools category of the Option dialog box check Require options at start up in the New registration area Then the dialog box automatically opens when an external tool is launched from Tool menu Description of each area 1 Characters input area Input characters a String Input c
386. input file name rel Function The o option specifies the output of an object module file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The no option specifies not to output an object module file Application Use the o option to specify the location to which an object module file is output or to change its file name Specify the no option when performing compilation only to output an assembler source file This will shorten compilation time Description If the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be input file name rel If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be output file name rel Even if the o option is specified when a compilation error occurs the object module file cannot be output If the drive name is omitted when the o option is specified the object module file will be output to the current drive If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Cautions To change the output destination when using CubeSuite on the Property panel from the Link Options tab in the Output File category specify the output destination When setting an individual compile option it is also possible to change the name of the output file From the Individual Compile Options tab in the Output File
387. instructions No Does not specify optimizing branch instructions R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 244 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Replace fixed code to library Size precedence Select whether to replace the fixed code with the library This corresponds to the ql option of the compiler optimization Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Do not replace ql1 Does not replace the fixed code with the library Performs optimization with the module size pre cedence Yes Replace only pro cess before after func tion ql2 Replaces only the processing routines before and after the function with a library Yes Replace load store and indirect referencing instruction and equiva lent of ql2 ql3 Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code with a library Yes Replace whole instructions ql4 Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library Yes subroutinize same codes use stack access libraries ql5 Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a libra
388. ion How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 3 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Object file name Specify the name of the object file generated after assembling If this field is blank the file is saved under the file name with extension asm replaced by rel This corresponds to the o option of the assembler Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Output common object Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices file for various devices This corresponds to the common option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes common Outputs the objects common to the various devices No Outputs objects for 78K0 Output error list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Select whether t This correspond o output the error list file s to the e option of the assembler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file
389. ion lt pick gt pick masterLBF modulename lt list gt list option masterLBF modulename option p output public symbol np no output public symbol o filename specify output file name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 540 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 5 Subcommands 1 Types The subcommands are detailed instructions for the operation of the librarian The types and explanations for subcommands are shown below Table B 27 Subcommands Subcommand Name Abbrev Description create Creates a new library file add Adds a module to a library file delete Deletes a module from a library file replace Replaces a module in a library file with other module pick Retrieves a module from the library file list Outputs information on modules in a library file help Outputs a help message on the display exit Exits the librarian 2 General format of subcommand files subcommand Aoption Alibrary file name Aoption transaction Aoption library file name The library file name specified immediately before can be replaced with transaction transaction Aobject module file name ADlibrary file name A Amodule namef A Remark Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the subcommands and options R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 541 of 585 Oct 01
390. ion The detailed information on extensions are displayed and the configuration can be changed Allow C format com ments Select whether to allow the use of C format comments This corresponds to the zp option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zp Allows the use of C format comments No Does not allow the use of C format comments Allow nested comments Select whether to allow the nest use of comments _ This corresponds to the zc option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zC Allows the nest use of comments No Does not allow the nest use of comments Kanji character code of source Select the Kanji character code of the source This correspond s to the zs ze and zn option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Shift_JIS zs Interprets the kanji code of the source as Shift_JIS EUC JP ze Interprets the kanji code of the source as EUC JP Unspecified zn Interprets the source as not containing kanji codes Follow ANSI Standard R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Select whether to disable non ANSI standard functions and enable
391. ion folder specification option is as follows t Description format t folder Interpretation when omitted The temporary files are created in the drive folder specified by the environment variable TMP If the environment variable TMP is not specified the temporary files are created in the current drive and current folder Function The t option specifies the drive and folder in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten the next time As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If the required memory size is no longer available the temporary file is created in the specified folder and the memory contents are written to the file Accesses to subsequent temporary files are to files not in memory Temporary files are deleted when compilation is finished They are also deleted when compilation is aborted by pressing the CTRL C key Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c ttmp R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 383 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Function expansion specification The function expansion specification options a
392. ion number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output common object file for various devices Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices This corresponds to the common option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes common Outputs the objects common to the various devices No Outputs objects for 78K0 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 202 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the assembler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file No Does not output the error list file 4 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the p option of the assembler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank rel
393. ion specification about the optimization options R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 336 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 ROMization function ROMiczation is processing that locates in ROM the initial values for external variables that have initial values and copies them to RAM when the system is executed The CA78KO provides startup routines with the ROMization processes of programs Using the startup routines eliminates the problem of describing ROMization processes for startup See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding about the startup routines a How to store a program on ROM During linking the startup routine object module files and libraries are linked The startup routine initializes the object program lt 1 gt s0 rel These are startup routines when stored on ROM The copy routine for the initialization data is included and the beginning of the initial data is indicated The label _ cstart symbol is added to the start address lt 2 gt cl0 lib These are libraries attached to CA78KO These files include the following libraries Runtime library is appended to the start of the symbol for runtime library names _ is appended to the start of the symbol name for special library cstart corep cdisp Standard library _ is appended to the start of the symbol for standard library names lt 3 gt lib These are libraries created by a user _ is added to the symbol head
394. ions if the function name ends with a plus sign functions added from All Functions intentionally by clicking Adqd Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the settings in the Stack Usage Tracer window save them to the project file prj then close the dialog Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Reset Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for the selected function has the default values Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 331 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing stack size specification file Figure A 51 Open Dialog Box 0 Look in tmp e me a sample 3 File name 4 Files of type Stack Size Specification File txt Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Stack Usage Tracer window select Load Stack Size Specification File from the File menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder containing the stack size specification file you wish to open 2 List of files This area dis
395. ions This corresponds to the zr option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Use static model property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zr Adds a pascal function attribute Does not add a pascal function attribute Use prologue epilogue Select whether to use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function library This corresponds to the zd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when Yes zf in the Output objects for flash property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zd Uses a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a func tion No Does not use a library for the prologue epilogue routines of a function 10 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 189 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Output common object file for various devices 11 Assembly File APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to output the objects common to the various devices This corresponds to the common option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes common Outputs the objects common to the various devices No Does not specifies outputting the objects common to the
396. ions are ignored 5 Using assembler source as output When aC source file contains descriptions that use assembly language such as asm blocks or __asm statements the load module file creation procedure sequence is compile assemble and then link Note the following if you want to use the C compiler to first output an assembly source file and then assemble it rather than directly output an object file as with files written in assembly language and the like If the C source contains asm blocks and __asm statements specify the a or sa option to enable assembly descriptions and assemble the output assembler source When using CubeSuite from the Property panel on the Compile Options tab in the Asseembly File category for the Output an assemble file property specify to output assembler source files or for sources for R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 131 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 5 CAUTIONS which only assembler source files are output on the Individual Compile Options tab in the Asseembly File category set the Output an assemble file property to output assembler source files When using CubeSuite the assembler is started regardless of compile options o no when the output of assembler source files is specified 6 Include file dependence relationship During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite condition statements such as if and comments ar
397. ir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after library generation processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after making library processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the librarian options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the librarian options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 227 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Variables Relocation Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the variables information file generator categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Margin 3 ROM RAM Amount Information Figu
398. ir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the compiler is searched The refer ence point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 246 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use whole include paths Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build tool property in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab of the build tool to be used Th
399. is corresponds to the i option of the compiler The paths are added to the i option according to the following sequence Paths specified in the Additional include paths property Paths specified in the Additional include paths in the Preprocess category from the Com pile Options tab Paths specified in the System include paths in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the general option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the u op
400. is made with the Object file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Assemble Options tab See 2 12 2 Set build options at the file level for how to set the individual build options 2 If source files with the same name are added the target file cannot opened during debugging 3 Ifa file with an extension of dr or dir is added to the project it is treated as a link directive file It is also treated as a link directive file if it is added below the Startup node When adding a link directive file to the project if a link directive file has already been added then only the latest link directive file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a link directive file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other link directive files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted 4 Upto 5000 files can be added to the main project or subproject However up to 1000 souce files can be added When a new file is added an empty file is created in the location specified in the Add File dialog box By double clicking the file name on the project tree you can open the Editor panel and edit the file The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 19 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS C source f
401. is shown below Table B 18 Symbol Block Format for Extended Tektronix Number of ASCII Description Characters Standard header field Block type 3 Section name This is the name of the section which includes the symbols defined in the block Number of characters is variable Section definition This field must be displayed in one symbol block in each section This field may be placed before or after any number of symbol definition fields See Table B 19 Symbol Block Section Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix about this format Symbol definition 5 to 35 each This is a symbol definition field greater than 0 See Table B 20 Symbol Block Symbol Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix about this format The symbols contained in a program are transferred as a symbol block Each symbol block includes a section name and a list of the symbols that belong to that section If necessary a scalar can also be included in any section Symbols in the same section can be placed in one or more blocks The formats for the section definition field and the symbol definition field in the symbol block are shown below Table B 19 Symbol Block Section Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix Number of ASCII Description Characters 0 0 specifies that the field is a section definition field Base address This is a section start address Number of characters is variable Length Indicates the section length N
402. is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the linker The library path name is displayed as the subproperty Default System library paths number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed 5 Device The detailed information on the device are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 211 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use on chip debug Select whether to set the on chip debug Change the size of the debug monitor area This corresponds to the go option of the linker This property is not displayed when the device does not have an on chip debug function Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qo Sets the on chip debug No Does not set the on chip debug Debug monitor area Specify the size of the debug monitor area in decimal size byte This corresponds to the go option of the linker If this is blank an error will occur This property is not displayed when the Use on chip debug property is not displayed or when No is selected in the property Default 256 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 256 to 1024 decimal number Set user option byte Select whether to set the user option byte This corresponds to the gb option of the linker Default No How to change Select from
403. ite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation path specification The temporary file creation path specification option is as follows t Description format tpath name Interpretation when omitted Path specified by environmental variable TMP Current path if no path is specified Function The t option specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Only a path can be specified as a path name The path name is cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when linking is finished They are also deleted when linking is aborted by pressing the keys CTRL C key The path in which the temporary file is created is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the t option 2 Path specified by environmental variable TMP when the t option is omitted 3 Current path when TMP is not set Caution When 1 or 2 is specified if the temporary file cannot be creat
404. items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 226 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after library generation processing after making library pro Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat cessing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinD
405. ithout including a path name Two or more i options can be specified Two or more path names can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after Up to 64 path names can be specified per link If two or more path names are specified library files will be searched in a specified sequence An error will not occur even if no library file exists in the specified path An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted If a library file is specified by the b option without including a path name the linker will search paths in the following sequence 1 The path specified by the i option 2 Path specified by environmental variable LIB78KO 3 Current path Caution An error occurs if a library file with the specified name does not exist in any of these paths Example of use To search and read a library file from folders C lib1 and C lib2 in that order describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 466 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To read a library file from folder D library files describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 467 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options and input file names can only be i
406. itor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the input file name is omitted from the command line only 1 input file name can be specified in the parameter file The input file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all list convert options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kO plv using an editor and then start up the list converter parameter file kOmain 1k0 1mf ek0O elv C gt ra78k0 fkOmain pra 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the list converter is started up an execution startup message appears on the display List Conversion Program for RA78KO Vx xx XX XXX Xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation Passi start Pass2 start b Execution end message If it detects no list conversion errors resulting from the list conversion the list converter outputs the following message to the display and returns control to the host operating system Conversion complete If the list converter detects a fatal error during list conversion which makes it unable to continue list convert processing the list converter outputs a message to the display cancels list conversion and returns control to the host operating system R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 556 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1
407. its When the symbol attribute is a bit symbol Upper 13 bits Lower 3 bits Upper 13 bits The relative address from OFEOOH Lower 3 bits Bit position 0 to 7 B 4 3 Method for manipulating 1 Object converter startup The following two methods can be used to start up the object converter a Startup from the command line X path name gt oc78k0 Aoption load module file name Aoption X Current drive name path name Current folder name oc78k0 Command name of the object converter option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the object converter When specifying two or more object convert options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the object convert options See B 4 4 Option for details about object convert options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks load module file name File name of load module to be converted Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks Example To output a hex file sample hex describe as C gt oc78k0O kO 1lmf osamle hex b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the object converter will not fit on the command line or when the same object convert option is specified repeatedly each time object conversion is perfo
408. k relocation support tool Property Output function information tile Output folder for replacement information file Replacement information file name Output folder for object information file Object information file name Output folder for reference information file Reference information file name No BuildModeN ame ProjectName _replace txt BuildModeN ame ProjectName _objinfo txt BuildModeN ame ProjectName_tetinfo txt Remark If you select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property the following properties are automatically changed The Add debug information property in the Debug Information category from the Compile Options tab will be changed to Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 The Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category from the Compile Options tab will be changed to Yes With no C source info a The Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category from the Assemble Options tab will be changed to Yes p The Output with cross reference list property in the Assemble List category from the Assemble Options tab will be changed to Yes kx Set the Output function information file property to Yes to generate an empty function information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the Files node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for fun
409. k size Function in the same manner as when Recalcu late Stack Size is selected from the View menu Forcibly stop the action of the stack usage tracer e g recalculating the total stack size Functions in the same manner as when Stop is selected from the View menu Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional mar gin recursion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the tree dis play area list display area Functions in the same manner as when Adjust Stack Size is selected from the Option menu Displays the help of this window Functions in the same manner as when sk78k0 Help is selected from the Help menu 3 Tree display area The calling relationship of the functions is shown in tree format The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modi fied via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file Recursive function The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above Remark The display priority for icons is from High gy to Low H a Context menu Select a function in this area and then right click with the mouse The c
410. l error C if is an Internal error and W if it is a warning nnnn the error number is displayed as a 4 digit decimal number no zero suppression Error message Target device for this compiler Device file version Number of errors Number of warnings CC78KO CC78KO0 CC78KO CC78KO CC78KO Target chip Device file 6 VxX xx Compilation complete 7 0 Item Number Description C source file name warning warning warning warning warning error s Outputs error messages Contents after column 80 are not wrapped to the next line Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Displays the version number of the input device file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 3 WO745 4 Expected function prototype 3 WO745 4 Expected function prototype 3 W0622 4 No return value 3 W0622 4 No return value 3 W0622 4 No return value 5 uPD78F0511_44 and 8 5 warning s found Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Line number Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 97 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format 3 Error message number Outpu
411. le replacing it with several blanks Spaces in each list tabulation processing Application Use the It option to reduce the number of characters per line by reducing the number of blanks per HT code for example when a small number of characters per line has been specified for lists via the Iw option Description The range number of characters that can be specified with the It option is 0 to 8 If It0 is specified tabulation processing will not be performed and a tabulation code will be output If the number of characters is omitted the number of expansion characters of a tab is 8 If the list file is not specified the It option is invalid Example of use If the It option is omitted the compiler assumes that the It8 option is specified and the number of blanks entered by the HT code is set to 8 C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c p To specify 1 blank entered by the HT code describe as C gt cc78kO cF051144 prime c p 1tl R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 377 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format Slt Interpretation when omitted No form feed code is inserted Function The lf option inserts a form feed code at the end of each list file Description If the list file is not specified the If option is invalid Example of use To insert a form feed code at the end of an assembler source file prim
412. le Types for Extended Space Normal Space Extended Space REGULAR EX4 Flash memory self rewriting mode support The object converter can create separate hex files in the boot area and flash area for the code located in the flash memory when the self rewriting mode of the flash memory is used To output separate hex files specify the object convert option zf The file type is as follows Table B 13 File Type When zf Option Is Specified ve Output file at boot area ROM program side Output file at program side other than boot area ROM Hex files The hex file output by the object converter can be input to a hex loader such as a PROM programmer or a debugger The following is the hex file of the sample program O200000080007E 1000800011201A1620FE9A93001421FE63958462B3 1000900095FAFE617131809AA40073617131809A82 QDOOQAQ00A40072AF4D8D020D070D30AFA8 00000001FF R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 496 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE a Intel standard hex file format Figure B 27 Intel Standard Format Data record I Note Data record End record Note The data record is repeated here Data record 02 0000 00 8000 7E Item Description Number Record mark Indicates beginning of record Code number 2 digits Number of bytes in the code stored in the record A max
413. le file name property in the Device category from the Link Options tab is specified This property is not displayed when the device does not have a security ID function Default Oxfffffffffff TETE TET How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0x00000000000000000000 to Oxffffffftffffttft ff f 20 digit 10 byte hexadecimal number 8 Build Method The detailed information on the build method is displayed and the configuration can be changed Handling the source file Selects whether to recompile assemble the source file if there are no files that include it includes non existing file Default Re compile assemble the source file How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Re compile assemble the Recompiles assembles the source file if there source file are no files that include it Ignore re compiling assem Does not recompile assemble the source file bling the source file if there are no files that include it 9 Version Select The detailed information on the build tool version is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using compiler package Display the folder in which the compiler package to be used is installed install folder Default Install folder name How to change Changes not allowed Using compiler package Select the version of the compiler package to be used version This setting is common to all the build mo
414. le name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 18 Output file name Property For Load Module File E Output File Wutout folde ZBui name test orce INKIN against error This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 25 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also change the option in the same way with the Output file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 When changing the hex file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Object Convert Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to on the Hex file name property in the Hex File category Figure 2 19 Hex file name Property E Hex File BuildModeh ame test hex ex file formal Split hex file No This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Caution When Yes
415. le type Link order specification file mtls Link order specification file Function buttons Save Generates a link order specification file as the specified name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 319 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Usage Tracer window This is the first window to open when the stack usage tracer is launched Use this window to check or modify the amount of stack used on a per function basis Figure A 48 Stack Usage Tracer Window sample Stack Usage Tracer 1 Ale View Option Help 2 main Total Stack Size Additional Margin 4 m stabi man D proj STK subi Ci stabi 4 D proj STK sub2 subi D proj STK ia subs BBsubi1 D proj STK Cy sub3i B sub11 E subiz amp D projiSTK E sub11 Cl sample c D proj STK 3 0 subi2 CE subi4 D projiSTK sub21 Reading completed E sample c sub13 Stack size specification of sub11 canceled ize specification of sub11 adjusted Additional margin is set to 8 Recursion depth is set to 3 Stack size specification of sub12 adjusted Additional margin is set to 8 For Help press F1 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Caution How to open From the Tool menu select Startup Stack Usage Tracer Description of each
416. led by the u option is one that has been defined by the d option A macro name defined by define in a C source file or a system macro name of the CA78KO cannot be disabled by the u option If the same macro name is specified in both the d and u options the option specified last is valid Example of use The d option that is specified first is ignored and the u option that is specified last is valid the macro definition for TEST thus becomes invalid C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c dTEST TIME 10 uTEST R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 362 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format ifolder folder two or more folders can be specified Interpretation when omitted It is assumed that the following folders have been specified 1 Folder with source file 1 2 Folder specified by environmental variable INC78KO 3 C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx inc78k0Ne 2 Notes 1 If the include file name is specified with double quotation marks in the include statement folders with source files are searched first If the include file name is specified with lt gt search is not performed 2 This is an example of when the C compiler is installed to C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78KO V x xx Function The i option specifies that an include file specified by include statement in a C source
417. ler No cannot be selected in this property When the static model is not used select No in the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab When No is selected this property is not displayed Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes 0 byte common area sm0 Specifies 0 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 1 byte common area sm1 Specifies 1 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 2 bytes common area sm2 Specifies 2 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 3 bytes common area sm3 Specifies 3 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 4 bytes common area sm4 Specifies 4 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 5 bytes common area sm5 Specifies 5 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 6 bytes common area sm6 Specifies 6 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 7 bytes common area sm7 Specifies 7 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 8 bytes common area sm8 Specifies 8 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 9 bytes common area sm9 Specifies 9 bytes as the number of bytes in the common area Yes 10 bytes common area sm10 Specifies 10 bytes as the number
418. les This corresponds to the lf option of the librarian This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lf Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in 1 line R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Specify the number of characters in each line of the list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the librarian This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default 132 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 260 decimal number 2tENESAS Page 225 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of lines on 1 Specifies the number of lines on 1 page of the list file page If 0 is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the librarian This property is not displayed when No in the Output list file property is selected Default 66 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number 3 Others Other detailed information on libraries are displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before library generation p
419. les and norec arguments to registers and assigns them also to the saddr area No Does not specify assigning register variables to the saddr area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 243 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not use sign extended Select whether to perform char related calculations without pan integral extension calculation for char This corresponds to the qc option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qc Performs char related calculations without pan integral extension Note No Performs char related calculations with pan integral exten sion Interpret char to Select whether to interpret the char without qualifier as a unsigned char unsigned char This corresponds to the qu option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qu Interprets the char without qualifier as a unsigned char No Does not specify interpreting the char without qualifier as a unsigned char Optimize branch instruc Select whether to optimize branch instructions tion This corresponds to the qj option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qj Optimizes branch
420. les are stored in the library An abort error occurs if a module with the same name as the module to be added already exists in the library file An abort error occurs if the module to be added carries the same public symbol as the public symbol in the library file Example of use To add module m83 to the library file kO lib describe as xadd k0 lib m3 rel lt Before module addition gt kO lib m1 lt After module addition gt k0 lib m1 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 543 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format deleteAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A JA dAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A A Abbreviated form Function The delete subcommand deletes a module from a library file Description An error occurs if the specified module does not exist in the library file If an error occurs processing is interrupted and the condition of the library file will not be changed Example of use To delete modules m1 and m3 from the library file kO lib describe as delete kO lib ml rel m3 rel lt Before module deletion gt kO lib m1 m2 m3 lt After module deletion gt kO lib m2 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 544 of 585 Oct 01 2011
421. lib The following points should be noted when describing the link order specification file Describe one file name on one line Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the file name If the line begins with the line is interpreted as a comment A space or tab is ignored c Import the link order specification file Click the Import button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Import File dialog box Figure 2 96 Select Import File Dialog Box Select Import File Look in sample gt DefaultBuild i 4 E LinkOrder mtls My Recent Documents e Desktop My Documents gs My Computer File name My Network Files of type Link order specification file mtls In the dialog box select the link order specification file and click the Open button The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specification file and then they are reflected in File in the Link Order dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 71 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 97 Link Order Dialog Box After Setting Link Order Link Order file01 rel fileO3 rel library02 lib file02 rel library01 lib library03 lib Cautions 1 The file that is described in the link order specification file and is not added to the project is not displayed If the corresponding file exists
422. lib H O sample O sample2 src E O Project_2 v Function buttons Make New Folder 1 i The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Add File dialog box click the button in the File location area In Path Edit dialog box click button in the path edit area On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Intermediate file output folder in the Output File Type and Path category Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Output folder for hex file in the Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category and Temporary folder in the Others category From the Link Options tab Output folder in the Others category From the Object Convert Options tab Output folder for hex file in the Hex File category From the Create Library Options tab Output folder in the Output File category From the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab Output folder for function information file Output folder for replacement information file Output folder for object information file and Output folder for reference infor mation file in the Output File category R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 304 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area
423. link Anon existent link option is specified C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel z R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 441 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Linker Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78KO error F3018 Option is not recognized z Please enter LK78K0 if you want help messages Program Aborted In the above example a non existent link option is specified An error occurs and the linker aborts the link 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set link options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Link Options tab You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 6 Property Panel Link Option Tab Property A CA 8KO Property Debug nformaton Add debug information E Input File Using link dir E Output File Output folder BuildModeName Output file name ProjectN ame Imf Force linking against error No E Library Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 Device Message Stack Link List Error List Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being gene
424. ller 3 Path by which the LK78KO was started up 4 Current folder 5 The environmental variable PATH R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 471 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify the path for the device file as folder C 78k0 dev describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel yC 78k0 dev To specify the path for the device file as folder D device files describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel y D device files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 472 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output specification The warning message output specification option is as follows W Description format w level Interpretation when omitted w1 Function The w option specifies whether or not a warning message is output to the console Application Use the w option to specify the level at which a warning message will be output Description An abort error occurs if something other than a level is specified after the w option Only levels 0 1 and 2 can be specified The output levels are as follows 0 No warning message is output 1 A normal warning message is output 2 A detailed warning message is output Example of use To output a detailed warning message describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel w2 R20UT0783E
425. ly change the build tool version by selecting all of the Build tool nodes and setting the property 2 Ifyou have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed 3 Ifthe options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Properties that are hidden when the version is changed are saved in the project file s settings and the values will be reproduced when the properties are displayed again Options are changed in accordance with the following rules Information about changes is displayed in the Output panel If you change from an older version to a newer version the option settings will be inherited and con verted only if necessary If you change from a newer version to an older version only identical option settings will be inher ited Options that only exist in the older version will be set to the default values R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 13 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Set Build Target Files Before running a build you must add the build target files such as C source file assembler source file to the project This section explains operations on setting files in the project 2 3 1 Set a startup routine 1 Using the standard startup routine Select the build tool node
426. ly to the project In this case the library files are not searched from the library paths because they are linked directly via their absolute paths R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 39 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Set Object Convert Options To set options for the object converter select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Object Convert Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various object convert options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure 2 48 Property Panel Object Convert Options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeName Hex file name ProjectName hex Hex file format Intel expanded hex format kie Split hex file No E Hex File Filling Fill free memory space Yesf u Filling value HEX FF Filling start address HEX Filling size byte HEX Symbol T able Error List Others Output hex file Select this option to generate a hex file This option corresponds to the o option Compile Assemble Link Opti i Object i A Memory Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Object Convert category on the Common Options tab 2 8 1 Set the output of a hex file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Object Co
427. m the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble Commands executed after assemble in the Others category From the File Information tab Memo in the Notes category From the Category Information tab Memo in the Notes category Description of each area 1 Text Input and edit texts in multiple lines By default this dialog box opens with its edit box reflecting the current value of the property selected to call the dia log box Remark Up to 65535 lines and 65535 characters are allowed When the input violates any restriction the fol lowing messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The characters exceeds the maximum number of erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be restriction in the property that called this dialog box specified The current number of characters is dis played between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 282 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Placeholder The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in Text a Placeholder This area dis
428. macro definition or expansion line INCLUDE display Displays INCLUDE In Within an INCLUDE file n is the nest level Blank An INCLUDE file is not used Source statement Displays source statements Contents that exceed the line length are output beginning on the next line Location counter value The line s start address appears as the label for machine instructions DB DW DS and DBIT It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression Line on which error occurred This is a line on which error occurred Required items are displayed Relocation information Segment address Displays relocation information R Object code or symbol value is changed by the linker Blank Object code or symbol value is not changed by the linker Displays a start address of a segment It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression Segment size Displays the segment size It is displayed in hexadecimal format without zero suppression Segment name Displays a segment name Target device for this assembler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Device file version number Displays the version number of the input device file Number of fatal errors Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Number of warnings Output
429. mands Specify the help command or the option to see these when executing the librarian Example of use To output a help message on the display describe as Subcommands create add delete replace pick list help exit Usage subcommand option masterLBF option transaction option transaction OMFname LBFname modulename lt create gt create masterLBF transaction lt add gt add masterLBF transaction lt delete gt delete masterLBF modulename lt replace gt replace masterLBF transaction lt pick gt pick masterLBF modulename lt List gt list option masterLBF modulename option p output public symbol np no output public symbol o filename specify output file name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 549 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format exit e Abbreviated form Function The exit subcommand exits the librarian Description Use this subcommand to exit the librarian Example of use To exit the librarian describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 550 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 List Converter The list converter inputs assemble list files and object module files output by the assembler and load module files out put by the linker It embeds actual addresses in the relo
430. mark See B 3 1 O files for details about input and output files of the linker 3 3 1 Link list file headers The header is always output at the beginning of a link list file 78KO Linker 1 Vx xx Date 2 xx XXX XXXX Page 3 xXxxx Command 4 kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 map dk0 dr Para file 5 Out file 6 kO 1mf Map File 7 kOmain map Direc File 8 Directive Link information 10 3 output segment s 11 37H byte s real data C124 23 symbol s defined Item Description Format Number Linker version number Displayed in x yz format Date of link list file creation Date of link list file creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Page number Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Command line image Displays the options specified at the startup line Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Output load module file name Outputs the name of the load module file generated by the linker R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 109 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format Link list file name Output the name of the link list file generated by the linker Link directive file name Output the name of the link directive file input by the linker Link directive file contents Displays the contents of the link directive file Number of segments output to Displays the number
431. mat sa loutput file name Interpretation when omitted No assembler source file is output Function The sa option adds the C source as a comment to the assembler source file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the sa option to output an assembler source file and a C source file together Description If the output file name is omitted when the sa option is specified the output file name will be nput file name asm If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the sa option is specified the output file name will be output file name asm If the drive name is omitted when the sa option is specified the assemble source file will be output to the current drive If both the sa and a options are specified at the same time the sa option is ignored The C source in an include file is not added to the comments in the output assembler source file However if the li option is specified the C source in the include file is also added to the comments Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To add the C source file prime c as a comment to the assembler source file prime asm describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c sa Output example is shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 366 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPEND
432. matic variables to the saddr area Yes Structure union array rsm Allocates structure union and array types auto matic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char and structure union array rsim Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rs2m Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rs Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area No Does not allocate static variables to the saddr area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 193 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Allocate external vari ables to saddr area 15 List File APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select the type of the external variable to be allocated in the saddr area This corresponds to the rd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when a file name is set in the Using variables information file property in the Variables Information File category Default No
433. matic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rs Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area No Does not allocate static variables to the saddr area The detailed information on list files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output preprocess list file Select whether to output the preprocess file This corresponds to the p option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs the preprocess list file No Does not output the preprocess list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 254 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not output comments Select whether to disable to output comments into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kc option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kc Does not output comments into the preprocess list file No Outputs comments into the preprocess list file Expand define prepro
434. mation file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 491 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE lt 11 gt Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select Yes zf on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure B 20 Memory Model Category in Flash Area E Memory Model Next select Yes For flash area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure B 21 Use standard startup routine Property in Flash Area Yes For flash area es Next add the created variables information file for the boot area to the flash area project Specify the variables information file for the boot area on the Variables information file for boot area property in the Variable Information File category Figure B 22 Variables information file for boot area Property in Flash Area E Yariables Information Fie LJ Variables information file for boot area boot D efaultB uild boot vfi lt 12 gt Set link options Add the created boot area load module file to the flash area project Select the Link Options tab Specify the boot area load module file on the Boot area load module file name property in the Device categor
435. mation on the category is displayed and the configuration can be changed Category name Specify the category name to categorize files This property of the File node Build tool generated files node and Startup node is displayed in gray and you cannot change the attribute Default Category name of files How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 1 to 200 characters 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category of the File node Build tool generated files node and Startup node is not displayed Memo Add memos to the category of files Add one item in one line The added memos are displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 memos can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 270 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display edit text files source files See CubeSuite 78KO Coding for details about this panel Figure A 23 Editor Panel f main c 74 B 75 FO FO mmm ee ee ee es ee ees eee as amaaa am rea an em amaaa a an ene anes an aea a aa aera 76 gt 77 w Abstract 78 we This
436. me and folder name Function buttons Button Function OK Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Editor panel Then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 276 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 26 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi Library file lib Object file rel 1 Text file txt 2 4 Subfolder level to search a Functon tuts The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the file types to add to the project You can select multiple types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file t
437. me is specified the list converter will add p to the file name as the file type and output the file If the drive name is omitted when the o option is specified the absolute assemble list file will be output to the cur rent drive Example of use To output an absolute assemble list file Sample p describe as C gt lcnv78k0 kOmain prn osample p 1k0 1mf R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 560 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error list file output specification The error list file output specification options are as follows e ne e ne Description format e output file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to save an error message into a file Description An abort error occurs if the same device is specified for the file name as for the absolute assemble list file If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be assemble list file name elv If only the primary name of the output file name is specified the list converter will add elv to the file name as the file type and output the file If the drive name is omitted when the e option is spec
438. me the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dia log box Caution When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Remarks 1 Up to 127 characters can be used as a build mode name When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 charac ters The build mode name is invalid The following charac Invalid build mode name is entered The characters ters cannot be used lt gt lt gt cannot be used as the name is used for the folder name 2 Up to 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip The maximum number of build modes that can be set The number of build modes exceed 20 per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 294 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that each project main project an
439. more assemble options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the assemble options See B 2 4 Option for details about assemble options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks source file name File name of source to be assembled Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks n Example To output an error list file KOmain era describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm e np b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the assembler will not fit on the command line or when the same assemble option is specified repeatedly each time assembly is performed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 395 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To start up the assembler from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the assembler from a parameter file as follows X gt ra78k0 ASource file A fparameter file name f Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the assembler Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the source file name is omitted from the comm
440. mory bank is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when a device with a memory bank installed is specified as the microcontroller and Yes is selected in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category on the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab and a C source file is selected on the Project Tree panel R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 239 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select common bank Select the area to relocate the program codes in build processing area Default No specification How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No specification The memory bank relocation support tool automati cally determines the optimum area and relocates the program code there Common area Relocates the program codes to the common area in build processing Bankxx Relocates the program codes to bankXX in build pro cessing This item is displayed corresponding to the numbers of banks XX 00 to 15 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 240 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on a C source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Compile Options tab If the settings
441. mport File dialog box The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specifica tion file and then they are reflected in File If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Opens the Select Export File dialog box Outputs the list of the file names diaplayed in File to the specifiled link order specification file If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Remark See 2 15 2 Set the link order of files for the method of using the link order specification file Function buttons Button Function Sets the file input order to linker as the display order of File and closes this dialog box Cancels the link order settings and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 292 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 34 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode2 Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild BuildMode2 2 4 Delete Duplicate Rename Function buttons Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the B
442. n Options Classification Description Variables information file output Specifies the output of a variables information file specification Vacant saddr area specification Specifies the margin size of the saddr area ROM RAM usage output specifi Outputs ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output cation R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 572 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Variables information file output specification The variables information file output specification option is as follows VO VO Description format vooutput file name Interpretation when omitted This option cannot be omitted except when specifying vx option Function The vo option specifies the output of a variables information file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name Application Use the vo option to specify the output of a variables information file Description The default file type is vfi output file name which includes a path name can be specified Even if the vo option is specified when an error occurs before linking is complete the variables information file cannot be output Both the vo and vx options cannot be specified at the same time Example of use To output a variables information file info vfi describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel voinfo vfi
443. n and object codes in the assemble list file The absolute assemble list output by the list converter agrees completely with the addresses used in actual program operation The actual values of external symbols are embedded in the list Relocatable values are embedded in the list as actual values For the symbol values in symbol tables or cross reference lists the actual values are embedded in the list Examples of the absolute assemble list file that can be acquired by the list converter are shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 552 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example Relocation data is embedded as shown below Assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9A0000 CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 84 62 95 Absolute assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9A9300 CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 84 62 95 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 553 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example The object codes are embedded as shown bel
444. n asterisk is appended to the end of the function name If the adjusted function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name If the adjusted function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name If the only action performed in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box was adding callee functions then the display format of this area will be as follows function name total stack size frame size 3 System Library Functions Display a list of automatically configured system library functions for which the frame size is unknown and the stack usage tracer has forcibly set an additional margin This area generally displays modified system library func tions in the following format function name total stack size additional margin Remarks 1 Function buttons The underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name An appropriate frame size is added to corresponding system library functions in the stack usage tracer s database as additional margin Button Function Close Closes this dialog box Adjust Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recur sion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the Unknown Functions Adjusted
445. n file can be used to reduce code by specifying the optimum allocation to the saddr area by the C compiler 2 ROM RAM usage display The variables functions information file generator displays the ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output B 7 3 Variables functions information 1 Areas a saddr area The 78KO has areas that can be addressed with a type of 8 bit addressing called saddr addressing short direct addressing saddr addressing targets the 256 bytes starting at FE20H Note allocating user variables here however because this area also contains general registers and ports The saddr area targeted by the variables informa tion file generator for alignment is thus 192 bytes FE20H to FEDFH b CALLT table area The area from 0040H to 007FH can be registered as a branch destination of the 32 addresses R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 565 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 37 Memory Map SFR si gk y General registers saddr addressing FEDFH FE20 ee VC RAM 2nd SFR ROM 0000H 2 Variable information a Reference counting The variables functions information file generator counts the number of times reference symbols are refer enced during relocation resolution b Vacant area detection The variables functions information file generator detects the start address and size of vacant area in the saddr ar
446. n for efficiently allocating variables To configure the variables information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes Specify the output destination in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node VF78KO 1 Vx xx Attention The semicolon at the head of line means the line is a comment Please refer to the format information for the item of each section 7 2 format information sreg variable count size type file const static const variable count size type const 7global const variable count size type file static variable count size type global variable count size type const boot global const in boot variable count size type boot global in boot type near 1 far 2 sreg 0 i callt variable count type file pstatic variable count type 7global variable count type boot global in boot type near 1 far 2 callt 0 7 3 gap information callt gap 4 START 5 SIZE 00080H 00040H Saddr gap 4 START 5 SIZE FFE26H OOOBAH 6 variable information sreg CUPL 893 C94
447. n format e output file name ne Interpretation when omitted ne Function The e option specifies the output of an error list file It also specifies the location to which it is output and the file name The ne option disables the e option Application Use the e option to specify the location to which an error list file is output or to change its file name Description If the output file name is omitted when the e option is specified the output file name will be input file name eoc If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create an error list file KO eoc describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 lmf ek0 eoc R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 520 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options or input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the object converter will not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly ev
448. n informa This is the functions information file to be used for relocating functions to the bank memory tion file The valid function information file registered to the project is searched and the file name is displayed This corresponds to the mf option of the compiler Default The name of the function information file that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed 14 Data Control The detailed information on data control are displayed and the configuration can be changed Assign bit field in struc Select whether to assign the member of the bit field structure from MSB ture from MSB This corresponds to the rb option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rb Assigns the member of the bit field structure from MSB No Assigns the member of the bit field structure from LSB Pack structure members Select whether to prohibit from inserting the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address This corresponds to the rc option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes rc Prohibits from inserting the align data to allocate the mem bers consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address Inserts the align data to allocate the members consisting of 2 or more bytes in a structure to even address
449. n information start Indicates start of function information Function information file name Outputs target source file name with full path Information starting with FILE Function information definition function Outputs function name and defined line number as decimal code Information starting with FUNC Function information return value argument of definition function Outputs the definition function s return value register and argument information register or stack position Function information definition function s size clock stack Outputs the size clock and maximum consumption stacks calculated statically for the definition function The value for the total number of clocks is the cumulative value for the number of clocks displayed For this reason the number of clocks will differ from the actual measurement if there is a branch Function information call function Outputs the function name and function call line number as decimal code Information starting with CALL Function information Call function s return value argument Outputs return value register and argument information during function call register or stack position 3 1 2 Error list file An error list file contains messages regarding any errors and warnings that occurred during compilation The C source can be added to the error list by specifying a compile option An error list fil
450. n object common to the 78KO0 Application Use the common option to generates an object that can be used commonly in the 78KO regardless of the device type specification option c Description Specify this option to generate an object that can be used commonly in the 78KO0 Example of use To generate an object that can be used commonly in the 78KO describe as C gt cc78k0 prime c cF051144 common R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 390 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Variables information file specification The variables information file specification option is as follows ma Description format mafile name mafile name mafile name file name Interpretation when omitted A variables information file is not used Function The ma option specifies the variables information file to be used Application Use the ma option to efficiently allocate variables using a variables functions information file Description Up to 2 file names can be specified A variables information file can be used to specify attributes for variables separate from the C source code See B 7 Variables Information File Generator for details about a variables information file Example of use To allocate variables by using the variables information file info vfi describe as C gt cc78k0O prime c cF051144 mainfo vfi R20UT
451. n option is as follows ee gb gb Description format gbuser option byte value Interpretation when omitted When the device has the user option byte function the initial value in the device file is set When the device does not have the user option byte function nothing is performed Function The gb option specifies the value set for the user option byte Application Use the gb option to specify the user option byte value Description The range that can be specified for the user option byte is 0 to OFFFFFFFFFFH An abort error occurs if a value that cannot be specified for the user option byte is specified Specify a hexadecimal value that ends with H An abort error occurs if any other value is omitted The user option byte is specified at addresses 80H to 84H Specify a security ID within 5 bytes If the specified value is less than 5 bytes the higher bits are filled with 0 The user option byte value to be allocated at addresses 80H to 84H can also be specified by defining the segment with relocation attributes shown below in the assembler source file However be sure to define the segment with 5 bytes for address 80H to 84H Any segment name OPT_BYTE ITH Address 22H Address 33H Address 44H Address 55H Address An error will occur if this option is specified for a device that does not have the user option byte function If specification of the assembler so
452. n specifies the target device for performing compilation Application Be sure to specify the c option The CA78KO performs compilation for the target device and generates an object code for that device Description See CubeSuite Operating Precautions for the target devices that can be specified by the c option and the corresponding device type When CA78kK0O is used device files are required Cautions The c option cannot be omitted However if the following description is in the C source file the specification from the command line can be omitted pragma pc device type If different devices are specified in the C source file and command line the device in the command line takes precedence Example of use To specify the uPD78F0511_ 44 as the target device in the command line describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 344 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE To specify the uUPD78F0511_ 44 as the target device in the C source file describe as pragma pe F051144 define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 void main void int i prime k count Therefore the target device specification can be omitted from the command line C gt cc78k0 prime c Specify different devices in the C source file prime c and the command line and then start up the C c
453. nal include paths during compiling The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When this option is omitted only the standard folder of the compiler is searched The refer ence point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the compiler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subprop erties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characte
454. nce List Date xx XXX Xxxx Page Command cF051144 prime x In file prime c Xref file prime xrf Para file ATTRIB MODIFY SYMBOL DEFIN REFERENCE EXTERN EXTERN REG1 AUTO1 int prime AUTO1 int k AUTOL int count EXTERN func printf EXTERN func putchar REG1 pointer s PARAM REG1 PARAM AUTO1 int j AUTO1 pointer ss REG1 char g PARAM AUTO1 char define define define Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file Vx xx R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 374 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE List format specification The list format specification options are as follows lw Il it If li lw Description format lw number of characters Interpretation when omitted lw132 80 characters in the case of console output Function The Iw option specifies the number of characters per line in each type of list file Application Use the lw option to change the number of characters per line in each type of list file Description The range of number of characters that can be specified with the lw option is 72 to 132 and does not include terminators CR LF If the number of characters is omitted the number of characters per line is 132 characters 80 characters in the case of console output If the list file is not specified the Iw option is invalid Example of use To specify 72 as
455. nclose the file name of a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks ey Use the extension prn Caution If only the primary name of the assemble list is specified in the command line the primary names of the object module file and load module file must be identical with the primary name of the assemble list file The file types must also be as shown below Object module type Load module file Example Ifthe primary name is different between an assemble list file kKOmain prn and a load module file sample Imf describe as follows so as to specify the input of a load module file Sample mf C gt lcnv78k0 kOmain prn lsample 1lmf b Startup from a parameter file Use the parameter file when the data required to start up the list converter will not fit on the command line or when the same list convert option is specified repeatedly each time list conversion is performed To start up the list converter from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the list converter from a parameter file as follows X gt lcenv78k0 Ainput file name A fparameter file name f Parameter file specification option R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 555 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the list converter Remark Create the parameter file using an ed
456. ncoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked FJ Does not reload the file when the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Button Function Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file with these settings is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 290 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to display object module files and library files to input to the linker and configure these link order Figure A 33 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order File file01 rel fileO2 rel fileO3 rel library01 lib library02 lib library03 lib Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu Description of each area 1 File list display area Show the file list to input to linker a File Display the following file name lists in input order to linker Object module files that are generated from the s
457. ndled as an input module Determination of location addresses for input segments The linker determines location addresses for each segment of an input module If location attributes for a segment are specified in the source file the segment is located according to those attributes The linker can also specify location attributes in the link directive file of the linker Correction of object codes When location addresses are buried in object codes the linker corrects the object code according to the location address determined in 3 above Method for manipulating Linker startup The following two methods can be used to start up the linker a Startup from the command line Current drive name path name Current folder name Ik78k0 Command name of the linker R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 439 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the linker When specifying two or more link options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the link options See B 3 4 Option for details about link options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks object module file name_ File name of object module to be linked Up to 1024 items can be input as an input module Enclose the file name of a path that includes a space in
458. nformation local symbol information is to be added to a load module file The ng option disables the g kp and kl option Application Be sure to use the g option when performing symbolic debugging with the source debugger Description If the ng option is specified the public symbol list and local symbol list cannot be output If both the g and ng options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the g option is invalid Example of use To add debug information to a load module file KOsub Imf describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel g R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 448 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Stack decision symbols generation specification The stack decision symbols generation options are as follows s ns s ns Description format s area name ns Interpretation when omitted ns Function The s option generates the stack decision public symbols _ STBEG and _ STEND The ns option disables the s option Application Use the s option to reserve a stack area Description Specify a memory area name defined by the user or a memory area name defined by default as area name Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for area name The linker searches the memory area specified by the s
459. ng at column 16 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 Line number information Outputs the line number for line number entry information starts with DGL This information is output only when the debug information output option has been specified Even then it is not output if the g1 option has been specified Labels for symbol information creation Outputs function label information information starts with This information is output only when the debug information output option has been specified Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file Device file version R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Displays the version number of the input device file 2tENESAS Page 94 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Description Size clock CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Format Outputs size and clock for output instructions Information starting with INF J If the number of clocks cannot be determined for an output instruction clocks are output in the following format clock 1 clock 2 Clock 1 The number of clocks when accessing the internal high speed RAM area Clock 2 The number of clocks when accessing the area other than the internal high speed RAM area This is ignored when accessing peripheral hardware that generates waits because the number of wait clocks is unknown Functio
460. nge number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 20 to 32767 An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the number of lines is omitted it is assumed that 66 has been specified If the number of lines specified is 0 no page breaks will be made If the np option is specified the Il option is invalid Example of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pkO map 1120 The contents of kO map is as follows 78KO Linker Vx xx Date xx XXX XXxx Page Command kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0 map 1120 Para file Out file kOmain 1lmf Map file kO map Direc file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 461 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Directive Link information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data 78K0 Linker Vx xx 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H OUTPUT INPUT SEGMENT SEGMENT 78K0 Linker Vx xx gap MEMORY LRAM BASE ADDRESS FACOH SIZE 0020H OUTPUT INPUT SIZE 2000H APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Date xx XXX XXXX Date xx XXX XXXX 00000002 CSEG AT 00000002 0000007E 00000046 0000002A 0000001C OOOOFF3A R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 462 of 585 CubeSuite V
461. ning message and the qr option is ignored The real time OS does not support the qr option Example of use To regard the char with no qualifier as a unsigned char to improve code efficiency describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c qu The qc option that is specified first is ignored the qr option that is specified last is valid and arguments of norec auto variables and register variables are allocated to the saddr area C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c qc qr To validate both the qc and qr options describe as C gt cc78kO cF051144 prime c qcer R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 356 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information output specification The debug information output specification options are as follows g ng g ng Description format Interpretation when omitted g2 Function The g option specifies that debug information is to be added into an object module file The ng option disables the g option Application If the g option is not specified the line numbers and symbol information needed in the object module file to be input to the debugger are not output Therefore in source level debugging all of the modules to be linked are compiled by specifying the g option Description The operation differs depending on the value of nas follows Value of n Function No specification
462. ning messages are also output to the error list file If the level 0 is specified the warning messages are not output to the console and the error list file when e or se is specified Example of use If the w option is omitted the compiler assumes that the w1 option is specified and outputs normal warning messages C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 380 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Execution state display specification The execution state display specification options are as follows v nv v nv Description format Interpretation when omitted NV Function The v option outputs the execution state of the current compilation to the console The nv option disables the v option Application Use the v option to check the execution status of compilation Description The phase name and function names in the process are output If both the v and nv options are specified at the same time the option specified last takes precedence Example of use To output the execution state of the current compilation to the console describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c v R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 381 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows
463. nk Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes kx This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kx Outputs the cross reference list information into the assemble list file No Does not output the cross reference list information into the assemble list file Output with form feed Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files control code This corresponds to the If option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lf Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 204 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of characters in Specify the number of characters in each line of the list file 1 line This corresponds to the Iw option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default 132 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 2046 decimal number Number of lines on 1 S
464. nkx lw width ll length 1f nit 1t n lhstring g ng j nj idirectory directory tdirectory ydirectory ffile ga nga dname data name data common self zs ze zn compati nocompati ra78k0 Select Create the object module file Create the Create the Output the Output the Expand TAB character for print file n 1 to 8 xx KKK XxXxx XXXX XXXX Renesas Electronics Corporation option input file option means omissible target chip x 012 014 etc Must be specified with the specified name Not error list file with the specified name Not print file with the specified name Not assemble list to print file Not symbol table list to print file Not Output the cross reference list to print file Not Specify print file columns per line Specify print file lines per page Add Form Feed at end of print file Not Not expand n 0 Print list header with the specified string Output debug information to object file Not Create object file if fatal error occurred Not Set include search path Set temporary directory Set device file search path Input option or source module file name from specified file Output assembler source debug information to object file Not Define name with data Create the common object module file for 78k0 Use Self programming
465. nly updated files hereafter referred to as build Running a build is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 5 Change the file build target project 1 When running a build of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a build of the active project Select the project and then select Build active project from the context menu Figure 2 114 Build active project Item sample Project upD7eF058s_48 E Build sample A Pin Configurator e Code Generator Clean sample A CA78K0 Build Tod Ss 78KO Simulator D BE Open Folder with Explorer ait Rebuild sample T Ce Program Analyzer Add Lp File Bs Fm Save Project and Development Tools as Package m j trl4 a Rename F2 Property Remark If the included source files are not built after editing the header file and running the build update the file dependencies see 2 3 7 Update file dependencies R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 82 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Run a build of all build target files hereafter referred to as rebuild Running a rebuild is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 5 Change the file build target project 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project Click on the toolba
466. not be called correctly The boot flash relink function hereafter referred to as the relink function is used to prevent this and enable functions to be called correctly This function is realized as follows a A branch table where instructions to branch to the functions in the flash area are written is prepared in the flash area b When a function in the flash area is called from the boot area execution jumps to the branch table in the flash area and then the instruction used to branch to the intended function is executed and jump occurs This mechanism can be realized by the user If the relink function is used this can be done relatively easily To use this function however the functions to be called in the flash area must be determined when the boot area is created This mechanism is used to call a function from the boot area even if the function is modified in the flash area Operation during a reset is as follows RESET interrupt vector boot area gt _ cstart boot area gt _boot_main function boot area gt ITBLTOP address flash area gt _ cstart flash area gt _main function flash area RAM for flash RAM RAM for boot Flash area 2000H Branch table area ROM lt Flash start address ITBLTOP Boot area 0000H R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 482 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 2 Image of relink function APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE
467. nput device file A public symbol list outputs data on public symbols defined in an input module To configure the public symbol list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes kp on the Output with public symbol list property in the Link List category e Public symbol list 1 MODULE 2 ATTR 3 VALUE ADDR 0000H ADDR 0080H ADDR 0095H R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 4 NAME MAIN START CONVAH 2tENESAS Page 111 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format Name of module in which Displays the name of the input object module in which public symbols are defined public symbols are defined Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symbol A bit X bit PSW bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol
468. nput from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the linker will not fit on the command line When specifying options repeatedly every time you perform linking describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last is valid The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF An abort error occurs if two or more f option is specified Example of use Perform linking using a parameter file kO plk The contents of the parameter file kO plk is as follows parameter file kOmain rel kOsub rel ok0 1lmf pkO map e tC tmp g Enter the following from the command line C gt 1k78k0 fk0 plk R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 468 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSu
469. ns tab for an assembler source file 7 Save the project 2 1 2 Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project Create a user library The procedure for creating a user library is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one When you create a new project set a library project Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations If there is no subproject the project is always active Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 15 6 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files 4 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler librarian and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 9 Set Create Library Options 5 Run a build Run a build see 2 16 Run a Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 16 4
470. nvert Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a hex file is made with the Output hex file property in the Hex File category To output a hex file select Yes default to not output a hex file select No no Figure 2 49 Output hex file Property Uutput tolder tor hex tile Z2b UuldModeN ame Hex file name ProjectName hex Hex file format Intel expanded hex format kie Split hex file No Remark If you select No no on the Output hex file property when performing object conversion only to output a symbol table file you can reduce the object conversion time When outputting a hex file you can set the output folder and output file name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 40 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for hex file property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholder BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name BuildModeName is set by default 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Hex file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project nam
471. ocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes p Default Yes p How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs an assemble list file No np Does not output an assemble list file Execute list converter Select whether the list converter is executed following the generation of an execution module The list converter is not executed during library generation This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Executes the list converter after the generation of an exe cution module No Does not execute the list converter after the generation of an execution module Output list converter Select whether to output an error list file during list converter execution error list file This corresponds to the e option of the list converter This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected and when No in the Execute list converter property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file during list converter execution No Does not output an error list file during list converter exe cution R20
472. odes and configure the current build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that each project has Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to projects Import Build Options dialog box This dialog box is used to select the target project file for import the build options Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select a folder and retrieve it for the caller Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog box This dialog box is used to select the variables information file for boot area to set in the caller of the dialog box Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the boot area load module file to set in the caller of the dialog box Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 139 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the
473. odule name A JA pAlibrary file nameA Amodule name A A Abbreviated form Function The pick subcommand retrieves a specified module from an existing library file Description The retrieved module becomes an object module file with the file name under which it was registered in the library file An error occurs if the specified module does not exist in the library file If an error occurs processing is interrupted However if an error occurs when two or more modules are specified the modules retrieved before the module which caused the error become valid and are saved onto a disk Example of use To retrieve module m2 from the library file kO lib describe as pick kO lib m2 rel lt Before module retrieval gt kO lib m1 m2 m3 lt After module retrieval gt kO lib m1 m2 m2 m3 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 546 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format list Aoption Alibrary file name A Amodule name A JA 1 Aoption Alibrary file name A Amodule name A A Abbreviated form option public nopublic oAfile name Function The list subcommand outputs information on modules in a library file Description Two or more options can be specified Uppercase characters and lowercase char
474. of a subcommand file are as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 531 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Subcommand name operand data Subcommand name operand data When repeating one subcommand describe amp at the end of each line to indicate continuation Everything described from a semicolon to the end of the line will be assumed to be a comment and will not be interpreted by the librarian command If the last supcommand in a subcommand file is not the exit subcommand the librarian will automatically interpret that an exit subcommand is specified The librarian reads subcommands from the subcommand file and processes them The librarian quits after it completes processing of all subcommands in the subcommand file Example Create a subcommand file kO slb using an editor and then start up the librarian library creation command create k0 lib add k0 lib kOmain rel amp kOsub rel r C gt 1b78k0 lt k0 slb 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the librarian is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K0 Librarian Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message The librarian does not output an execution end message When the user enters the exit subcommand after all processing is complete the librarian returns control to the host
475. of segments output to the load module file load module file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Size of data output to load Displays the size of the data output to the load module file module file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Number of symbols output to Displays the number of symbols output to the load module file load module file Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 3 3 2 Map list The map list outputs data on the location of segments To configure the map list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes on the Output with map list property in the Link List category Memory map 1 SPACE REGULAR MEMORY 2 ROM BASE ADDRESS 3 0000H SIZE 4 2000H 6 OUTPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 BASE 10 SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 11 CSEG 11 CSEG 5 gap MEMORY RAM BASE ADDRESS 3 FEOOH SIZE 4 0200H 6 OUTPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 BASE 10 SIZE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS 5 gap FEOOH DATA FE20H 11 DSEG R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 110 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 5 gap 5 gap Target chip Device File Item Number Not Free Area 12 uPD78xxx 13 Vx xx Description Memory spac
476. of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qh Outputs an object using HL bit No Does not specify the output of an object using HL bit Optimize for debugging Select whether to perform the optimization for debugging This corresponds to the qg option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qg Performs the optimization for debugging No Does not specify performing the optimization for debug ging Note The results of the calculation when the qc option is set are as follows Calculation Target Calculation Result unsigned char type variable and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type unsigned char type variable and signed char type variable unsigned char type signed char type variable and signed char type variable signed char type Constants from 128 to 255 and unsigned char type variable unsigned char type Constants from 128 to 127 and signed char type variable signed char type Constants from 0 to 255 with suffix U and signed char type variable unsigned char type 4 Preprocess The detailed information on the preprocess are displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 179 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional include paths Specify the additio
477. oject For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores all the configuration of the current tab to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 159 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Common Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build Mode 2 Output File Type and Path 3 Frequently Used Options for Compile 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble 5 Frequently Used Options for Link 6 Frequently Used Options for Object Convert 7 Device 8 Build Method 9 Version Select 10 Notes 11 Others Remark If the property in the Frequently Used Options category is changed the value of the property having the same name contained in the corresponding tab will be changed accordingly Category from Common Options Tab Frequently Used Options for Compile category Corresponding Tab Compile Options tab Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Frequently Used Options for Link category Assemble Options tab Link Options t
478. ol A bit X bit PSW bit SFR Names defined as SFRs by EQU directive SFRP Names defined as SFRPs by EQU directive Blank External reference symbol declared by EXTRN or EXTBIT Undefined symbol Symbol reference format Displays the symbol reference format left aligned EXT External reference symbol declared by EXTRN SADDR attribute EXTB External reference symbol declared by EXTBIT saddr bit PUB External reference symbol declared by PUBLIC Blank Local symbol segment name macro name module name Undefined symbol Defined symbol name Displays the defined symbol name left aligned R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 105 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 4 Cross reference list A cross reference list outputs data indicating where on what line symbols are defined in a source To configure the cross reference list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes kx on the Output with cross reference list property in the Assemble List category Cross Reference List 1 NAME 2 VALUE 3 R 4 ATTR 5 RTYP 6 SEGNAME 7 XREFS CSEG CSEG CSEG 21 CODE CSEG CODE 18 CONVAH H E EXT 12 29 DATA DSEG DATA 14 HDTSA FE20H ADDR DATA T5 26 MAIN OH ADDR PUB CODE 11 19 SAMPM MOD 2 START OH R ADDR PUB CSEG
479. omatically 1 Compiler Options tab gt Assembly File category gt Output assemble file property value changes to Yesfw ith no C source infol a 2 Compiler Options tab gt Debug Information category gt Add debug information property value changes Yesl dd to both assembly and object file g2 3 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output assemble list file property value changes to Yes 4 Assemble Options tab gt Assemble List category gt Output with cross reference list property value changes to Yes Assemble Link Opti Object Co Variables AM Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Use memory bank relo Select whether to start the memory bank relocation support tool after link processing cation support tool Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Starts the memory bank relocation support tool after link processing The function information file will be removed from the rapid build target Does not start the memory bank relocation support tool after link processing R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 231 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output function informa Select whether to output the function information file ti
480. ompiler To specify the uUPD78F0511_ 44 as the target device in the C source file prime c describe as pragma pe F051144 define TRUE 1 define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 void main void int i prime k count Next specify the uPD78F0514 as the target device in the command line and then start up the C compiler C gt cc78k0 c014 prime c The target device specification in the command line takes precedence and compilation is executed as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 345 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx xX XXK xXxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation le prime F warning Duplicated chip specifier le prime warning Expected function prototype le prime warning Expected function prototype le prime H warning No return value le prime H warning No return value le prime warning No return value Target chip uPD78014 Device file Vx xx Compilation complete 0 error s and 6 warning s found R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 346 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object module file creation specification The object module file creation specification options are as follows 0 no o no Description format o output file name no Interpretation when omitted o
481. on calls which are not set as callee functions in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box 2 17 5 Change the frame size You can dynamically change the frame size of functions for which the stack usage tracer was not able to obtain stack information or for functions that you intentionally want to modify using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file 1 Using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The procedure for using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box is as follows Select the desired item in the tree display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window then click toolbar gt gt The Adjust Stack Size dialog box opens R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 90 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 127 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size Function Name sut Frame Size Moo Cancel Additional Margin Heset Recursion Depth PO Help m Callee Function List for Indirect Call Callee Functions All Eunctions sub11 4 4 main 576 4 stab1 4 4 sub1 572 424 sub11 4 4 sub12 amp 8 4 sample c sub1 3 4 4 subl 4 4 4 sub2 148 140 sub21 4 4 sub3 8 8 sub31 4 4 After setting Additional Margin Recursion Depth and Callee Functions click the OK button 2 Using a stack size specification file Below is the procedure for using a stack size specification file Create a stack size specification file Write the functions in
482. on file This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the function information file No Does not output the function information file Output folder for func Specify the folder for saving the function information file tion information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This pro
483. on for Sets the current build option to the standard option for the selected project When the Project subproject is added it is not set When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its property is dis played in boldface R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 153 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Import Build Options Opens the Import Build Options dialog box to import the build options from the selected project file Note Set Link Order Opens the Link Order dialog box to display object module files and library files and to setup their link order Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel Note See 2 15 1 Import the build options of other project for details about the import function of the build options 4 When the File node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file exten sion The file is added directly below this node Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The file is added directly below this node
484. on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To use the standard startup routine select Yes Normal Yes For boot area Yes For flash area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure 2 2 Use standard startup routine Property The object file name of the standard startup routine to be used will be displayed on the Using standard startup rou tine property 2 Using other than the standard startup routine Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To use other than the standard startup routine select No on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Yes Normal is selected by default Figure 2 3 Use standard startup routine Property Next add a startup file a file that the startup routine is described to the Startup node on the project tree See 2 3 2 Add a file to a project for the method of adding the file to the project tree R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 14 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 4 Project Tree Panel After Adding Startup File Project Tree x F sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool ez Code Generator Design Tool A CA78K0 Build Tool S 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool amp Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Caution A b
485. one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 64 line Remarks 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Path One path per one line 2 You can also specify the include path by one of the following procedures Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Double click a row in Placeholder 3 Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 40 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths 2 Anc ProjectDir ystem include paths ystem include paths U Macro definition Macro definition 0 To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 35 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Use
486. only the standard folder of the assembler is searched The refer ence point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subprop erties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools If the number of items specified in the System include paths property and in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category on the Individual Assemble Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 201 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths The include paths which the system set during assembling are displayed The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active
487. ons Adjusted Functions System Library Functions of the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box select a function and then click the Adjust Size button R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 329 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Function Name Display the function name of the selected function Remarks 1 If the selected function is written in assembly language or it is a system library function then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 If the selected function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 If the selected function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe selected function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 2 Frame Size Display the frame size not including the stack size of callee functions in bytes of the selected function Remark Ifthe frame size is not known then a question mark 7 is displayed if it is over the maximum limit then SIZEOVER is displayed 3 Additional Margin Specify the value to forcibly add to the selected function in bytes either as a decimal number or as a he
488. ons in the C source file are valid Function The d option specifies the same macro definition as the define statement in the C source file Application Use the d option to replace all the specified constants with the macro names Description Up to 30 macro definitions can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after and If the definition name is omitted the compiler presumes that macro name 1 was defined If the same macro name is specified in both the d and u options the option specified last is valid Example of use The following codes are defined in the C source file prime c define TEST 1 define TIME 10 C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c dTEST TIME 10 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 361 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format umacro name macro name two or more macro names can be specified Interpretation when omitted A macro definition specified with d is valid Function The u option disables macro definitions similar to the undef statement in the C source file Application Use the u option to invalidate the macro name defined by the d option Description Up to 30 macro definitions can be disabled at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after Amacro definition that can be disab
489. ontal axis is not specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The p option is specified so the k option is valid C gt cc78k0 cF051144 e sample c p p Location marked with OK The last option on the horizontal or vertical axis to be specified takes precedence Example The d option is specified last so the u option is invalid and the d option takes precedence C gt cc78k0 cF051144 e sample c utest dtest 1 Blank area If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is valid As with the o no options if two options for which n can be added to the beginning of the option name are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example The no option is specified after the o option so the o option is invalid and the no option is valid C gt cc78k0 cF051144 e sample c o no Options not described in Table B 4 Precedence of Compile Options are not particularly affected by other options However if the help specification option h is specified all of other option specifications become invalid R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 343 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device type specification The device type specification option is as follows Description format cdevice type Interpretation when omitted Cannot be omitted Function The c optio
490. ontext menu described below appears Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 322 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 List display area Display the stack information for a single function function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name in list format Function Displays the function name Note that this area will only display functions from level 1 the selected function and level 2 functions called directly by the selected function Total Stack Size Displays the total stack size including the stack size of callee functions in bytes Frame Size Displays the frame size not including the stack size of callee functions in bytes Additional Margin Displays the value to mandatorily added to frame size in bytes File Displays the file name The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modi fied via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file Recursive function The stack usage tracer
491. ool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a Brie a g Build tool generated files ing sample ImF ma sample map heat sample hex sym sample sym S startup ej main c AQ CA78KO Property Project Tree altel ZE Property B Code Generator Code Generator Preview i Device Pin List lig Device Top View B BuildMode Build mode B Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder E Frequently Used Options for Compie Perform optimization Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition EB Frequently Used Options for Assemble Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition Frequently Used Options for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output file name E Frequently Used Options for Object Convert Output hex file Output folder for hex file Hex file name Hex file format DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File BuildModeName Yes Standard qx2 Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition O Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Using libraries 0 Additional library paths 0 BuildModeName ProjectName Imf Yes BuildModeName ProjectName hex Intel expanded hex format kie Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build Start build all Friday February 18 2011 6 29 17 PM
492. ool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E gF ile zX CED R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 18 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 9 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree x E sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool J Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool T Ce Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File Bem sub asm de link dr Remark The location of the file added below the File node depends on the current file display order setting See 2 3 6 Change the file display order for the method of changing the file display order Cautions 1 If the paths differ you can add source files with the same name Note however that if the set ting of the output file name is left as the default the output files will have the same name which will prevent the build from running correctly for example when adding D sample1 func c and D sample2 func c the default output file name for these files is both func rel To avoid this problems set the output file name for each of those files to a different name with the individual build options for the source files Changing the name of the C source file is made with the Object file name property in the Out put File category from the Individual Compile Options tab Changing the name of the assem bler source file
493. oot area When a library function is called therefore branching does not take place between the boot area and flash area h Interrupt handler Describe the part that calls an interrupt handler in the area where the address of the interrupt handler exists In the following case an interrupt handler function name must also be specified by the pragma interrupt directive Interrupt handler address is in the boot area Interrupt handler body is in the flash area R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 494 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 4 Object Converter The object converter inputs the load module file all reference address data must be determined at this point output by the CA78KO linker It then converts this data into hexadecimal format and outputs it as an object module file The object converter also outputs the symbol information used for symbolic debugging as a symbol table file If an object converter error occurs an error message appears on the display to clarify the cause of the error Figure B 26 1 O Files of Object Converter Load module file Temporary file Object converter Symbol table file Hex file Error list file B 4 1 O files The I O files of the object converter are shown below Table B 11 1 O Files of Object Converter File Name Explanation Default File Type Input files Load module file Binary image file of the object codes output as a
494. operating system create k0 lib xadd k0 lib kOmain rel kOsub rel xexit If the librarian detects a fatal error which makes it unable to continue librarian processing the librarian outputs a message to the display and returns control to the operating system Example A non existent create library option is specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 532 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78KO Librarian Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation RA78K0O error F5018 Option is not recognized z Usage LB78KO options In the above example a non existent create library option is specified An error occurs and the librarian aborts the librarian execution 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set create library options from CubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Create Library Options tab You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 34 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property a CA 78KO Property Output File Output folder BuildModeN ame Output file name ProjectName lib E List File Output list file No Others Output folder Specifies the folder to which the generated libraries are saved The following macro n
495. operty is selected Yes For flash area Links the object module file for the flash area provided with the compiler This item is not displayed when No in the Output objects for flash property is selected Does not link the object module file provided with the compiler Use fixed area used by Select whether to use the fixed area RAM used by standard libraries brk sbrk malloc calloc standard library realloc free exit rand srand div Idiv strtok atof strtod mathematical functions and float ing point runtime library If these functions will not be used the RAM can be conserved by selecting No This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard startup routine property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Uses the fixed area used by the standard library No Does not use the fixed area used by the standard library Using standard startup Displays the file name of the standard startup routine objects used during linking in the current routine settings Nt This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard startup routine property is selected Default Using startup routine file name How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 182 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Naming rules of startup routine files are as
496. option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lf Outputs a form feed code into the end of the link list file No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the link list file Number of lines on 1 Specify the number of lines on 1 page of the link list file page If 0 is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default 66 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number 9 Error List The detailed information on the error list is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 215 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e option of the linker Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes e Outputs an error list file No Does not output the error list file 10 Others Other detailed information on linking are displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed befor
497. option to specify a path where a device file exists Description An abort error occurs if something other than a path name is specified after the y option An abort error occurs if the path name is omitted after the y option The path from which the device file is read is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the y option 2 Path registered in the device file installer 3 Path by which the OC78KO was started up 4 Current folder 5 The environmental variable PATH R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 523 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify the path for the device file as folder C 78k0 dev describe as C gt 0c78k0 kO lmf yC 78k0 dev To specify the path for the device file as folder D device files describe as C gt oc78k0 k0 lmf y D device files R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 524 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE File separate output specification for built in flash memory product The file separate output specification option for built in flash memory product is as follows zf Zf Description format Z Interpretation when omitted Not separately output Function The zf option splits the file into separate files one for the boot area and one for other areas Description When specifying boot ar
498. options in the output message Program Options Displays the program name and command line options in the output message R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 170 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Format of build option list Specify the display format of the build option list see 2 15 4 Display a list of build options This applies to the options of the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the options of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being built If this is blank it is assumed that TargetFiles Program Options has been speci fied Default TargetFiles Program Options How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 256 characters Temporary folder Specify the folder to which the temporary files generated by each command included in the build tool during execution are saved This corresponds to the t option of each command If a relative path is specified the reference
499. or Design Tool B s E Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool S gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File ral Build tool generated files Ime Flash Imf map flash map hx flash hxb had Flash hxf sym flash sym 3X Startup c flash c te link_flash dr veil flash vfi R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 67 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations This section explains operations on a build Import the build options of other project Set the link order of files Change the file build order of subprojects Display a list of build options Change the file build target project Add a build mode Change the build mode Delete a build mode Set the current build options as the standard for the project 2 15 1 Import the build options of other project You can import the build options of other project to the current project On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu The following message dialog box will open Figure 2 92 Message Dialog Box Question Q0202003 p Are you sure you want to import build options A Current whole build options and build modes are replaced by specified project values Click Yes in the dialog box The Import Build Options dialog box will open Figure 2 93 Import Build Options Dialog Box Import
500. ormation The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 175 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Add debug information 2 Optimization APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g option of the compiler If Yes is selected on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab this property will be changed to Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 Default Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Add to object file only g1 Adds debug information to the object module file being generated Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 Adds debug information to the object module file and assembler source module file being gener ated No ng Does not add debug information to the object mod ule file being generated The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Perform optimization 3 Optimization Details Select the type of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the qx option of the compiler Default Yes Stand
501. ormation tab 268 Individual Assemble Options tab 260 Individual Compile Options tab 241 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 579 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Link Options tab 208 Specify Variables Information File for Boot Area dialog Memory Bank Relocation Options tab 231 box 308 Object Convert Options tab 218 Variables Relocation Options tab 228 Public symbol list 111 Q q CC78K0 354 R r CC78K0 348 r LCNV78K0 558 r OC78KO0 517 Rapid build 80 83 rd CC78K0 350 Rebuild 80 83 Relink function 482 replace 545 rk CC78K0 351 rs CC78K0 353 Run a build 80 Runtime library 337 S s LK78K0 449 s OC78K0 516 sa CC78K0 366 Save As dialog box 312 Save Settings dialog box 289 se CC78K0 371 Select Export File dialog box 318 Select Import File dialog box 316 self RA78K0 435 Set assemble options 34 Set compile options 29 Set create library options 42 Set link options 38 Set memory bank relocation options Set object convert options 40 Set variables relocation options 43 sm CC78K0 388 Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box 48 Standard library 337 Subcommands 541 Symbol list 105 System Include Path Order dialog box 287
502. ote that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 296 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress is done Figure A 36 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status o Loading project a 4 J 2 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open This dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message display area Display the message output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes this dialog box Note that if the process termination is impossible this button is disabled R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 297 of 585 Oct
503. ource file registered in the selected main project or sub project Object module files that are directly added to the project tree in the selected main project or subproject Library files that are directly added to the project tree in the selected main project or subproject By default input order to linkers is the order registered in the project You can change the input order by changing the display order of files Use Up or Down buttons or drag and drop the file name to change the display order R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Oct 01 2011 Page 291 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 2 3 b Button When the mouse cursor is hovered over a file name the path of the file appears in a popup If the file is on the same drive as the project file then it appears as the relative path if it is on the different drive then it appears as the absolute path The object module file that is generated from the newly added source file and newly added object module file are added to the end of the module file list The newly added library file is added to the end of the list When the file is dragged and dropped the multiple files that are next to each other can be selected together Moves the selected file to up If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Moves the selected file to down If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Opens the Select I
504. output by the assembler Library file File in which two or more object module files are included File output by the librarian Link directive file File which contain link directives for the linker user created file Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed programs user created file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 438 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output files Load module file Binary image file which contain all information File Name Explanation Default File Type created as a result of linking This file is input to the object converter Link list file List file which display the result of linking map Error list file File containing error information generated elk during linking I O files Temporary file File created automatically by the linker for linking LKxxxxx n B 3 2 1 2 3 4 B 3 3 1 purposes n 1 to 3 Temporary files are deleted when linking ends Functions Joining of input segments The linker determines and controls the location address of each segment The linker identifies identical segments and joins them into a single segment even if they are in separate object module files Determination of input modules When a library file is specified for input the module to which an input object module file refers is retrieved from the library and ha
505. ow Assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9A0000 CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 84 62 95 Absolute assemble list chip initialize 11201A HDTSA 1AH 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R9A9300 CONVAH convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 1421FE DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table 63 A B 95 84 62 95 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 554 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 6 3 Method for manipulating 1 List converter startup The following two methods can be used to start up the list converter a Startup from the command line Current drive name path name Current folder name Icnv78k0 Command name of the list converter option Enter detailed instructions for the operation of the list converter When specifying two or more list convert options separate the options with a blank space Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the list convert options See B 6 4 Option for details about list convert options Enclose a path that includes a space in a pair of double quotation marks input file name Primary name of assemble list E
506. owing placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before assemble process ing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking
507. pecifies the number of lines on 1 page of the list file page If 0 is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default 66 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 and 20 to 32767 decimal number Tab width Specify the tab width of the list file This corresponds to the It option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default 8 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to 8 decimal number Header title Specify the header of the assemble list file A string containing double byte characters and single byte spaces can be specified This corresponds to the Ih option of the assembler This property is not displayed when No np in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 60 single byte characters 30 double byte characters 5 Others Other detailed information on assembly are displayed and the configuration can be changed Kanji character code of Select the Kanji character code of the source source This corresponds to the zs ze and zn options of the assembler Default Shift_JIS zs How
508. perty is not displayed when No in the Output function information file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Function information file Specify the function information file name name Use the extension fin If the extension is omitted fin is automatically added The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank the function information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Output function information file property is selected Default ProjectName fin How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 232 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for replace Specify the folder for saving the replacement information file ment information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different
509. places with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when click ing the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed 2tENESAS Page 165 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the
510. plays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the file name of the stack size specification file to open 4 Files of type area Select the type of file to open Stack Size Specification File txt Text format Function buttons Open Opens the specified file Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 332 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This appendix describes the detailed specifications of each command included in the build tool B 1 C Compiler The C compiler inputs the C source files written in the C language converts them into machine language and output as an object module file After compiling the assembler source files are output so that the user can check and revise the contents at the assembly language level Based on the compile options the list files such as the preprocess list cross reference list and error list are output If there is a compiler error the error message is output to the console and the error list file If errors occur various files other than an error list file cannot be output Figure B 1 I O Files of C Compiler Parameter file C source file Variables information file Function information file Include file 3 OUD Preprocess list file Temporary file Error list file
511. plays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closed the dialog box Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closed the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 283 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path Figure A 30 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line G Browse C Subfolders are automatically included Placeholder Placeholder Value Description a ActiveProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the active projec ActiveProjectName sample Active project name eo 4 BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Pro
512. ported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank the reference information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default ProjectName _refinfo txt How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters 2 Margin The detailed information on the margin is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when No on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category is selected R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 235 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Margin for common area Specify a margin value of the common area for relocation when creating a function information file If a positive value is specified the common area is relocated and considered to become small by the specified value as a margin If a negative value is specified the common area is relo cated and considered to become large by the specified value as a margin Default 1000 How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 65536 to 65536 decimal number Margin for bank XX area Specify a margin value of the bank XX area for relocation when creating a
513. process processing is executed according to the k option process type or to change the output destination or the output file name of the preprocess list file Description If the output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the output file name will be input file name ppl If the extension for the output file name is omitted when the p option is specified the output file name will be output file name ppl If the drive name is omitted when the p option is specified the preprocess list file will be output to the current drive Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To output the preprocess list file sample ppl describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c psample ppl R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 358 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format k process type two or more types can be specified Interpretation when omitted fln Function The k option specifies the processing for the preprocess list Application Use the k option to delete comments and reference definition expansions when the preprocess list file is output Description The process types that can be specified by the k option are shown below Process Type Function No specification It is assumed that the fln has been specified Deletes comments
514. ption General Text Editor category Configure the text editor General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about categories other than General Build Debug 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restore all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Apply all setting and closes this dialog box Ignore the setting and closes this dialog box Applied all setting does not close this dialog box Display the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 299 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 38 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category General 3 Startup and Exit General Build Debug Display 1 a e gt V Enable Rapid Build Extemal Tools PENA ay ae Build Debug If rapid build is made effective build is begun when edited source file is saved
515. ption format r input file name Interpretation when omitted rassemble list file name rel Function The r option specifies the input of an object module file Application Use the r option when the primary name of an object module file is different from the primary name of the assem ble list file or if its file type is not rel Description When a fatal error occurs the absolute assemble list file cannot be output If only the primary name of the input file name is specified the list converter will add rel to the file name as the file type and input the file Example of use If the primary name is different between an assemble list file KOmain prn and an object module file sample rel describe as follows so as to specify the input of a load module file sample rel C gt lcnv78k0 kOmain prn lsample rel R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 558 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Load module file input specification The load module file input specification option is as follows Description format l input file name Interpretation when omitted lassemble list file name mf Function The I option specifies the input of a load module file Application Use the I option when the primary name of a load module file is different from the primary name of the assemble list file or if its file type is not Imf
516. ption is specified the output file name will be input file name elk If the drive name is omitted when the e option is specified the error list file will be output to the current drive If both the e and ne options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To create an error list file kKO elk describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dkO dr ek0 elk An error has occurred in the contents of the link directive file kO dr The contents of the error list file kO elk is as follows kO dr 3 RA78KO error E3102 Directive syntax error R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 464 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library file specification The library file specification option is as follows p Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The b option specifies that the specified file is to be input as a library file Application The linker retrieves the module referenced by the input module from a library file and joins only that module to the input module The purpose of a library file is to register two or more modules in a single file By creating library files that can be used in common with many programs file management and operation become easier and more efficient Use the b option to input the library file to the linker Description The file name is cannot be omit
517. ptions tab R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 37 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Set Link Options To set options for the linker select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for library projects Figure 2 44 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A CA78KO Property E Debug nformaton Add debug information E Input File E Output File Output folder BuildModeName Output file name ProjectN ame Imf Force linking against error No E Library Using libraries Using libraries 0 System libraries System libraries 0 Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 Device Message Stack Link List Error List Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option n F A j r Common Compile say il Object Co Variables Memory AJ Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 7 1 Add a user library Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Adding a user library is made with the
518. put folder for hex file APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the folder for saving the hex file This corresponds to the o option of the object converter If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholder is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Hex file name Hex file format 7 Device Specify the hex file name This corresponds to the o option of the object converter The extension can be freely specified The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output hex file property is selected Default How to change Restriction ProjectName hex Directly enter to the tex
519. puters office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfun
520. r 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Figure 2 115 Rebuild active project Item a Ffsam le Project uPD78F0588_46 SL Build samp A Pin Configurat amp r t Rebuild sample a P Code Generator Clean sample Ay CA78K0 Build Tod os 78KO Simulator D Open Folder with Explorer Th Ce Program Analyzer Add E Ei File 1E FE Save Project and Development Tools as Package 3 a Rename F2 Property 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations CubeSuite can automatically start a build when one of the following events occurs hereafter referred to as rapid build When any one of the following files that are added to the project is updated C source file assembler source file header file link directive file variables information file function information file object module file and library file When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files and library files is changed When the property of the build tool or build target file is changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 83 of 585 Oct 01 2
521. r area Description If the size is omitted it is assumed that 256 has been specified See QB MINI2 On Chip Debug Emulator with Programming Function U18371 Eu for details about the size of the debug monitor area An abort error occurs if something other than a numerical value is specified When the go option is specified the area of addresses 02H to 03H and the area from 8FH to the specified size 1 are the debug monitor area and segments cannot be allocated there An error occurs if this option is specified for a device that does not have an on chip debug function Example of use Reserve addresses 8FH to 18FH 256 bytes 1 byte as the debug monitor area C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel go256 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 475 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Security ID specification The Security ID specification option is as follows S gi gi Description format gisecurity ID Interpretation when omitted A security ID is not set Function The gi option specifies a security ID Application Use the gi option to set a security ID Description The range that can be specified for the security ID is OH to OH to OPFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFH Specify a hexadecimal value that ends with H An abort error occurs if any other value is omitted Specify a security ID within 10 bytes If the specified value is less than 10 byte
522. r is supported BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is treated as if the project folder is specified This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Hex file name Hex file format Specify the hex file name This corresponds to the o option of the object converter The extension can be freely specified The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default How to change Restriction ProjectName hex Directly enter to the text box Up to 259 characters Select the format of the hex file to be generated This corresponds to the k option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default Intel expanded hex format kie How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel standard hex format ki Specify the Intel standard hex format as the forma
523. r source file creation specification option sa To configure the assembler source file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab In the Assembly File category set the Output an assemble file property to Yes The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property 78KO C Compiler V 1 x xx Assembler Source Date 2 xx Xxx xxxx Time 3 xx xx xx Command 4 cF051144 prime c sa In file 5 prime c Asm file 6 prime asm gt Para file 7 SPROCESSOR 8 F051144 9 SDEBUG 10 SNODEBUGA 11 SKANJICODE SJIS 12 STOL_INF O3FH 0330H 02H OZOH OOH 13 DGS FIL_NAM file 034H OFFFEH O3FH 067H 01H OOH EXTRN _ RTARGO 16 define TRUE 16 define FALSE 16 define SIZE 14 _main 17 DGL R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 92 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 push push push push 8 bf_main i smp78k0 CC78K0 prime c 24 SFUNC main 8 25 be CODE SIZE void 26 27 CALL printf 18 28 be putchar 20 be int E printf 25 be printf 313 be CODE SIZE 3 24 FUNC putchar 41 25 be CODE SIZE 26 Target chip Device file 20 Vx xx Desc
524. rary file in the specified drive and folder Function expansion specification Enables the processing for extended functions Device file search path specification Specifies paths that search device files Static model specification sm Specifies that the object is a static model or normal model Common object specification common Specifies the output of an object common to the 78K0 Variables information file specification ma Specifies a variables information file Function information file specification Specifies that the functions are allocated to a code block larger than 64 KB using the file Help specification 2 Precedence Outputs a help message on the display For the compile options shown in the following table the precedence is explained in a case where two or more options along the vertical axis and options along the horizontal axis are specified at the same time Table B 4 Precedence of Compile Options R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 342 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Location marked with NG If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The rd and g options are invalid C gt ec78k0 cF051144 e sample c no rd g Location marked with A If an option in the horiz
525. rated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option Assemble Object Co Variables R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 442 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 B 3 4 Option 1 Types APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The link options are detailed instructions for the operation of the linker The types and explanations for link options are shown below Classification Load module file output specification Table B 9 Link Options Description Specifies the output of a load module file Forced load module file output specification Forces the output of a load module file Debug information output specification Specifies that debug information is to be added to a load module file Stack decision symbols generation specification Automatically generates public symbols for stack decision Link directive file specification Inputs the specified file as a link directive file Link list file output specification Specifies the output of a link list file Link list file information specification Outputs a map list into a link list file Outputs a link directive file into a link list file Outputs a public symbol list into a link list file Outputs a local symbol list into a link list file Link list file format specification Changes the number of lines printed per page in
526. rd addresses are composed of records SO S2 and S8 The 32 bit addresses are composed of records SO S3 and S7 Header record S0 is optional and is not output A CR character is placed at the end of each S record The general formats and their meanings for each field in each record are shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 504 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Table B 22 General Format for Each Record Record Type General Format SOXXYY YYZZZZ S2XXWWWWWWDD DDZZ S3XXWWWWWWWWDD DDZZ S7XXWWWWWWWWZZ S8XXWWWWWWZZ Table B 23 Meanings of Fields Field Meaning Record type Length of data record Number of bytes in the address hexadecimal data and check sum File name ASCII code for the input file name expressed as a hexadecimal Wwwwwww WW 24th 32th bit address DD DD Hexadecimal data 1 byte of data expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal Check sum The lower 1 byte of complement 1 for the sum for each byte of the record length address and the hexadecimal data expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal OORFI D4520A20 4 Item Description Number Record type Record length Load address 24 bit address Hexadecimal data Check sum SO record SO XX YYYYYYYY ZZ 1 2 3 4 Record type R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 505 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00
527. re A 10 Property Panel Variables Relocation Options Tab Property A CA78K0 Property E Output File Output variables information file No O ROM RAM Amount Infomation Output ROM RAM usage No Output variables information fle Selects whether to output a variables information file by using the file variables information file generator If Yes is selected in this field executes commands in the following order The compiler and the assembler are executed twice by one build processing The order 1 Compiler C478K0 2 Assembler RA 8KO 3 Variables information file generator F78K0 4 Compiler CA 8K0 ma 5 AssemblerlRA 8KO 6 Linker LK 8K0 7 Object converter OC78KO Common Compile Assemble Link Opti Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output variables infor Select whether to output the variables information file mation file Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the variables information file No Does not output the variables information file The variables information file will be removed from the rapid build target R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 228 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for vari Specify the folder for saving the variables in
528. re as follows 2 NZ Z NZ Description format ztype two or more types can be specified a Interpretation when omitted nz Function The z option enables extended functions The nz option disables the z option type is cannot be omitted A fatal error F0012 occurs if the specification is omitted Application The functions for processing by the following type specifications are available for the 78KO extended functions Description The type specifications of the z option is as follows Type Specification Description The characters after before the line feed code are interpreted as a comment Nesting of comments is permitted Interprets the kanji code in comments as SuJIS Interprets the kanji code in comments as EUC Interprets comments as not containing kanji codes char unsigned char type argument and return value are not int extended R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 384 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Type Specification Description Functions not in the ANSI standard are invalid The portion of functions in the ANSI standard are valid Specifically the following tasks are performed The following are no longer reserved words callt callf noauto norec sreg bit ooolean asm endasm The trigraph sequence 3 character representation is valid The compiler defined macro __ STDC__ is r
529. rea No Does not allocate external variables to the saddr area The detailed information on list files are displayed and the configuration can be changed Output preprocess list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Select whether to output the preprocess file This corresponds to the p option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes p Outputs the preprocess list file No Does not output the preprocess list file 7tENESAS Page 194 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Not output comments Select whether to disable to output comments into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kc option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kc Does not output comments into the preprocess list file No Outputs comments into the preprocess list file Expand define prepro Select whether to expand the define directive into the preprocess list file cessor directive This corresponds to the kd option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kd Expands the de
530. ready exists the build will be configured to use it Figure 2 78 Output variables information file Property in Boot Area Variables information file name ProjectName vei Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the output folder and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree b Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select No on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure 2 79 Output objects for flash Property in Boot Area E Memory Model Output objects for flash Use prologue epiloque library No Next select Yes For boot area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure 2 80 Use standard startup routine Property in Boot Area Use standard startup routine Use fixed area used by standard library Yes For boot area c Set link options Select the Link Options tab In the Device category if you select Yes zb on the Set flash start address property the Flash start address property is displayed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 62 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Specifies the start addre
531. reation path specification Creates a temporary file in the specified path Kanji code 2 byte code specification zS Interprets Kanji described in the comment as Shift JIS code Ze Interprets Kanji described in the comment as EUC code zn Characters described in the comment are not interpreted as kanji Device file search path specification y Reads a device file from a specified path Symbol definition specification d Defines symbols Common object specification common Specifies the output of an object module file common to the 78K0 Self programming specification self Specifies when using self programming Help specification Outputs a help message on the display R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 399 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Precedence For the assemble options shown in the following table the precedence is explained in a case where two or more options along the vertical axis and options along the horizontal axis are specified at the same time Table B 7 Precedence of Assemble Options Location marked with NG If an option in the horizontal axis is specified the option in the vertical axis is invalid Example The Iw and If options are invalid C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm np lw80 1f Location marked with A If all t
532. recedence 2 Onth Yes Speed precedence qx1 Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Perform optimization property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 3 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 28 Additional include paths Property Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 30 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 29 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line F Aine ProjectDir Browse C Subfolders are automatically included Placeholder Placeholder Value ActiveProjectDir D work sample ActiveProjectName sample Active project name BuildModeName DefaultBuild Build mode name MainProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the main project MainProjectName sample Main project name MicomT oolPath C Program Files Absolute path of the CubeSuite ProjectDir D work sample Absolute path of the project folder v lt Description cad Absolute path of the active projec Enter an include path per line in Path One p
533. red Outputs a left aligned value with zeroes suppressed 3 Type of error Outputs the type of error 4 Error number Outputs error numbers in the mnnn format 2 is output if m is an assembler 3 if it is a linker 4 if is an object converter 5 if is a librarian and 6 if it is a list converter nnn is the error number 5 Error message Outputs error messages Remark The file name and the line where the error occurred may not be displayed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 108 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 3 Linker The linker outputs the following lists Output List File Name Output List Name Link list file Link list file headers Map list Public symbol list Local symbol list Error list file Error list To configure the link list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Link Options tab Select Yes on the Output link list file property in the Link List category To output the error list file in the Error List category set the Output error list file property to Yes e The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node Re
534. reference type global variable and const variable for the boot area variable name number of references size reference type const boot global variable for the boot area variable name number of references size reference type boot Remark Describe variables in the order of priority from highest to lowest Comment out the lines for variables and functions that are not to be allocated by adding a semicolon at the beginning of the line b Set the generation of the variables information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel Select No on the Output variables information file property Figure 2 56 Output variables information file Property Output variables information file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 46 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Runa build of the project Run a build of the project A load module file is generated with the variables allocated as specified in the variables information file Caution If a file with an extension of vfi is added to the project it is treated as a variables information file It is also treated as a variables information file if it is added below the Startup node When adding a variables information file to the project if a variables information file has already been added then only the latest variables information file to be added is targe
535. regardless of the position in which it is specified If the no option is specified the ga option is invalid Cautions A control instruction DEBUGA NODEBUGA with the same function as the ga and nga options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASADEBUGA ASANODEBUGA Example of use To add assembler source debug information to an object module file KOmain rel describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ga R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 406 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Include file read path specification The include file read path specification option is as follows Description format ipath name path name two or more path names can be specified Interpretation when omitted The include file is searched in the following sequence 1 Path where the source file exists 2 Path specified by environmental variable INC78KO Function The i option specifies that an include file specified by include in a source is to be input from a specified path Application Use the i option to search an include file from a certain path Description Two or more path names can be specified at once by separating them with A space cannot be entered before or after The include file specified by include is searched in the following sequence 1 If two
536. regardless of the boot area or flash area include that file in all the C source files 2 14 2 Set the boot area project 1 Create the boot area project Create a project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Figure 2 77 Boot Area Project Project Tree MeN BEE boot Project J uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool E eij Code Generator Design Tool A CA78K0 Build Tool S gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 3 0 File s Startup c boot c arj link_boot dr R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 61 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set the build options for the boot area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and set each of the build options on the Property panel a Set variables relocation options Set the variables relocation options to generate a variablesinformation file and use it to allocate variables Select the Variables Relocation Options tab In the Output File category set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark If a variables information file with the same name al
537. replaced boot area there are occasions when you can use the area which can be rewritten replaced flash area such as the flash or external ROM In these kinds of systems when you wish to change the program in the flash area a function called the relink function correctly performs function calls between the boot area and flash area without rebuilding the program in the boot area By creating load module files for the boot area and flash area you can implement the relink function The method to implement the relink function is shown below Remark See B 3 5 Booi flash relink function for details about the relink function and how to implement it 2 14 1 Prepare the build target files 1 Prepare the link directive files Prepare link directive files for the projects for both the boot area and flash area Remark You can use the same link directive file with the boot area and flash area but since the description will become complicated it is recommend to use a separate link directive file for each area 2 Describe the pragma ext_func directive Describe the pragma ext_func directive in the C source file With the ext_func directive specify the ID value for the target function the actual function exists in the flash area and is called from the boot area Remark In order to prevent description mistakes and inconsistencies between source files it is recommend that you organize the ext_func directive description in a single file and
538. result of linking File output by the linker Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed commands user created file Output files Hex file File created by converting the load module file into hexadecimal object format These files are used during mask ROM development and PROM program use Symbol table file File containing the symbol information included in each module of an input files Error list file File containing error information generated during object conversion R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 495 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 4 2 1 2 3 Functions How the object converter handles extended space When a code is output to segments located in extended memory space the object converter generates a separate hex file for each space To output a separate hex file to each space specify the space for both memory and merge directives in the link directive file See CubeSuite 78KO Coding for details about the link directive The object converter also generates a symbol table file for each space when symbols having ADDRESS or BIT attributes are defined for segments located in extended space All symbols having NUMBER attributes are output to symbol table file generated for normal space The file types of the hex files and symbol table files generated for extended space are shown below Table B 12 Output Fi
539. riables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel Set the Output variables information file property to Yes to generate an empty variables information file and add it to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property Remark If a variables information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 43 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 53 Output variables information file Property der for variables information file Variables information file name ProjectName vfi Figure 2 54 Project Tree Panel After Generating Variables Information File Project Tree EJ R sample Project J uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool LB Ce Program Analyzer Analyze Tool op File yy Startup c wil sample vfi The settings of the output folder and file of the variables information file are can be changed lt 1 gt Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for variables information file property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters
540. ription Version number 218 bytes pointer ax pointer char c CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 22 Code Information 23 FILE C Program Files Renesas Electronics CubeSuite CA78K0 Vx xx CLOCK_SIZE 678 clocks STACK_SIZE 14 bytes int sp 2 pointer 116 clocks S tax int i sp 2 r 0 bytes CLOCK_SIZE STACK_SIZE x 14 bytes CLOCK_SIZE 58 clocks STACK_SIZE 19 uPD78F0511_44 Format Displayed in x yz format Date System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format Time System time Displayed in HH MM SS format Command line Outputs the command line contents following CC78K0 Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 One or more white space characters or tabs are replaced by a single white space character R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 93 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Description C source file name CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Format Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 15 on the next line A semicolon is output to column 1 Assembler source file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted asm is attached as the file type extension Contents
541. rm feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in Specify the number of characters in each line of list files preprocess list file error list file and 1 line cross reference list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 72 to 132 decimal number R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 256 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Number of lines on 1 Specify the number of lines on 1 page of list files preprocess list file error list file and cross page reference list file If 0 is specified no page breaks will be made This corresponds to the Il option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to t
542. rmation file and take a relevant action if functions that satisfy the following conditions are found When the function is not referenced from other files If the relevant function is the global function change it to the static function When the function is not referenced from other files nor from the file in which the function is described Delete the function Caution The function for which above action be taken shall not be called in the implicit way such as an indirect function call using a function pointer or a call from object module file library file that do not have source files which can not be known from assemble list file b Set the output of the function information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab on the Property panel To use the memory bank relocation support tool select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output category Select No on the Output function information file property R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 54 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 67 Use memory bank relocation support tool and Output function information file Property AO i Yes Output function information file No Output folder for replacement information file BuildModeName Replacement information file name ProjectName _replace txt Output folder for object information file Bu
543. rmed To start up the object converter from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the object converter from a parameter file as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 509 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE X gt o0c78k0 Aload module file A fparameter file f Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the object converter Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the load module file name is omitted from the command line only 1 load module file name can be specified in the parameter file The load module file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all object convert options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kO poc using an editor and then start up the object converter parameter file kO 1lmf osample hex ssample sym r C gt ra78k0 fkOmain pra 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the object converter is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K0 Object Converter Vx xx xx XXX xxxx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation b Execution end message If it detects no obj
544. rnal reference symbol declared by EXTRN SADDR attribute EXTB External reference symbol declared by EXTBIT saddr bit PUB External reference symbol declared by PUBLIC Blank Local symbol segment name macro name module name Undefined symbol Defined segment name Displays a segment name that a symbol is defined left aligned Definition reference line Displays the definition reference line number number Definition line xxxxx Reference line xxxxx A A 1 blank EXTRN declaration EXTBIT declaration PUBLIC declaration xxxxx 3 2 5 Error list An error list stores the error messages output when the assembler is started up PASS1 Start ERROR ASM 2 26 3 error 5 Illegal operand 1 ERROR ASM 2 32 3 error 5 Illegal operand PASS2 Start ERROR ASM 2 26 RA78KO 5 Illegal operand ERROR ASM 2 29 RA78KO 5 Undefined symbol reference DTSA ERROR ASM 2 29 RA78K0 5 Illegal expression ERROR ASM 2 32 RA78KO 5 Illegal operand ERROR ASM 2 37 RA78KO 5 Undefined symbol reference F ERROR ASM 2 37 RA78KO 5 Illegal expression R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 107 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Description Format 1 Name of source file in which Outputs the name of source file in which error occurred error occurred 2 Line on which error occur
545. rocessing before making library Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name LibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before library generation processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before making library processing number of defined
546. roject have c Defined macros Show defined macros separated with configured for the combination of the main project and the subproject and their build modes in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab in the Property panel Note that the defined macro in Compile Option comes before the one in Assemble Option and they are sepa rated with Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and executes a batch build of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the build are displayed on the Output panel After the batch build is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Rebuild Closes this dialog box and executes a batch rebuild of the selected projects in the respec tive build modes The execution result of the rebuild are displayed on the Output panel After the batch rebuild is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened Note that this buttons is disabled when any project is not selected Closes this dialog box and deletes the files built in the respective build modes set for the selected projects The execution result of the clean are displayed on the Output panel After the clean is complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dia log was opened N
547. roject or subproject 2 The category node is copied not moved when the it is dropped between the different project or in the main project or subproject in same project Note that the individual option set in each file contained in the category node is not retained f Add folders You can add folders from Explorer or the like by the following procedure The folders are added under the File node The folders are added as categories Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it over its destination The Add Folder and File dialog box opens Specify the file types and subdirectory levels in the folder to add Caution You cannot drag and drop folders and files into this area simultaneously g Modify the display order of the subprojects placed in order of build The subproject is displayed in order of build from the top Therefore the order of build can be changed by changing the display order of the subprojects The project must be built from the subproject then the main project h Configure the standard build option When the standard build option is changed the property is displayed in boldface in the Property panel R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 148 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE You can change the standard build option to the current setting cancel boldface by the following procedure Select the Build tool node and then select Set to Default Build Option for Project
548. roperty E Build Set as build target Yes File type Function information Set as build target Selects whether to build this file le Information Figure A 17 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Object File Property reil obj rel Property El Build Set as build target File type Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Figure A 18 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Library File Property lib user lib Property E Build Set as build target Yes File type Library Set as build target Selects whether to build this file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 238 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Build The detailed information on the build are displayed and the configuration can be changed Set as build target Select whether to build the selected file Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Builds the selected file No Does not build the selected file Set individual compile option Select whether to set a compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file This property is displayed only when a C source file is selected on the Project Tree panel and Yes is selected in the Set as build target property Default No
549. roperty in Flash Area E Yariables Information Fie Ga Variables information file for boot area boot D efaultBuild boot vfi c Set link options Add the created boot area load module file in 2 14 2 Set the boot area project to the flash area project Select the Link Options tab Specify the boot area load module file on the Boot area load module file name property in the Device category Figure 2 89 Boot area load module file name Property in Flash Area E Device Use on chip debug No Set user option byte No Boot area load module file name boot D efaultB uild boot Imf EJ d Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select Yes zf on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category Figure 2 90 Split hex file Property in Flash Area E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeName Hex file name ProjectName hex 3 Run a build of the flash area project When you run a build of the flash area project a load module file which implements the relink function is created The boot area hex file the same content as the file created in 2 14 2 Set the boot area project and flash area hex file are also created R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 66 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 91 Created Files for Flash Area Project Tree uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller H A Pin Configurat
550. ror occurs the object module file cannot be output If the drive name is omitted when the o option is specified the object module file will be output to the current drive If the output file name is omitted when the o option is specified the output file name will be input file name rel If both the o and no options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid Example of use To output a hex file Sample rel describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm osample rel R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 402 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Forced object module file output specification The forced object module file output specification options are as follows j nj j nj Description format Interpretation when omitted nj Function The j option specifies that the object module file can be output even if a fatal error occurs The nj option disables the j option Application Normally when a fatal error occurs the object module file cannot be output When you wish to execute the program with a notice that a fatal error has occurred specify the j option to output the object module file Description When the j option is specified the object module file will be output even if a fatal error occurs If both the j and nj options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid
551. ross reference list file list file This corresponds to the x option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes x Outputs the cross reference list file No Does not output the cross reference list file Output with form feed Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of list files preprocess list file error list control code file and cross reference list file This corresponds to the If option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes lf Outputs a form feed code into the end of the list files No Does not output a form feed code into the end of the list files Number of characters in Specify the number of characters in each line of list files preprocess list file error list file and 1 line cross reference list file This corresponds to the Iw option of the compiler This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output error list file property is selected or when Yes p in the Output preprocess list file property is selected or when Yes x in the Output cross reference list file property is selecte
552. routinize same codes use stack access libraries ql5 Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library In addition common code is placed in subrou tines and the library for the stack access is used Under the Memory Model category setting the Use static model property to Yes has the same effect as selecting Yes Replace whole instructions ql4 2tENESAS Does not specify replacing the fixed code with the library Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence Page 178 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output object using Select whether to generate the code using HL B addressing when the index used for the ref HL B instruction erence of the char unsigned char type arrays and char unsigned char type pointers is an unsigned char type variable This corresponds to the ge option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qe Generates the code using HL B addressing No Does not specify generating the code using HL B addressing Output object using Select whether to output an object using HL bit HL bit instruction This corresponds to the qh option
553. rresponds to the i option of the compiler The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when click ing the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the u option of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter
554. rresponds to the kl option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Yes kl How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kl Performs output by expanding line directives into the pre process list file No Does not expand the line directive into the preprocess list file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 195 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output line numbers Select whether to output line numbers into the preprocess list file This corresponds to the kn option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No in the Output preprocess list file property is selected Default Yes kn How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kn Outputs line numbers into the preprocess list file No Does not output line numbers into the preprocess list file Output error list file Select whether to output the error list file This corresponds to the e and se options of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Without C source e Outputs the error list file without C source Yes With C source se Outputs the error list file with C source No Does not output the error list file Output cross reference Select whether to output the c
555. rror list file with the file type of er is output If an error does not occur the C source is not added In this case the error list file is not created for the include file If the w0 option is specified warning messages cannot be output Cautions When using CubeSuite it is not possible to change the name of the output file Example of use To add the C source file prime c to the error list file prime cer describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c se Output example is shown below R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 371 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx Error List Date xx xxx xxxx Time xx xx xx Command cF051144 prime c se In file prime c Err file prime cer Para file 7 define TRUE ai define FALSE 0 define SIZE 200 char mark SIZE 1 void main void prime i i 3 printf S6d prime CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype count if count 8 0 putchar n CC78KO warning W0745 Expected function prototype for k i prime k lt SIZE k prime R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 372 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cross reference list file creation specification The cross reference list file creation specification options are as follows X Description format
556. rs Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools If the number of items specified in the System include paths property and in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category on the Individual Compile Options tab together total more than 64 then an error will occur under build execution R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 180 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System include paths The include paths which the system set during compiling are displayed The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This co
557. rts a multi plier and divider Using standard libraries Display the file name and numbers of the standard libraries used during linking in the current settings The linking library file name is displayed as the subproperty Ne This property is not displayed when No in the Use standard library property is selected Default Using standard libraries number of using standard libraries How to change Changes not allowed Note Naming rules of library files are as follows cl10 lt mul gt lt model gt lt float gt lt pascal gt lt flash gt lib lt mul gt When the multiplier and divider are not used When the multiplier and divider are used lt model gt When the memory model is the normal model When the memory model is the static model lt float gt R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 184 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE When the standard I O library supported floating point data is used lt pascal gt None When the pascal function interface is not used r When the pascal function interface is used lt flash gt None When the object for the standard or for the boot area is generated e When the object for the flash area is generated 7 Message The detailed information on messages are displayed and the configuration can be changed Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution statu
558. rtup and displays the calling relationship between func tions and function level stack information in its main window Consequently changes to the calling relationship between functions or function level stack information e g adding files changing compiler options or modifying the source code will not be reflected in this window Functions analyzed The stack usage tracer only analyzes functions contained in assembly files with debugging information output by the C compiler as intermediate files and in library files provided by the build tool Consequently functions in assembly files written by the user and library files created by the user are not analyzed For this reason the infor mation for these files must be set using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Icon display colors Display priorities High to Low _ are assigned to icons displayed in the tree display area list display area in the window Consequently you must be aware that even if the J icon function called directly by same func tion with greatest total stack size is displayed information with relatively low priority such as the icon frame size unknown will be hidden by the GUI Determining the maximum stack size When the stack usage tracer searches for the path with the largest stack size it assumes that functions that are not analyzed have a stack size of zero Consequently when determining the maximum stack size you must make sure that there are no func
559. rty supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder BuildModeName is set by default lt 2 gt Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Function information file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box This property supports the following placeholders ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name ProjectName Replaces with the project name ProjectName fin is set by default If this property is changed an empty function information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the Files node of the project tree b Set the output of auxiliary information files Set the output of auxiliary information files
560. rwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this
561. ry In addition common code is placed in subrou tines and the library for the stack access is used Does not specify replacing the fixed code with the library Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence Output object using HL B instruction Select whether to generate the code using HL B addressing when the index used for the ref erence of the char unsigned char type arrays and char unsigned char type pointers is an unsigned char type variable This corresponds to the qe option of the compiler This property is not displayed when No on the Use static model property in the Memory Model category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qe Generates the code using HL B addressing No Does not specify generating the code using HL B addressing Output object using HL bit instruction R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Select whether to output an object using HL bit This corresponds to the qh option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qh Outputs an object using HL bit No 2tENESAS Does not specify the output of an object using HL bit Page 245 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A
562. ry file A library file can be input to the linker By creating a library file consisting of modules common to many programs users can make file management and operation efficient and easy when performing modular programming Editing of library files The librarian incorporates the following editing functions for library files Addition of modules to library files Deletion of modules from library files Replacement of modules in library files Retrieval of modules from library files See B 5 5 Subcommands for details about these functions Output of library file information The librarian incorporates functions for the editing and output of the following items of information stored in library files Module names Created programs Date of registration Date of update PUBLIC symbol information Caution The librarian performs functions 2 and 3 explained above using subcommands The librarian carries out the process while explaining each subcommand in order See B 5 5 Subcom mands the operation of subcommands The general procedure for creating library files is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 529 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE START gt Creation of library file i gt Registration of object module file 7 Update or retrieval of object on module file pick subcommand Output of library file information list subcommand
563. s C gt cc78k0 cF051144 rdl R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 350 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rk nr Description format Interpretation when omitted nr Function The rk option specifies to assign a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area The nr option disables the rk option Application In a static model use the rk option to assign a function argument and auto variable except for the static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is an sreg declaration or not Description Variables to be assigned change depending on the value of n and the specification of m Specification of n m Variable Types to Be Assigned to saddr Area When n 1 char unsigned char When n 2 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used When n 4 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers m Structure union array Omitted All variables The register declared variable cannot be assigned The sreg declared variable is assigned to the saddr area regardless of the rk option specification The function argument and auto variable assigned to the saddr area by specifyin
564. s the higher bits are filled with 0 The security ID is set at addresses 85H to 8EH If a security ID is set no segment can be allocated at addresses 85H to 8EH An abort error occurs if this option is specified for a device that does not have a security ID function Asecurity ID can also be specified by defining the segment with relocation attributes shown below in the assembler source file However be sure to specify SECUR_ID as the relocation attribute of the segment Any segment name CSEG SECUR_ID DB 11H Address DB 22H Address DB 33H Address DB 44H Address DB 55H Address DB 66H Address DB 77H Address DB 88H Address DB 99H Address DB Address If specification of the assembler source file and specification of this option are made in duplicate this option takes precedence R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 476 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cautions If this option is not specified for a device that has a security ID function any code may be allocated Example of use To specify the same 112233445566778899aah as the specification in the above assembler source file describe as c gt 1x78x0 kOmain rel gil12233445566778899aah R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 477 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE User option byte specification The user option byte specificatio
565. s a unsigned char Optimize branch instruc tion Select whether t This correspond o optimize branch instructions s to the qj option of the compiler Default Yes qj How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes qj Optimizes branch instructions No Does not specify optimizing branch instructions Replace fixed code to library Size precedence optimization R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Select whether to replace the fixed code with the library This corresponds to the ql option of the compiler Default Yes Do not replace ql1 How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Do not replace ql1 Does not replace the fixed code with the library Performs optimization with the module size pre cedence Yes Replace only pro cess before after func tion ql2 Replaces only the processing routines before and after the function with a library Yes Replace load store and indirect referencing instruction and equiva lent of ql2 ql3 Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code with a library Yes Replace whole instructions ql4 Replaces the processing routines before and after the function long type load store and DE HL indirect reference code in one instruction unit with a library Yes sub
566. s a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Final error line R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 2tENESAS Page 104 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 2 3 Symbol list A symbol list outputs the symbols including local symbols defined in a source To configure the symbol list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes ks on the Output with symbol list property in the Assemble List category Symbol Table List 1 VALUE 2 ATTR 3 RTYP 4 NAME 1 VALUE 2 ATTR 3 RTYP 4 NAME CSEG CSEG CSEG CODE EXT CONVAH DSEG DATA FE20H ADDR HDTSA OH ADDR PUB MAIN MOD SAMPM OH ADDR PUB START FE21H ADDR STASC Item Description Number Symbol value Displays a value with a symbol Outputs a right aligned hexadecimal number with zeros suppressed Symbol attributes Displays the symbol attributes left aligned CSEG Code segment name DSEG Data segment name BSEG Bit segment name MAC Macro name MOD Module name SET Symbol defined by SET directive NUM NUMBER attribute symbol ADDR ADDRESS attribute symbol BIT BIT attribute symbol addr bit SABIT BIT attribute symbol saddr bit SFBIT BIT attribute symbol sfr bit RBIT BIT attribute symb
567. s for build options for a project main project or subproject select the Build tool node on the project tree to display the Property panel Select the component tabs and set build options by setting the necessary properties Compiler Compile Options tab Assembler and list converter Assemble Options tab Linker Link Options tab Object converter Object Convert Options tab Librarian Create Library Options tab Variables information file generator Variables Relocation Options tab Memory bank relocation support tool Memory Bank Relocation Options tab 2 12 2 Set build options at the file level You can individually set compile and assemble options for each source file added to the project 1 When setting compile options for a C source file Select a C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel In the Build category if you select Yes on the Set individual compile option property the message dialog box Figure 2 69 Message Dialog Box is displayed Figure 2 68 Set individual compile option Property Are you sure you want to set the current compile options to the individual compile options If you click the Yes button in the dialog box the Individual Compile Options tab will be displayed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 56 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 70 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab
568. s of the compiler to the Output panel during build This corresponds to the v option of the compiler Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes v Displays the execution status of the compiler during build No Does not display the execution status of the compiler dur ing build Warning level 8 Extension Select the warning display level under compiling This corresponds to the w option of the compiler Default How to change Restriction Normal output Select from the drop down list No output w0 Does not output warning messages Normal output Outputs normal warning messages Particular output w2 Outputs detailed warning messages The detailed information on extensions are displayed and the configuration can be changed Allow C format com ments Select whether to allow the use of C format comments This corresponds to the zp option of the compiler Default Yes zp How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zp Allows the use of C format comments No Does not allow the use of C format comments R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 7tENESAS Page 185 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Allow nested comments Select whether to allow the nest use of comments This corresponds to the zc
569. s to the kl option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kl Outputs local symbol list information to the link list file No Does not output local symbol list information to the link list file Output with public sym Select whether to output public symbol list information to the link list file bol list This corresponds to the kp option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes kp Outputs public symbol list information to the link list file No Does not output public symbol list information to the link list file Output with map list Select whether to output map list information to the link list file This corresponds to the km option of the linker This property is not displayed when No in the Output link list file property is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs map list information to the link list file No nkm Does not output map list information to the link list file Output with form feed Select whether to output a form feed code into the end of the link list file control code This corresponds to the lf
570. s with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed before assemble process ing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 206 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble process Use the call instru
571. s with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 199 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFE
572. s with the project name If this is blank the replacement information file is not output This property is not displayed when No in the Use memory bank relocation support tool property is selected Default ProjectName _replace txt How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 233 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for object Specify the folder for saving the object information file information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir
573. scription Format Function information function Outputs the function name name Function information number Outputs the number of references of the function of references Function information Outputs the reference type of the function reference type normal 1 changes from the normal area to the callt area sreg 0 Already allocated to the callt area Function information file Outputs the target source file name surrounded by quotation marks name Although static functions are output global functions are not Function information function If a function is defined in the boot area and referenced by the flash area then for the boot area boot is output R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 119 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 8 Memory Bank Relocation Support Tool The memory bank relocation support tool outputs the following files Function information file Replacement information file Object information file Reference information file 3 8 1 Function information file The function information file contains information for allocating C source files to the optimum area common area or bank area To configure the function information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab In the Output File category
574. sociates DF online Services 9HighMAT CD Writing Wizard O Outlook Express InstallShield Installation Information 3 TTERMPRO 2 aire Uninstall Information Internet Explorer Windows Media Connect 2 Lhasa Windows Media Player Maruo windows NT Messenger WindowsUpdate O microsoft frontpage WinMerge Movie Maker xerox 3 4 A Netrronk i 5 Program exe Cancel Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Open with Selected Application from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the application to open the file is stored Program folder for Windows XP C Program Files is selected by default 2 File list area File list that matches to the selections in the Look in area and File of type area is shown 3 File name area Specify the executable file name of the application to open the file R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 314 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Specify the executable file type of the application to open the file Program exe Executable format default All Files All the formats Function buttons Open Opens the file with the specified application Cancel Closes this dialog box
575. ss list file List file output by the preprocess instructions such as include ASCII image file Cross reference list file List file containing the function name and variable name information used in the C source file Error list file List file containing the source file and compiler error messagesNe 2 cer her er CC I O files Temporary file Intermediate file for compiling The file is renamed to an appropriate name when compiling ends without error and is deleted when compiling ends in error nn file name fixed Function information file 3 Note File specifying where the functions are allocated to Notes 1 The file type of the variables information file cannnot be omitted The default file type of the variables information file output by the variables information file generator is 2 The following 4 file types are available for error list files cer File Type Description Error list files with C source corresponding to c files output by specifying the se option R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 334 of 585 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE CubeSuite V1 01 00 File Type Description Error list files with C source corresponding to h files output by specifying the se option Error list files with C source corresponding to files other than the above output by specifying the se option 3 Only d
576. ss of the flash memory area here The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFF Figure 2 81 Set flash start address and Flash start address Property in Boot Area E Device Use on chip debug No Set flash start address d Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select No on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category default Figure 2 82 Split hex file Property in Boot Area E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildM odeN ame Hex file name ProjectN ame hex 3 Run a build of the boot area project When you run a build of the boot area project a load module file is created A hex file is also created If a variables information file is generated it will be input into the compiler automatically and a rebuild will be executed again Remark The variables information file generated in a Set variables relocation options is overwritten by running a build R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 63 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 83 Created Files for Boot Area Project Tree EME boot Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller e A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File a tl Build tool generated files im boot Im map boot map hex boot hex sym
577. ssage you can display the help related to that line s message Files generated by the build tool appear on the Project Tree panel under the Build tool generated files node Figure 2 113 Build Tool Generated Files Project Tree x ERE z sample Project uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool p Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 3 g Build tool generated files im sample Inf map sample map hex sample hex sym sample sym X p c main c Remark Files displayed under the Build tool generated files node are as follows For other than library projects Load module file Imf Link list file map Error list file elk Hex file hex hxb hxf Symbol table file sym Error list file eoc Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 81 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS For library projects Library file lib List file Ist Replacement information file txt Object information file txt Reference information file txt Caution The Build tool generated files node is created during build This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Out of build target files run a build of o
578. t enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used When n 4 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers m Structure union array Omitted All variables The sreg declared variable is assigned to the saddr area regardless of the rs option specification The variable assigned to the saddr area by specifying this option is handled in a similar way to a sreg declared auto variable Example of use To assign the char or unsigned char type static auto variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 rsi R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 353 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization specification The optimization specification options are as follows q nq q nq Description format qloptimization type two or more types can be specified nq Interpretation when omitted qcjlvw Function The q option specifies to call the optimization phase to generate efficient objects The nq option disables the q option Application Use the q option to improve the execution speed of the objects and reduce the code size If you want to perform multiple optimizations simultaneously when the q option is specified specify the optimization types consecutively Se
579. t its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Update Dependencies of active project Updates the dependency of the file in the active project to build Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to batch build Build Option List R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Lists the currently set build option in the Output panel 2tENESAS Page 143 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Toolbar Buttons used in build process are displayed a Build toolbar Build toolbar shows buttons used in build process Builds projects The subproject is also built when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuilds projects The subproject is also rebuilt when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean in operation 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Editor panel Output panel See the each panel section for details of the contents of the display R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
580. t box Up to 259 characters Select the format of the hex file to be generated This corresponds to the k option of the object converter This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default Intel expanded hex format kie How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel standard hex for mat ki Specify the Intel standard hex format as the for mat of the hex file to be generated Intel expanded hex for mat kie Specify the Intel expanded hex format as the format of the hex file to be generated Motorola S type for mat standard address km Specify the Motorola S type format standard address as the format of the hex file to be gen erated Motorola S type for mat 32 bit address kme Specify the Motorola S type format 32 bit address as the format of the hex file to be gen erated Expanded Tektronix hex format kt Specify the expanded Tektronix hex format as the format of the hex file to be generated The detailed information on the device is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 168 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Security ID Specify the security ID of an on chip flash memory device This corresponds to the gi option of the linker This property is invalid when the Boot area load modu
581. t is valid If the np option is specified the kx option is invalid Cautions A control instruction XKREF NOXREF or XR NOXR with the same function as the kx and nkx options can be described at the beginning of the source The description format is shown below ASAXREF ASAXR abbreviated form ASANOXREF ASANOXR abbreviated form Example of use To output a cross reference list followed by an assemble list file into an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm kx The contents of kKOmain prn is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 413 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Cross Reference List VALUE R ATTR RTYP SEGNAME XREFS CSEG CODE CONVAH DATA HDTSA MAIN SAMPM START STASC R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 414 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list file format specification The assemble list file format specification options are as follows lw lf nlf Iw Description format lw number of characters Interpretation when omitted lw132 80 characters in the case of display output Function The Iw option specifies the number of characters per line in a list file Application Use the lw option to change the number of characters per line in any type of list file Des
582. t of the hex file to be generated Intel expanded hex format kie Specify the Intel expanded hex format as the format of the hex file to be generated Motorola S type format standard address km Specify the Motorola S type format standard address as the format of the hex file to be generated Motorola S type format 32 bit address kme Specify the Motorola S type format 32 bit address as the format of the hex file to be generated Expanded Tektronix hex format kt Specify the expanded Tektronix hex format as the format of the hex file to be generated R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 219 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Split hex file Select whether to split up the file into separate hex format files one for the boot area and one for other areas when specifying boot area ROM program linking for a product with built in flash memory This corresponds to the zf option of the object converter Do not set this property for a device that does not have a flash ROM area self programming function This property is not displayed when No no in the Output hex file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes zf Splits the file into separate hex files one for the boot area and one for other areas No Does not split the file into separate hex files one for the boot ar
583. t on the command line or when the same compile option is specified repeatedly each time compilation is performed To start up the assembler from a parameter file specify the parameter file option f on the command line Start up the C compiler from a parameter file as follows X gt cc78k0 ACsource file name A fparameter file name Parameter file specification option parameter file name A file which includes the data required to start up the C compiler Remark Create the parameter file using an editor The rules for writing the contents of a parameter file are as follows A option Aoption If the C source file name is omitted from the command line only 1 C source file name can be specified in the parameter file The C source file name can also be written after the option Write in the parameter file all compile options and output file names specified in the command line Example Create a parameter file kKOmain pcc using an editor and then start up the C compiler parameter file cF051144 kOmain c e a c gt ee7 K0 fkOmain pcc R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 338 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Execution start and end messages a Execution start message When the C compiler is started up an execution startup message appears on the display 78K0 C Compiler Vx xx xx xxx KXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation
584. t the on chip debug user option byte and security ID 1 Setting the on chip debug The on chip debug function of the microcontroller is enabled by setting the on chip debug Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Set the on chip debug in the Device category If you select Yes go on the Use on chip debug property the Debug monitor area size byte property are displayed Figure 2 74 Use on chip debug and Debug monitor area size byte Property Use on chip debug Yes go Debug monitor area size byte z nm on D lt Set flash start address No Boot area load module file name On the Debug monitor area size byte property specify the size of the debug monitor area in decimal The range that can be specified for the value is 256 to 1024 default 256 2 Set the user option byte By setting the user option byte settings for the watchdog timer low voltage detection circuit and system reserved area are made The settings for the user option byte are also made in the Device category on the Link Options tab If you select Yes gb on the Set user option byte property the User option byte value property is displayed Figure 2 75 Set user option byte and User option byte value Property E Device Use on chip debug Yes go Yes gb res 3000000002 Boot area load module file name On the User option byte value property specify the
585. t this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Cleans the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation ztENESAS Page 152 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects files and category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to
586. ted If a file name which includes a path name is specified a library file will be input from that path An error occurs if no library file exists in the specified path If a file name which does not include a path name is specified a library file will be input from the path specified by the i option or from the default search path If two or more b options are specified library files will be input in a specified sequence Up to 10 b options can be specified See B 5 Librarian for details about the method of creating library files Example of use To input a library file kO lib describe as kOsub rel is registered in the library file C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel bk0 1lib R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 465 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library file read path specification The library file read path specification option is as follows Description format ipath name path name two or more path names can be specified Interpretation when omitted Path specified by environmental variable LIB78K0 Current path if environmental variable LIB78KO is not specified Function The i option specifies that a library file is to be input from the specified path Application Use the i option to search a library file from a certain path Description The i option is only valid when a library file name is specified by the b option w
587. ted _ STEND FE10H _ STBEG FE20H Segment size DQ 310H FBOOH R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 450 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link directive file specification The link directive file specification option is as follows d Description format Interpretation when omitted None Function The d option specifies that the specified file is to be input as a link directive file Application When you wish to define a new memory area redefine the default memory area or allocate a segment toa specific address or memory area you will need to create a link directive file Use the d option to input this link directive file to the linker Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of link directive files is not permitted The number of characters that can be described within a link directive file is unlimited An abort error occurs if the d option is specified two or more times or if two or more file names are specified See CubeSuite 78KO Coding for details about link directive files Example of use Redefine the default memory area ROM RAM The contents of the link directive file kO dr is as follows MEMORY ROM 0000h 1000h MEMORY RAM OFE20h 1E0h To link the link directive file kO dr describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel dk0O dr R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENE
588. ted Path specified by environmental variable TMP Current path if environmental variable TMP is not specified Function The t option specifies a path in which a temporary file is created Application Use the t option to specify the location for creation of a temporary file Description Only a path can be specified as a path name The path name is cannot be omitted Even if a previously created temporary file exists if the file is not protected it will be overwritten As long as the required memory size is available the temporary file will be expanded in memory If not enough memory is available the contents of the temporary file will be written to a disk Such temporary files may be accessed later through the saved disk file Temporary files are deleted when library formation is finished They are also deleted when library formation is aborted by pressing the keys CTRL C key The path in which the temporary file is created is determined according to the following sequence 1 The path specified by the t option 2 Path specified by environmental variable TMP when the t option is omitted 3 Current path when TMP is not set Caution When 1 or 2 is specified if the temporary file cannot be created in the specified path an abort error occurs Example of use To output a temporary file to folder C tmp describe as C gt 1b78k0 tC tmp R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Pa
589. ted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a variables information file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other variables information files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted 2 10 2 Display ROM RAM usage You can use the variables information file generator to display the ROM RAM usage after the linking to the Output panel Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Variables Relocation Options tab on the Property panel To display the ROM RAM usage select Yes on the Output ROM RAM usage property in the ROM RAM Amount Information category No is selected by default Figure 2 57 Output ROM RAM usage Property Output ROM RAM usage When you run a build the ROM RAM usage is output to the Output panel following the build results First the total amount uses is output followed by the usage for each memory area Figure 2 58 ROM RAM Usage Display Start build all Tuesday April 27 2010 7 48 55 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gt sre main c gt DefaultBuild sample lmf gt De faultBuild sample hex gt vf78k0 exe Memory Area Information wee ROM 17H byte s real data RAM OH byte s real data Memory Area Information in ROM wee ROM 17H byte s Memory Area Information in RAM wee OH byte s Build ended Error 0 Warning
590. ted function prototype uPD78F0511_44 and 14 5 warning s found Format Displayed in x yz format Date System date Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format System time Displayed in HH MM SS format Command line R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Outputs the command line contents following CC78KO Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character 7tENESAS Page 96 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Description C source file name CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Format Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted c is attached as the file type extension Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Error list file name Outputs the specified file name If the file type is omitted cer is attached Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line Parameter file contents Outputs the parameter file contents Contents after column 80 are output beginning at column 13 on the next line One or more white space tabs are replaced by a single white space character C source This is the input C source image Contents after column 80 are not wrapped to the next line Error message number Outputs error numbers in the nnnn format F is output if is an abort error E if it is a fata
591. tension iss NO Ko Memory Model 10 Output File 11 Assembly File Variables Information File Function Information File 14 Data Control List File Others Bek ye ee a ee ee Re eR ey ee eee ee aR ee R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 174 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 5 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property Debug nformaton Add debug information YYes Add to both assembly and object file g2 E Optimization Perform optimization Yes Standard qx2 E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undefinition Macro undefinition 0 E Startup Use standard startup routine Yes Normal Use fixed area used by standard library Yes Using standard startup routine Al rel E Library Use standard library Yes Not use multiply and divide instruction No Use standard 1 0 library supported floating point data No Use multiplier and divider Yes Using standard libraries Using standard libraries 3 Message Extension Memory Model OutputFile Assembly File Function Information File Variables Information File DataControl List File Others Add debug informaton Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug Description of each category 1 Debug Inf
592. ter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default Configuration of the general option How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 259 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on an assemble source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Assemble Options tab If the settings are changed from the Assemble Options tab the properties are displayed in boldface Remarks 1 This tab is displayed when Yes in the Set individual assemble option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected 2 This tab is also displayed when a C source file is selected and Yes is selected in the Output assemble file property in the Assembly File category from the Individual Compile Options tab 1 Debug Information 1 2 Preprocess 3 Output File 4 Assemble List 5 Others Figure A 20 Property Panel Individual Assembl
593. th the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed after compile processing The placeholders can be described in the script The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly en
594. that use the saddr area i e register variables in the interrupt function arguments automatic variables in the norec function arguments of the run time library is not performed in the static model whereas it is performed in the normal model Memory capacitance is saved since data is shared with two or more leaf functions Application Use the sm option to improve the object execution speed and make interrupt servicing faster and change a normal model to a static model Description All function arguments are given via a register and a function assigns function arguments and automatic variables to a static area The leaf function assigns function arguments and automatic variables from higher addresses to the FEDFH and lower area of the saddr in the description order This saddr area is called common area since this area is shared by the leaf functions of all modules The value of n indicates the size of the common area When n 0 or n is omitted there is no common area The compiler defined macro _STATIC_MODEL is regarded as 1 sreg __sreg keyword can be added to function arguments and automatic variables The function arguments and automatic variables that have an sreg __sreg keyword added are assigned to the saddr area and can be manipulated in 1 bit units By specifying the rk option the function argument and automatic variable except for a static variable in a function are assigned to the saddr area an
595. the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 266 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble process The following placeholders are supported Ing ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name nputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product OutputDir Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WWinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the
596. the File type area is added as an extension for example if you designate aaa txt as a file name and select C source file c as file type the file is named as aaa txt c 3 File location area Designate the location to create a file by directly entering its path or selecting from Refer button The default file location is the project folder path a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected a path is added in the text box Remarks 1 When the text box is left blank the project folder is regarded to be designated 2 When the relative path is used the path is regarded to be from the project folder Remark The number of characters that can be entered in the File name area and the File location area is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip in the File name area Message Description The file name including the path is too long Make it The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path includes the folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is designated The charac characters cannot be used lt gt ters lt gt cannot be used for the file na
597. the nka nks and nkx options are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If the np option is specified the ka option is invalid Example of use To output an assemble list file into an assemble list file kKOmain prn describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ka The contents of kKOmain prn is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 410 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assemble list STNO ADRS OBJECT M I SOURCE STATEMENT 1 2 NAME SAMPM PRERRERERR AREER EK RRER ERK EERE EERE RE KE RER KE HEX gt ASCII Conversion Program main routine i BA AIS ARI I A AGI AE IE A IS IE AAG ERA ICO AAG SR RT PUBLIC MAIN START EXTRN CONVAH AT OFE20H 1 2 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 11201A HDTSA 1AH 27 1620FE HL HDTSA set hex 2 code data in HL registor R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 411 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ks nks Description format nks Interpretation when omitted nks Function The ks option outputs a symbol list followed by an assemble list into an assemble list file The nks option disables the ks option Application Use the ks option to output a symbol list Description If the nka nks and nkx options are all specified the assemble list file cannot be output If the ks and kx options are sp
598. the configuration can be changed Add debug information 2 Optimization Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Add to object file only g1 Adds debug information to the object module file being generated Yes Add to both assembly and object file g2 Adds debug information to the object module file and assembler source module file being gener ated No Does not add debug information to the object mod ule file being generated The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Perform optimization R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Select the type of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the qx option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Speed prece dence qx1 Performs optimization with the execution speed pre cedence Yes Standard qx2 Performs optimization with both the execution speed and module size precedence Yes Code size pre cedence qx3 Performs optimization with the module size prece dence Yes Code size Best qx4 Performs op
599. the flash start address for the built in flash ROM product Flash start address Specify the start address for the built in flash ROM product in hexadecimal without Ox This corresponds to the zb option of the linker Do not set this property for a device that does not have a flash ROM area self programming function This property is not displayed when No in the Set flash start address property is selected Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box Restriction 0 to FFFF hexadecimal number Boot area load module Specify the boot area load module file name when the load module file for the flash area is file name generated This corresponds to the zf option of the linker If this field is blank a link error occurs Be sure to specify the boot area load module file name If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different When this property is specified the setting of the Security ID property in the Device category form Common Options tab is invalid Default Blank How to change Directly enter to the text box or edit by the Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters 6 Message
600. the number of characters per line in the cross reference list file prime xrf describe as C gt cc78k0 cF051144 prime c x lw72 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 375 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format ll number of lines Interpretation when omitted ll66 65535 characters in the case of console output Function The Il option specifies the number of lines per page in each type of list file Application Use the Il option to change the number of lines per page in each type of list file Description The range number of lines that can be specified with the Il option is 20 to 65535 If IlO is specified no page breaks will be made If the number of lines is omitted the number of lines per page is 66 lines 65535 lines in the case of console output If the list file is not specified the Il option is invalid Example of use To specify 20 as the number of lines per page in the cross reference list file prime xrf describe as C gt cc78kO cF051144 prime c x 1120 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 376 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description format lt number of characters Interpretation when omitted t8 Function The It option specifies the basic number of characters for outputting a horizontal tabulation HT code in the source fi
601. the saddr area Yes Size of char short int rk2 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer func tion pointer when the bank function mf is not used types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Size of char short int long rk4 Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer types automatic variables to the saddr area Yes Structure union array rkm Yes Size of char and structure union array rk1m Yes Size of char short int and structure union array rk2m Yes Size of char short int long and structure union array rk Allocates structure union and array types auto matic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer func tion pointer when the bank function mf is not used structure union and array types auto matic variables to the saddr area Allocates char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointer structure union and array types automatic variables to the saddr area No 2tENESAS Does not allocate automatic variables to the saddr area Page 253 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Allocat
602. the stack size specification file that you would like to set dynamically using the following format function name ADD additional margin RECTIME recursion depth CALL callee function Set the frame size of function _flib written in assembly language to 50 flib ADD 50 Set the frame size of function sub2 written in C to 100 sub2 ADD 100 Set the recursion depth of recursive function sub3 written in C to 123 sub3 RECTIME 123 From the Stack Usage Tracer window select File menu gt gt Load Stack Size Specification File The Open dialog box opens Specify the stack size specification file then click the Open button R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 91 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS This chapter describes format and other aspects of lists output by the build via various commands 3 1 C Compiler The C compiler outputs the following files Assembler source file Error list file Preprocess list file Cross reference list file Remark See B 1 1 O files for details about input and output files of the C compiler 3 1 1 Assembler source file The assembler source file is an ASCII image list of C source compilation results and is a source file in assembly language that corresponds to the target C source program It can also include the C source to this file as comments by setting the assemble
603. the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 64 items can be specified However this also includes the number of paths used by linked tools R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 261 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use whole include paths Select whether to assemble using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build tool property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab of the build tool to be used This corresponds to the i option of the assembler The paths are added to the i option according to the following sequence Paths specified in the System include paths property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Macro definition Specify the macro name to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The def part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the d option of the assembler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the general opt
604. ther than a numerical value is specified Specify the start address of the address area for filling to be performed as start address The range that can be specified for the value is OH to the largest address in program space other than SFR area It can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified If the start address is omitted it is assumed that 0 has been specified Specify the size of the address area for filling to be performed as size The range that can be specified for the value is 1H to the largest address in program space other than SFR area 1H It can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers An abort error occurs if a numerical value outside this range or something other than a numerical value is specified When start address has been specified size cannot be omitted If start address nor size is specified the object converter performs processing assuming that the range of the internal ROM is specified If both the u and nu options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the no option is specified the u and nu option are invalid Two or more address ranges cannot be specified by using the u option Specification formats for start address and size by the u option and their interpretation are as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev
605. timization with top precedence to module size In addition qx3 common code is placed in subrou tines and the library for the stack access is used Yes Detail setting The Optimization Details category is shown The option that is selected in the category has the prece dence for the optimization When No nq is selected in all the properties in the Optimization Details category the optimization will not be done 2tENESAS Does not specify optimization Page 242 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 3 Optimization Details APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The detailed information on the optimization are displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes Detail setting in the Perform optimization property in the Optimiza tion category is selected Swap order of formula operations Assign automatic vari ables to register or saddr area Select whether to output an efficient code in order to achieve efficient register utilization by swapping the ex ecution order of formula This corresponds to the qw option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Select whether t This correspond Yes Swap order of for mula operations qw1 Swaps the order of formula operations Yes for speed assumed SADDR array is in 256 bytes qw2 In a
606. tion The rd option specifies to assign an external variable external static variable automatically to the saddr area The nr option disables the rd option Application Use the rd option to assign an external variable external static variable except for the const type variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether there is an sreg declaration or not Description Variables to be assigned change depending on the value of n and the specification of m Specification of n m Variable Types to Be Assigned to saddr Area When n 1 char unsigned char When n 2 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum data pointer function pointer when the bank function mf is not used When n 4 char unsigned char short unsigned short int unsigned int enum long unsigned long all pointers m Structure union array Omitted All variables The sreg declared variable is assigned to the saddr area regardless of the rd option specification The variable that is referenced by an extern declaration is processed as are to be assigned to the saddr area The variable assigned to the saddr area by specifying this option is handled in a similar way to a sreg variable Example of use To assign the char or unsigned char type external variable or external static variable automatically to the saddr area regardless of whether sreg has been declared describe a
607. tion corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of this node You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled while the build tool is running and if categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Rename You can rename the selected category node Property R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel 2tENESAS Page 156 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on
608. tion file B 7 1 I O files The I O files of the variables information file generator are shown below See 3 7 Variables Information File Generator for details about output file Table B 30 I O Files of Variables Information File Generator File Name Description Default File Type Input files Object module file Binary file including machine language informa tion relocation information relating to machine language allocation addresses and symbol infor mation File output by the compiler or assembler Library file File in which two or more object module files are included File output by the librarian Link directive file File which contain link directives for the linker user created file Parameter file File containing the parameters for the executed programs user created file Load module file Load module file to be re input during self pro gramming R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 564 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file Variables information file File specifying allocation to the saddr area and callt table area it is a list of variables to be refer enced B 7 2 Functions 1 Generating the variables information file The variables functions information file generator counts the number of references when resolving relocations of variables and outputs a file with information to allocate them efficiently This informatio
609. tion information to a stack size specification file Exit sk78k0 Closes this window Remark The output result file can only be saved in text format txt or CSV format csv b View menu Recalculate Stack Size Recalculates the total stack size Functions in the same manner as the button Stop Forcibly stop the action of the stack usage tracer e g recalculating the total stack size Functions in the same manner as the button Sort List by c Option menu Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Changes the function display order in the list display area Function Name Sort by function name Icon Type Sort by icon display priority High HJ to Low HH Stack Size Sort by total stack size Frame Size Sort by frame size Additional Margin Sort by additional margin File Name Sort by file name Opens the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box to display a list of functions with unknown frame size functions for which information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified and functions for which the stack usage tracer has forcibly set an additional margin Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the tree display area list display area This dialog box is
610. tion of the compiler The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use the text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 30 items can be specified 5 Message The detailed information on messages are displayed and the configuration can be changed Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution status of the compiler to the Output panel during build This corresponds to the v option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes v Displays the execution status of the compiler during build No Does not display the execution status of the compiler dur ing build R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 247 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Warning level Select the warning display level under compiling This corresponds to the w option of the compiler Default Configuration of the general option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction No output w0 Does not output warning messages Normal output Outputs normal warning messages Particular output w2 Outputs detailed warning messages 6 Extens
611. tion specification options are as follows km nkm kd nkd kp nkp kl nkl km nkm Description format nkm Interpretation when omitted km Function The km option outputs a map list into a link list file The nkm option disables the kd and km option Application Use the km option to output a map list into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the nkm option is specified the link directive file cannot be output into a link list file If both the km and nkm options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the km option is invalid Example of use To output a map list into a link list file kO map describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel kOsub rel pkO map km The contents of kO map is as follows R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 453 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 78K0 Linker Vx xx Command kOmain rel kOsub rel pk0 map km Para file Out file kOmain lmf Map file kO map Direc file Directive Link information 3 output segment s 2FH byte s real data 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 8000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 002H CSEG AT 00
612. tions under Unknown Functions in the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box Tree display for recursive functions The window s tree display area only displays up to the second call of a recursive function Consequently the third and subsequent calls are hidden Library functions bsearch exit and qsort The stack usage tracer treats bsearch exit and qsort as unknown functions even if they are in a library file pro vided by the build tool Consequently if you are using these functions you must set the relevant information e g recursion depth and callee functions in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Callee functions The stack usage tracer only allows the following types of callee functions to be added in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box functions contained in C source files and functions that are explicitly called not called using a pointer Consequently the All Functions section of the Adjust Stack Size dialog box only displays functions meeting the above conditions R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 324 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Functions called by multiple functions The stack usage tracer treats the stack information of functions called by multiple functions as unique Conse quently it is not possible to change the stack information for such functions depending on which function is calling them Example If you select function sub called by func
613. tiplier and divider Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel In the Library category if you select Yes on the Use standard library property the Use multiplier and divider property is displayed When using a standard library which supports the multiplier and divider select Yes default when not using one select No Figure 2 36 Use standard library and Use multiplier and divider Property 1 qd Use standard library Yes Not use multiply and divide instruction No E AA R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 33 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Set Assemble Options To set options for the assembler select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 37 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property aq CA78KO Property E Debug nformaton Add debug information Yes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition 0 E Output File Output common object file for various devices No Output error list file No Add debug informaton Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug
614. tor E Open with Selected Application BE Open Folder with Explorer Add gt Ra Remove From Project Shift Del t Copy Ctrl C 14 ae Rename F2 Property R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 85 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When assembling an assembler source file Select an assembler source file on the project tree and select the Assemble from the context menu Figure 2 119 Assemble Item a E File P Startup Bah main asz Assemble me a LJ Open H Open with Internal Editor E Open with Selected Application B Open Folder with Explorer Add gt Rl Remove From Project Shift Del t Copy Ctrl C ae Rename F2 FA Property 2 16 6 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click on the toolbar 2 16 7 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build output messages of the build tool that displayed on the Output panel Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box opens Figure 2 120 Save As Dialog Box Save As Save in sample 4 De My Recent sample _lib Documents e Desktop My Documents gs My Computer File name Output Build Tool txt My Network Save as type Text Files txt In the dialog box specify the file to be saved and then
615. troller A CA78KO Build Tool S 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E File B ral Build tool generated Files txt sample_replace txt txt sample_objinfo txt txt sample_refinfo txt im sample Imf map sample map hex sample hex sym sample sym 5X Startup c main c fin sample fin 2 Changing the relocation destination of the auto generated function information file If a warning W1402000 occurs while running a build in 1 you must change the relocation destination Below is the procedure for relocating the C source files after you have changed the relocation destination a Change the relocation destination When changing the relocation destination perform the actions while making reference to the auxiliary information files replacement information file object information file and reference information files The example of changing the relocation destination is shown below lt 1 gt If you could not relocate files containing functions that cannot be relocated to the common area or bank area Select files in the function information file defined for relocation to the common area files with C specified as the relocation destination that can be relocated to the bank area and change their relocation destination to the bank area Whether the selected file can be relocated to the bank area can be identified by referring to the replacement information file Files that can be relocated only to th
616. ts error numbers in the nnnn format F is output if is an abort error E if it is a fatal error C if is an Internal error and W if it is a warning nnnn the error number is displayed as a 4 digit decimal number no zero suppression 4 Error message Outputs error messages 5 Target device for this compiler Displays the target device as specified via command line option c or the source file 6 Device file version Displays the version number of the input device file 7 Number of errors Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 8 Number of warnings Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed 3 1 3 Preprocess list file The preprocess list file is an ASCII image file that contains results of C source preprocessing only When specifying the k option a preprocess list file can be used as a C source file unless n has been specified as the processing type When the kd option is specified the list with define expansion is output To configure the preprocess list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Compile Options tab Select Yes p on the Output preprocess list file property in the List File category The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output
617. ub rel dk0 dr pk0O map kd Para file Out file kOmain Map file kO map Direc file k0O dr lt Link directive file name Directive MEMORY ROM Oh 4000h lt Contents of link directive file MEMORY RAM Ofe20h 1000h Link information 3 output segment s 48H byte s real data R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 455 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 23 symbol s defined Memory map SPACE REGULAR MEMORY ROM BASE ADDRESS 0000H SIZE 1000H OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BASE SEGMENT SEGMENT MODULE ADDRESS CODE 0000H 0002H CSEG AT R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 456 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE kp nkp Description format kp nkp Interpretation when omitted nkp Function The kp option outputs a public symbol list into a link list file The nkp option disables the kp option Application Use the kp option to output a public symbol list into a link list file Description If the nkm nkp and nkl options are all specified the link list file cannot be output If the ng option is specified the public symbol list cannot be output If both the kp and nkp options are specified at the same time the option specified last is valid If the np option is specified the kp option is invalid Example of use To output a public symbol list
618. ubeSuite On CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select Property from the View menu The Property panel opens Next select the Assemble Options tab You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 4 Property Panel Assemble Option Tab Property A CA78KO Property E DebugInformaton Add debug information El Preprocess Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition E Output File Yes Local symbols info and assembler debugging info Additional include paths 0 System include paths 0 Macro definition 0 Output common object file for various devices No Output error list file Assemble List Others Add debug information No Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g and ga options Compile B 2 4 Option 1 Types Object Co Variables The assemble options are detailed instructions for the operation of the assembler The types and explanations for assemble options are shown below Classification Table B 6 Assemble Options Option Description Device type specification Specifies the type of the target device Object module file output 0 Specifies the output of an object module file specification no Forced object module file output j Forces the output of an object mod
619. ubeSuite V1 01 00 tENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT0783EJ0100
620. ude paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 4 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 31 Macro definition Property El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 em ir de natn If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 32 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Text TEST 1 TIME 10 Enter the macro definition in Text in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 30 line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 33 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Faf Macro definition Macro definition 2 0 TEST 1 1 TIME 10 Macro undefinition U R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 32 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Rem
621. uild menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area Show the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Sets the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode Build mode list area Show all the build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list 2 lt Current build mode in the selected project is selected by default The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always shown at the top R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 293 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens and the build mode is duplicated with the name entered and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently open ing project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild is duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted Rename Renames the selected build mode Rena
622. uild option list Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Set the Format of build option list property in the Others category Figure 2 98 Format of build option list Property O Others ormat of build emporary folder Commands executed before build processing Commands executed before build processing 0 Commands executed after build processing Commands executed after build processing 0 The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link TargetFiles Program Options is set by default 2 15 5 Change the file build target project When running a build that targets a specific project main project or subproject you must set that project as the active project To set the active project select the main project or subproject to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu Figure 2 99 Set selected project as Active Project Item A upp7eFosss Build sample E A Pin Configura Rebuild sample m P Code Genera Ay CA78KO Build S gt 78KO Simulate BE Open Folder with Explorer Program Anal _4 Clean sample Add gt w File iR Set sub as Active
623. uild target file added directly below the Startup node on the project tree is treated as the star tup file It is not treated as a startup file if it is added to the category below the Startup node When adding a startup file to the Startup node if a startup file has already been added then only the latest startup file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting a startup file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other startup files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be tar geted Remark See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding for the method of creating the startup routine R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 15 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Add a file to a project Files can be added to a project by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add individual files Drag a folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The file is added below the File node Figure 2 5 Project Tree Panel File Drop Location Project Tree 2 O8 B E F uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool S gt 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool To Ce Program Analyzer Analyze Tool g File
624. ule file specification p nj Debug information output g Specifies that debug information local symbol information is to specification ng be added to an object module file ga Specifies that assembler source debug information is to be added to an object module file nga Include file read path specification Reads an include file from a specified path R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 398 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Classification Assemble list file output specification APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Description Specifies the output of an assemble list file Assemble list file information specification Outputs an assemble list into an assemble list file Outputs a symbol list into an assemble list file Outputs a cross reference list into an assemble list file Assemble list file format specification Changes the number of characters printed per line in an assemble list file Changes the number of lines printed per page in an assemble list file Outputs the specified character strings in the header of an assemble list file Specifies the number of expansion characters of a tab Inserts a form feed code at the end of an assemble list file Error list file output specification Outputs an error list file Parameter file specification Inputs the input file name and options from a specified file Temporary file c
625. ults of the assemble with error messages if errors occur To configure the assemble list output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes p on the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Assemble list 1 ALNO 2 STNO 6 ADRS 1 1 2 2 0006 0009 7 ERROR E2202 STNO 31 000D 000E 0010 Segment informations 9 ADRS 10 LEN 11 NAME 0003H DATA 0002H CODE 0017H CSEG Target chip 12 uPD78xxx Device file 13 Vx xx Assembly complete 8 OBJECT R220000 14 1 error s CALL 5 SOURCE STATEMENT SAMPM CONVAH 7 convert ASCII lt HEX output BC register lt ASCII code 00000000 MOV DE STASC set DE lt store ASCII code table Illegal operand and 15 0 warning s found 16 31 R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 103 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Description Line number of source image CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Format Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed Line number Outputs a right aligned decimal value with zeroes suppressed The expansion of INCLUDE files and macros are included Macro display Displays a macro M This is a macro definition line n This is a macro expansion line n is the nest level Blank This is not a
626. umber of characters is variable and is calculated by the following 1 higher address base address R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 503 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Table B 20 Symbol Block Symbol Definition Fields for Extended Tektronix Number of ASCII Characters Description Displays 1 digit hexadecimal indicating global local symbol specification and type of value 1 Global address 2 Global scalar 3 Global code address 4 Global data address 5 Local address 6 Local scalar 7 Local code address 8 Local data address Symbol Indicates the symbol length This is variable Numerical value d Motorola S type format This is the value corresponding to a symbol Number of characters is variable Change generated hex files have three types of records and consist of five records The overall structure of the file is shown in the figure below Figure B 29 Motorola S type Format Header record Data record Data record End record Types of records are shown below Table B 21 Record Types for Motorola Hex File Type Record Type Header record optional SO Data record S2 Standard 24 bits S3 32 bits End record S8 Standard 24 bits S7 32 bits Motorola hex format files are divided into standard 24 bit addresses and 32 bit addresses Standa
627. unc_flash2 In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the boot area cannot be referenced from the flash area 3 Realizing relink function This section describes specifically how to realize the relink function a Project of CubeSuite To realize the relink function a boot area and flash area must be separately created This means that only the flash area is modified after the boot area has been created after a program has been stored in ROM When creating a project with CubeSuite therefore divide the projects as follows Project to be allocated to the boot area Project to be allocated to the flash area project that may be modified in the future In addition separately prepare a startup routine and link directive file for each project b pragma ext_func directive When calling a function in the flash area from the boot area the name of the function to be called label name and ID number are assigned to the boot area by using the pragma ext_func directive The format of the pragma ext_func directive is as follows pragma ext_func function name ID number Specify a positive number as the ID number The different ID number must not be specified for the same function name or the same ID number must not be specified for the different function names When a function name in the flash area is specified in the boot area by
628. unction defined in the file external symbol name 2tENESAS Page 125 of 585 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Format Number 14 Total size of segments at Outputs the total size of the segments to which the files is to be relocated relocation destination 3 8 4 Reference information file The reference information file is an auxiliary information file with details about C source files and assembler source files Unlike other auxiliary information files changing the allocation destination will not change the information in this file To configure the reference information file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Memory Bank Relocation Options tab select Yes on the Use memory bank relocation support tool property in the Output File category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for reference information file property and the Reference information file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node xxxx x Global Symbol Reference Table 1 FILE 2 GLOBAL 3 REFERED 4 REFERED NAME FUNCTION COUNT COUNT FROM FROM OUTSIDE INSIDE filel000_3 c _filel000_3 asm2 asm _bank0_1 asm3 asm _common2 _bank1_1 _bank2_1 Item Description Number File name Outputs the file name Global function name Outputs the name of th
629. up routine with ROMization processing so you can eliminate the effort to code ROMization processing at startup Remark See CubeSuite 78K0 Coding about the ROMization function Macro function When you write the same instructions multiple times in the assembler source file you can define that instructions as a single macro name Remark See CubeSuite 78KO Coding about the macro function R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 10 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the build procedure using CubeSuite and about the main build functions 2 1 Overview This section describes how to create a load module and user library 2 1 1 Create a load module The procedure for creating a load module is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 lt Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations If there is no subproject the project is always active Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 15 6 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files Rem
630. urce file and specification of this option are made in duplicate this option takes priority Be sure to see the user s manual of the device and set the user option byte R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 478 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To specify 30H at address 80H OOH at address 81H 00H at address 82H OOH at address 83H and 02H at address 84H as the user option byte value describe as C gt 1k78k0 kOmain rel gb3000000002H To allocate the copy routine for expanding ROMized segments in RAM area at address 300H describe as To target addresses OFCFOOH to FFFFFH for ROMization describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 479 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Help specification The help option is as follows Description format ed Interpretation when omitted No display Function The option outputs a help message on the display Application The help message is a list of explanations of the link options See these when executing the linker Description When the option is specified all other options are invalid To read the next part of the help message press the return key To quit the help display press any key other than the return key and then press the return key Caution This option cannot be specified from CubeSuite Example of use
631. use To output an error list file KOmain era describe as C gt ra78k0 cF051144 kOmain asm ekOmain era 78K0 Assembler Vx xx XX XXX XXXX Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation PASS1 Start kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand PASS2 Start kOmain asm 26 RA78KO error E2312 Operand out of range byte kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand Target chip uPD78F0511_44 Device file Vx xx Assembly complete 3 error s and 0 warning s found R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 425 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The contents of kOmain era is as follows PASS1 Start kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand PASS2 Start kOmain asm 26 RA78KO error E2312 Operand out of range byte kOmain asm 31 RA78KO error E2202 lllegal operand R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 426 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Parameter file specification The parameter file specification option is as follows f Description format Interpretation when omitted Options and input file names can only be input from the command line Function The f option inputs options and input file names from a specified file Application Use the f option when the information required to start up the assembler will not fit on the command line When specif
632. used instructions gt Delete After a b a is not referenced gt Delete a is an automatic variable Delete copies a b gt es bp d c atdj a is not referenced any more a is an automatic variable Change the calculation order inan_ The results of operations are left in the register and valid expression operations are executed first Memory device allocation Variables used locally are allocated to registers temporary variables Peephole optimization Replacement of special patterns Example a 1 gt a a 0 gt a Decrease the strength of the Example a 2 gt a a a lt lt 1 calculation Memory device allocation register Data is allocated to rapidly accessible memory variables Example Registers saddr only when the qr option is specified Jump optimization the qj option Consecutive jump instructions are combined into one instruction Register allocation the qv qr rd Variables are automatically allocated to registers rk rs options Remark a to g n and 0 are performed regardless of the optimization option specifications The optimizations in h to m q and r are performed when optimization options are specified Future support is planned for the optimizations in h to m p is performed when there are register declarations in the C source However the saddr area is only allocated when the qr option is specified See Optimizat
633. utput List Name Assemble list file Assemble list file headers Assemble list Symbol list Cross reference list Error list file Error list To configure the assemble list file output in CubeSuite on the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node then on the Property panel make the settings from the Assemble Options tab Select Yes p on the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category To output the error list file in the Output File category set the Output error list file property to Yes e The output destination is the folder set from the Common Options tab in the Output File Type And Path category in the Intermediate file output folder property Remark See B 2 1 O files for details about input and output files of the assembler 3 2 1 Assemble list file headers The header is always output at the beginning of an assemble list file 78K0 Assembler 1 Vx xx 2 SAMPLE_TITLE Date 3 xx XXX XXXX Page 4 Xxxx 5 SAMPLE_SUBTITLE Command 6 kOmain asm cF051144 Para file 7 ks kx In fine 8 kOmain asm Obj file 9 kOmain rel Prn file 10 kOmain prn Description Format Assembler version number Displayed in x yz format Title character string Outputs the character string specified by the Ih option or TITLE control instruction Date of assemble list creation Date of assemble list creation Displayed in DD Mmm YYYY format P
634. will be configured to use it Figure 2 85 Output folder for variables information file Property in Flash Area Variables information file name ProjectName vei Set the Output folder for variables information file property and the Variables information file name property to change the output folder and file name of the variables information file If the Variables information file property is changed an empty variables information file is generated and added to the project it will also appear in the File node of the project tree b Set compile options Select the Compile Options tab Select Yes zf on the Output objects for flash property in the Memory Model category Figure 2 86 Output objects for flash Property in Flash Area E Memory Model Yes zf Next select Yes For flash area on the Use standard startup routine property in the Startup category Figure 2 87 Use standard startup routine Property in Flash Area Yes For flash area Next add the created variables information file for the boot area in 2 14 2 Set the boot area project to the flash area project Specify the variables information file for the boot area on the Variables information file for boot area property in the Variable Information File category R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 65 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 88 Variables information file for boot area P
635. x xx xx XXX xx Copyright C xxxx xxxx Renesas Electronics Corporation usage oc78k0 option input file option The option is as follows means omissible ffile Input option or input file name from specified file o file no Create HEX module file with specified name Not s file ns Create symbol table file with specified name Not e file ne Create the error list file with the specified name Not r nr Sort HEX object by address Not uvalue start size nu Fill up HEX object with specified value Not kkind Select hex format I intel format IE intel extend format T tex format M s format ME s 32bit format ydirectory Set device file search path E Create boot hex module file HXB and flash hex module file HXF crcaddress start end start end method init Output CRC operation result value Show this message DEFAULT ASSIGNMENT o s r u0ffh R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 527 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 5 Librarian The librarian edits CA78KO object module files and library files in units of one module It also outputs a list file lf a librarian error occurs an error message is output to the display indicating the cause of the error Object module file output by the compiler or assembler B 5 1 I O files Library file Figure B 33 I O Files of Librarian Subcommand file
636. xadeci mal number starting with Ox or OX 4 Recursion Depth Specify the recursion depth either as a decimal number or as a hexadecimal number starting with Ox or OX Remark If the selected function is not a recursive function then this item will be grayed out 5 Callee Function List for Indirect Call area a Callee Functions Display a list of callee functions called by the selected function functions called indirectly using a function pointer or the like This area generally displays callee functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the callee function is written in assembly language or it is a system library function then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe callee function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe callee function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe callee function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the func tion name 5 Functions added intentionally from All Functions by clicking the Add button are shown with a plus sign appended to the end of the function name R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tE
637. y Figure B 23 Boot area load module file name Property in Flash Area E Device Use on chip debug No Set user option byte No Boot area load module file name boot D efaultB uild boot Imf lt 13 gt Set object convert options Select the Object Convert Options tab Select Yes zf on the Split hex file property in the Hex File category R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 492 of 585 Oct 01 2011 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE CubeSuite V1 01 00 Figure B 24 Split hex file Property in Flash Area E Hex File Output hex file Yes Output folder for hex file BuildModeN ame ProjectN ame hex Hex file name Split hex file lt 14 gt Run a build of the flash area project When you run a build of the flash area project a load module file which implements the relink function is created The boot area hex file the same content as the file created by building the boot area project and flash area hex file are also created Figure B 25 Created Files for Flash Area Project Tree x i cjflash Project a uPD78F0588_48 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CA78KO Build Tool 78K0 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 g File tl Build tool generated files imt Flash Imf map flash map hx Flash hxb bof Flash hxf sym Flash sym PY Startup c flash c dr link_flash dr wiil Flash vFi e How to
638. y The files that can be opened in the Editor panel are as follows C source file c Assembler source file asm Header file h inc Link directive file dr dir Link order specification file mtls Variable information file vfi Function information file fin Map file map Symbol table file sym Hex file hex hxb hxf Text file txt Note Note Only devices with a memory bank installed Remark You can use one of the methods below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag the file and drop it into the Editor panel Select the file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Copies the selected file or category node to the clipboard While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are cop ied to the clipboard Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or category node is selected Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below the selected node on the project tree While editing the file name or the category name insert the contents of the clipboard Note that this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project when multiple files and category nodes are selected and when the build tool is in operation Rename You can rename the selected project subproject file and category node
639. y Area Information in ROM ROM xxxxxH byte s ROM1 xxxxxH byte s x Memory Area Information in RAM RAM xxxxxH byte s RAM1 xxxxxH byte s First the total amount uses is output followed by the usage for each defined memory area Example of use To output ROM RAM usage after the linking to the standard output describe as C gt vf78k0 main rel sub rel vx To allocate the copy routine for expanding ROMized segments in RAM area at address 300H describe as To target addresses OFCFOOH to FFFFFH for ROMization describe as R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 576 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Symbols 2 h CC78K0 393 LB78K0 539 LCNV78KO 563 LK78KO 480 OC78K0 526 RA78KO0 436 pragma pc 344 asm 394 cer 334 dr 438 564 CCC 334 elk 439 elv 552 eoc 495 er 334 era 395 cher 334 hex 495 lib 438 528 564 mf 439 495 552 564 Ast 528 map 439 p 552 plk 438 564 plv 552 poc 495 pra 394 prn 395 552 fel 395 438 528 552 564 sym 495 vfi 565 A a CC78K0 365 Absolute assemble list 116 Active project 73 add 543 APPENDIX C INDEX Add a build mode 75 Add a file to a project 16 Add Existing File dialog box 302 Add File dialog box 275
640. y paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths 0 Device Message Stack Link List Error List Others Add debug information Adds debug information to the module being generated enabling source level debug This option corresponds to the g option R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 208 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information 2 Input File Select whether to enable source level debugging by adding debug information to the module being generated This corresponds to the g option of the linker Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Adds debug information to the object module file being generated No ng Does not add debug information to the object module file being generated The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using link directive file Display the link directive file to be used for linking This corresponds to the d option of the linker Default The link directive file name that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed 3 Output File The detailed information on output files are displayed and the
641. ying options repeatedly every time you perform assembly describe the options in the parameter file and specify the f option Description An abort error occurs if the file name is omitted Nesting of parameter files is not permitted An abort error occurs if the f option is specified within a parameter file The number of characters that can be described within a parameter file is unlimited Separate options or input file names with a blank space a tab or the line feed code LF Options and input file names within a parameter file will be expanded at the position specified for the parameter file on the command line The expanded options specified last takes precedence The characters following or are all assumed to be comments up to the line feed code LF or EOF An abort error occurs if the f option is specified two or more times Example of use Perform assembly using a parameter file Set the contents of the parameter file kKOmain pra as follows parameter file kOmain asm osample rel g cF051144 psample prn Enter the following from the command line C gt ra78k0O fkOmain pra R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 427 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Temporary file creation path specification The temporary file creation path specification option is as follows t Description format tpath name Interpretation when omitt
642. ymbols and public symbols defined in the input module is output to the link list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output symbol information is made with the Link List category 1 When outputting the local symbol list Figure 2 23 Link List Category For Local Symbol Information Output link list file Output with local symbol list Output with map list Yes Output with form feed control code No Number of lines on 1 page 66 If you select Yes default on the Output link list file property the Output with local symbol list property is dis played To output local symbol list to the link list file select Yes kl No is selected by default Remark See 3 3 4 Local symbol list for the local symbol list 2 When outputting the public symbol list Figure 2 24 Link List Category For Public Symbol Information i iis i SA Output link list file Yes Output with form feed control code No Number of lines on 1 page 66 If you select Yes default on the Output link list file property the Output with public symbol list property is dis played To output public symbol list to the link list file select Yes kp No is selected by default Remark See 3 3 3 Public symbol list for the public symbol list R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 28 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS
643. ypes displayed are shown below C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm Link directive file dr dir Variable information file vfi R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 277 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function information file fin Not Library file lib Object file rel Text file txt Note Only devices with a memory bank installed 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of subfolder levels to add to the project The default number is 1 Remark Decimal numbers of up to 10 are allowed When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip Message Description Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be Fewer than 0 or more than 10 subfolder levels have been specified specified Specify in decimal A number in other than base 10 format or a string has been specified Function buttons Button Function OK The folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder are added to the project And then close the dialog box Cancel Do not add a folder and files and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0783EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 278 of 585 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to

CubeSuite+ V1.01.00 Integrated Development Environment User`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents